Home

MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers

1. 4VDC1 VDC 2 DC DC AL A OUT 16 ny out 1 OUT 17 __ cr 4 NC fea our2 cR OUT 18 CR 4 EN a outs cR OUT 19 ouT4 Vy 1 OUT 20 4 OUT 5 Nj OUT 21 y 4 TN 22 OU oR zw pc 2077 24v pc OUT 23 outs cR OUT 24 OUT9 EnH OUT 25 CRH OUT 10 Vy 4 OUT 26 4 AEN fe OUT 11 CR OUT 27 CR 1 V f out 28 V OUT 13 cg OUT 29 CR OUT 14 Vy 1 OUT 30 y 41 OUT 15 A 4 OUT 31 v4 DC DC Y coms Y come DC DC COM 1 2 44925 1762 0V32T Wiring Diagram VDC 1 4VDC2 xDC 4DC A VDC 1 A VDC 2 CRH OUT 16 CR 4 i fe OUT 1 OUT 17 cR E C fani ZN OUT 2 MCR OUT 18 Am ours CR OUT 19 cR V 1 OUT 20 OUTS OUT 21 y 41 y OUT 6 ER OUT 22 h ZS 24V DC sink OUT7 C R 1 24V DC sink OUT 23 CR LN ZA OUT 8 CR OUT 24 CR 7 GR ET oUTS OUT 25 cR S OUT 10 Vy 1 OUT 2
2. DC sourcing DC sourcing N24 IN 9 3791 N 25 m IN 10 275 1 126 7 1 c1 27 2avoc 12 7 24v pc 28 7 7 13 N29 IN 14 0 2 IN 30 aan IN 15 ae N31 at DC DC DC sinking COM 2 DC sinking coma DC sourcing DC DC sourcing DC COM2 4 44920 1762 0 8 Wiring Diagram VAC T 0 OUTO ma E OUT 2 1 vac LGR L2 cr 4 ours OUT6 s 44573 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Wiring Your Controller 59 1762 0B8 Wiring Diagram VDC 1 DC OUT 0 OUT 1 RH OUT3 V 4 cr OUT 6 24V dc source OUT 7 _ DC COM 1 DC 44574 1762 0B16 Wiring Diagram VDC 0 OUTO A outa outs A y 4 OUT 6 OUT 7 t 68 OUT 8 24V dc source 08 OUT 9 OUT 10 OUT 11 OUT 12 Eu OUT 14 A 4 OUT 15 DC COM 4 Y DC 44575 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 60 X Wiring Your Controller 1762 0B32T Wiring Diagram
3. Message Function Name MicroLogix Description Type Code 1400 Support Request 17 0x11 FC_START_APPL Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Clears fault and changes the controller mode to Remote Run See Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page 342 Request 18 0x12 FC_STOP_APPL Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Changes the controller mode to Remote Program See Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page 342 Request 19 0x13 FC_SAVE_CONFIG No Deprecated Request 20 0x14 FC_ENABLE_UNSOLICITED Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 21 0x15 FC_DISABLE_UNSOLICITED Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 22 0x16 FC ASSIGN CLASS No Request 23 0x17 FC DELAY MEASURE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Used for non LAN Request 24 0x18 FC RECORD CURRENT TIME No Used for LAN Request 25 0x19 FC OPEN FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 26 0x14 FC CLOSE FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 27 0x1B FC DELETE FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 28 0x1C FC GET FILE INFO No Request 29 0x1D FC AUTHENTICATE FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 30 Ox1E FC ABORT FILE No Request 31 Ox1F FC ACTIVATE CONFIG No Request 32 0x20 FC AUTHENTICATE No Request 33 0x21 FC AUTHENTICATE ERR No 34 0x22 to No Reserved 128 0x80 Response 129 0x81 FC RESPONSE Yes MicroLogix 1400 sends Response 130 0x82 FC UNSOLICITE
4. Word Offset Description Category 73 Transport Function Layer Error Codes 0 NO_ERROR No error found in the Transport Layer 1 DISCARD_NOT_FIRST_SEG The received packet was discarded since it was not a first segment 2 DISCARD_DUPLICATED_AND_MORE_SEG The received packet was discarded since it had the same sequence number as previous more segments are expected 3 DISCARD_DUPLICATED_AND_FINAL_SEG The received packet was discarded since it had the same sequence number as previous final segment received 4 DISCARD_OUT_OF_ORDER_SEG The received packet was discarded since the sequence number was out of order 74 Transport Layer Error Count 75 Reserved 76 Reserved 77 Reserved 78 Reserved 79 Reserved 80 Reserved Word offset 7 27 and 47 reflect the Error Codes that have been caused in the sessions for DNP3 TCP Server UDP and TCP Client respectively The following table lists the possible ranges of the Error Code Any others are reserved Value DEC Mnemonic Description 0 NO ERROR No error found 1 ERR_SOCKET_CREATE Socket error during Create operation 2 ERR_SOCKET_LISTEN Socket error during Listen operation 3 ERR_SOCKET_BIND Socket error during Bind operation 4 ERR_SOCKET_ACCEPT Socket error during Accept operation 5 ERR_SOCKET_CONNECT Socket error during Connect operation 6 ERR_SOCKET_SEND Socket error during Send operation 7 ERR_SOCKET_RECEIVE Socket error dur
5. AD Jumper MicroLogix 1400 Channel 0 to DH 485 Communication Cable Pinout When connecting MicroLogix 1400 Channel 0 to DH 485 communication cable pinout using an RS 232 cable the maximum that the cable length may be extended is 15 24 m 50 ft Refer to the following typical pinout DTE Device DCE Device DH 485 MicroLogix connector 1400 Channel 0 8 Pin 6 pin 7 TXD 6 Termination 4 RXD 5 2 GND 4 B 3 8 2 Shield 5 DCD 1 ChassisGround 6 CTS 3 RTS You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to a DH 485 network via Channel 0 directly without using an optical isolator such as AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC because Channel 0 is isolated However you need to use an AIC to connect your PC or other MicroLogix Family products such as MicroLogix 1200 to a DH 485 network Communication Connections 89 The following figure shows the external wiring connections and specifications of the AIC AIC Advanced Interface Converter 1761 NET AIC PWRO N 5 d 4 1 LE EXTERNAL Item Description 1 Port 1 DB 9 RS 232 DTE 2 Port 2 mini DIN 8 RS 232 DTE 3 Port 3 RS 485 Phoenix plug 4
6. Panel Mounting Mount to panel using 8 or M4 screws To install your controller using mounting screws 1 Remove the mounting template from inside the back cover of the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Installation Instructions publication 1766 IN001 2 Secure the template to the mounting surface Make sure your controller is spaced properly See Controller and Expansion I O Spacing on page 32 3 Drill holes through the template 4 Remove the mounting template 5 Mount the controller 6 Leave the protective debris shield in place until you are finished wiring the controller and any other devices Mounting Template f 44521 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 36 Installing Your Controller 1762 Expansion 1 0 Dimensions Mounting 1762 Expansion 1 0 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 44567 Dimension Measurement A 90 mm 3 5 in 40 mm 1 57 in C 87 mm 3 43 in During panel or DIN rail mounting of all devices be sure that all debris ATTENTION ae such as metal chips and wire stands is kept from falling into the module Debris that falls into the module could cause damage when the module is under power DIN Rail Mounting The module can be mounted using the following DIN rails 35x 7 5 mm EN 50 022
7. o 1 D n n 0 B a D D D D 4 Ld E 822 0 0 Radi Binary Symbol gt 15 v Dec B32 Properts Usage For a 32 bit Counter Config File Class Level of Index 10 is 1 B33 0 0 and B33 0 1 Class Level of Index 11 is 2 B33 1 0 and B33 1 1 Class Level of Index 12 is 3 B33 2 0 and B33 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File B33 bin 32hits Counter Contig File 19 12 11 10 e D D D DOD G 8 os a c O O D D D O D D D OOD ODODO G O OR D ODD D D D D D O D 5 D a Doocoononoo D for aLi EE Badira _ Smi Dee _ l 53 Ercpertice Usage Help Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 297 DNP3 Frozen Counter Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Mas
8. Sedo d unu dm du 0002020020000 002 0 000 0000208 0200002800502000 Om TPG a DP TA TD PD hu 00002080200002 860278000 00002082020000 P03 20 00 0 0 0 0 9 OO 80 0 TO 8 8 uU 2 qo um s OD i 0 0 Udo B 0h H 0000000 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 AL 1 f so Binary Sumo o m e e 5 Properties Usage Help TIP When the cursor is at the data value position press the Down key to change the data value of a bit from ON 1 to OFF 0 Press the Up key to change from OFF 0 to ON 1 After changing the data value of a target bit press the OK key to apply the changes or press the ESC key to discard the changes Using the LCD 117 8 Now we will view an example of the data value of a protected property If LCD Edit Disable is set to checked enable the Protected message will be displayed and this data file cannot be edited from the LCD EBEN REMOTE 6 8 OFF Protected 9 Try to move the cursor to the data value position by pressing the OK key Because the B3 0 0 bit is a protected bit you will find that the cursor does not move to the data value position 10 Hold down the Up key until the target bit becomes 255 15 as shown below The maximum range of bits you can monitor with the LCD is 256 words of specified target bit file B B3 2
9. 44603 WN user supplied cable Length Connections from to AIC Power Selection Switch Setting External Power Supply Required modem or other communication device external External power supp Cable 1761 CBL ASO3 1761 CBL AS09 y required unless the is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch should be set to cable External power supply req AA ER I 1761 CBL AS03 1761 09 44604 Length Connections from to AIC External Power Power Supply Selection Required Switch Setting 3 m 9 8 ft SLC 500 Fixed port3 yes external 9 5 m 31 17 ft SLC 5 01 SLC 5 02 and SLC 5 03 processors PanelView 550 RJ45 port port3 yes external ired unless the is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch should be set to cable Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 92 Communication Connections Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 1761 02 Series C or equivalent Cable Wiring Diagram 95 gts STE 7159 e ee sit O 44605 Programming Controller Device 9 Pin D Shell 8 Pin Mini Din 9 RI 1 CIS X4 gt GND 2 7 RTS RTS 3 6 DSR gt 4 5 GND
10. 299 DNP3 Analog Output 58 303 DNPS BED Object stote p Ea eee ied 305 DNP3 Data Set Object au iste beo ent obe ea aes 306 Quality Flags end Leder tem o EE te RA S 318 DNP3 Device Attribute Object 321 Exent RepoEUp uie dro ea UN PRU bu aes ab put ara eis oda 325 uico OR id S 325 Control Generating 330 Reporting Event By Polled 331 Reporting Event By Unsolicited Response 332 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface System Loading and Heat Dissipation Table of Contents 9 OMI SIGH VO LAAT CE dus oc ark 334 Time SynehrOnizanon Ves oie ere 335 Download a User Program via DNP3 336 Default Directories and Files 337 Generating IMG files using RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro 337 Rules for File Authentication 339 Rules for Downloading a User 340 Rules for Uploading a User 1 341 Rules for Initializing a User 342 Rules for uploading Communication Status Files 342 Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 ho PEE 342 Ena we User 4 or doe sei ted 343 Start User Progra
11. Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 266 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Function Code Critical FCs File Number 0 Critical FCs File Number 0 12 0x0C 13 0x0D Critical optional 14 0 0 Critical optional 15 0x0F N A N A 16 0x10 Critical optional 17 0x11 Critical optional 18 0x12 Critical optional 19 0x13 N A N A 20 0x14 Critical optional 21 0x15 Critical optional 22 0x16 23 0x17 optional 24 0x18 Critical optional 25 0x19 optional 26 0x1A optional 27 0x1B optional 28 0x1C optional 29 0x1D critical optional 30 0x1E optional 31 0 1 critical optional 32 0x20 N A N A 33 0x21 N A N A 129 0x81 optional 130 0x82 optional 131 0x83 N A N A Expected Session Key Change Interval x1 s in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This parameter is used for configuring the expected session key change interval in seconds The valid range is 0 7200 2 hrs Default value is 1800 30 mins When DNP3 Master does not change the Session Key within this time configured the MicroLogix 1400 invalidate the Session Key and its state for each uset Expected Session Key Change Count in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in
12. AB_SNMP BOOTP Server Running Waring for BOOTP request from hardware address _ 00008 394 9 Providing address 10 116 38 203 Cancel If the AB_SNMP BOOTP Server Running dialog box appears and if there is no response from the controller for more than 30 seconds click Cancel Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 224 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 The Update Status dialog box is displayed If the update was successful the status text box is green and has an appropriate message Update Status Catalog Number 1766LEC Serial Number Current Revision A 2 0 View Log New Revision A 2 0 If the update was not successful the status text box is red and has an appropriate message Up date Status Catalog Number SenalNumber N A Current Revision N A New Revision N A pa If the following dialog box appears it indicates that the controller ended up in a Missing Corrupt OS state The current revision number reflects the version of Boot Firmware To recover the controller from this state see Recovering from Missing Corrupt OS State on page 228 Update Status Catalog Number 1766LEC Serial Number Current Revision 1 1 New Revision A 2 0 ot henen evan Pe Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System 225 18 Click the OK button You ar
13. Data Set Descriptors a lt Data Set Descriptors file N61 Element Array N data file i ur a T lt Data Set Descriptors file N62 Data Set Descriptors file N63 Data Set Descriptors file N64 lt Data Set Descriptors file N68 N Once the Data Set Prototypes and Descriptors are configured in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration of RSLogix500 RSLogix Micro software you can see the DNP3 DS Prototype X and DNP3 DS Descriptor X trees under the Channel Configuration of RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software where X is the element numbers of each Prototype or Descriptor 9 Project zy Help Controller i Controller Properties tS Processor Status e Function Files AU io Configuration E pt Channel Configuration pt Channel Status BEONPS DS Prototype 0 E DNP3 DS Prototype 1 E DNP3 DS Prototype 2 E DS Prototype 3 DNP3 DS Prototype 4 E DNP3 DS Prototype 5 E DS Prototype 6 E DNP3 DS Prototype 7 E DNP3 DS Prototype 8 DS Descriptor 0 E DNP3 DS Descriptor 1 DS Descriptor 2 DNP3 DS Descriptor 3 DNP3 DS Descriptor 4 DS Descriptor 5 E DNP3 DS Descriptor 6 DNP3 DS Descriptor 7 DNP3 DS Descriptor 8 DNP3 Data Set Prototype 0 Number of Prototype Elements Prototype Element Configuration Descriptor Code DataType Code
14. ENET Setup Master Password After entering the Master password press the OK key on the LCD keypad 6 If the Master password is correct the last configuration is displayed In this example the auto negotiation function is enabled and the 10 100Mbps link configuration is shown REMOTE Auto Enable 16 166H F H 7 Press Up and Down key to select auto disable menu then press the OK key The fourth line on the LCD flashes Press the Up and Down keys to configure the Ethernet port to 100Mbps Full duplex forced REMOTE Auto Disable Power cyclexxx 1BBM Full force TIP Any change to this feature s configuration does not take effect until after the next power cycle Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 146 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Using the LCD Configuring Ethernet Protocol Setup The Ethernet Protocol Setup screen of the LCD displays Ethernet Protocol settings assigned to the controller Follow these steps to edit the Ethernet Protocol settings for your controller 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up N SN and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000006 User Display b dvanced Set Press the OK key on the LCD keypad
15. 129 response 07 limited qty Absolute time 130 unsol resp qty 1 synchronized 51 2 Time and Date CTO 129 response 07 limited qty Absolute time 130 unsol resp qty 1 unsynchronized 52 1 Time Delay Coarse 129 response 07 limited qty qty 1 52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 response 07 limited qty qty 1 60 1 Class Objects Class 0 1 read 06 no range or all data Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 369 DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Description Function Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num Codes dec hex Codes dec hex 60 2 Class Objects Class 1 1 read 06 no range or all data 07 08 limited qty 20 enbl unsol 06 no range or all 21 dab unsol 60 3 Class Objects Class 2 1 read 06 no range or all data 07 08 limited qty 60 4 Class Objects Class 3 1 read 06 no range or all data 07 08 limited qty 20 enbl unsol 06 no range or all 21 dab unsol 70 2 File Control 29 authenticate 5B free format 129 response 5B free format authentication file 70 3 File Control file 25 open file 5B fr
16. Password AME io Configuration m Channel Configur New om RENCE 2 Program Files syso Master Password a New 2 m 5 Data Files Cross Reference Subroutine Protection Password 00 OUTPUT New D n meut E s2 sTaTus D D re c cm um s Phim Once the DNP3 Master receives a proper Authentication Key Non zero value from the MicroLogix 1400 the Authentication Key must be used for sending the request with the function code OPEN FILE 25 or DELETE FILE 27 Rules for Downloading a User Program A DNP3 master should send the function code OPEN FILE 25 WRITE 2 and CLOSE FILE 26 for downloading user programs When a master sends the function code OPEN FILE 25 with the file command object the file name string in File command object must be in this directory and file name format EXE processorName IMG The directory and file name extension string must all be in capital letters and the string size cannot be exceed 64 bytes The file name processorName is from the Processor Name in the Controller Properties dialog in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro This ladder program processorName IMG is generated from RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro DNP3 Master should send the processorName IMG file without any modification When the MicroLogix 1400 Series controller receives a request with the function code WRITE 2 for User Program download the
17. No Object function code only Implementation Table for Series B controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation 23 delay meas Request DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num dec hex Codes dec hex 0 211 239 Device Attribute 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 start stop 241 243 06 no range or all 248 250 252 0 240 Device Attribute 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 start stop 245 247 06 no range or all 2 write 00 01 start stop 0 254 Device Attribute 1 read 00 01 start stop Non specific all attributes 06 no range or all request 0 255 Device Attributes List of 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 start stop attribute variations 06 range or all 1 0 Binary Input Any Variation 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 1 1 Binary Input Packed format 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 1 2 Binary Input With flags 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 2 0 Binary Input Event Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 07 08 limited qty 2 1 Binary Input Event Without 1 read 06 no range or all 129 respo
18. Q 8 6 Q 0 OQ o0 0 0 GO oo Move cursor between digits left right arrows ae Wie ti ie ee B3 4 U d 5D PTC HCD TU oD temo B3 5 690 O OO 6 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 B3 6 0 oO Hh 0 070 Stores Entries B3 7 UP RA Weg Say 3 8 UD the DU ob uuo ual B3 9 8 0 0 0 6 610 0 70 0 9 3 10 0 0 00000 00 00 0 0 0 05 NT Retain previous value a of E3090 _ BN M 1 B3 ad Properties Usage Help Left right arrow moves the cursor between the digits of the value Up down arrow changes the value Up arrow increment Down arrow decrement 0 Status The MicroLogix 1400 provides I O status indicators on the LCD screen You can view the status of inputs and outputs on the I O Status screen on the LCD as shown below The I O status indicators on this screen updated every 100 ms to reflect the current I O status in real time regardless of controller scan time Input status indicators 20 Output status indicators 12 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 110 Using the LCD Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 solid rectangle is displayed when the input or output is energized empty rectangle is displayed when the input or output is not energized IMPORTANT If no user defined LCD screen is used the 1 0 Status screen is displayed e 5 seconds after the controller has
19. 02 1761 CBL APOO or 1761 CBL PMo2 DF1 Slave 4 09 radio modem or lease line i straight 9 25 pin cable E straight 9 25 pin cable 24V DC power User Supplied RS 485 DF1 Half Duplex MicroLogix 1400 lt DF1 Slave RS 485 DF1 Half Duplex ieee 1 08 9 RS 232 port 2 mini DIN 8 RS 232 port 3 RS 485 port 4 Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 82 Communication Connections Rockwell Software RSLinx 2 0 or higher SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 SLC 5 05 PLC 5 or MicroLogix 1000 1200 and 1500 processors configured for DF1Half Duplex Master Rockwell Software RSLinx 2 5 required for MicroLogix 1400 DF1 Half Duplex Network Using and Modems DF1 Half Duplex Protocol Modem MicroLogix MicroLogix 1000 Slave 1400 Slave Connecting to a RS 485 Network Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 MicroLogix MicroLogix 1500 with MicroLogix 1500 with SLC 5 03 Slave 1200 Slave 1764 LSP or 1764 LRP 1764 LRP Processor Slave Processor Slave aii The n
20. 395 System Loading Example Calculations 396 System Loading Worksheet ei T4 397 Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 10 Table of Contents Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Current Loading Calculating Heat Dissipation Glossary Index Preface Who Should Use this Manual Purpose of this Manual Read this preface to familiarize yourself with the rest of the manual It y provides information concerning who should use this manual the purpose of this manual related documentation conventions used in this manual Rockwell Automation support Use this manual if you are responsible for designing installing programming or troubleshooting control systems that use MicroLogix 1400 controllers You should have a basic understanding of electrical circuitry and familiarity with relay logic If you do not obtain the proper training before using this product This manual is a reference guide for MicroLogix 1400 controllers and expansion I O It describes the procedures you use to install wire and troubleshoot your controller This manual explains how to install and wire your controllers gives you an overview of the MicroLogix 1400 controller system Refer to publication 1766 RM001 MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual for the MicroLogix 1400 instruction set and for application examples to show the instru
21. Relay Contact Ratings 1762 0 6 Volts max Continuous Amperes Voltamperes Amps per Point Make Break Make Break max 240V ac 5 0 15 1 5 3600 VA 360 VA 120V ac 7 0 A 30A 3 0A 125V dc 25A 0 4 50 24V de 70 AU 7 0 168 1 The continuous current per module must be limited so the module powe 2 ambient temperatures above 40 C 104 F does not exceed 1440VA 3 Surge Suppression Connecting surge suppressors across your external inductive load will extend the life of the relay contacts For additional details refer to ndustrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 4 DC Make Break Voltamperes must be limited to 50 VA for DC voltages between 28V DC and 125V DC DC Make Break Voltamperes below 28V DC are limited by the 7 A Make Break current limit Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Specifications 187 Module Load Ratings 1762 0 61 Volts max Controlled Load Current per Module max 240V ac 6A 120V ac 12 125V de 11 5A 24V dc 30 A 1 Current per relay limited to 6 A at ambient temperatures above 40 104 F 2 24A in ambient temperatures above 40 104 F Limited by ambient temperature and the number of relays controlling loads See below Relays Used vs Maximum Current per Relay 24V dc 1762 OX6l Ambient Temperature below 40 104
22. TUT nuan r Relation List New Delete Enable BOOTP Enable DHCP Disable Ethernet Address IP Address 00 0F 73 FF 00 78 800 192 168 1 11 ML1100 Device 1 r Status Entries Sent 182 168 1 11 to Ethernet address 00 0F 73 FF 00 18 of 256 Using a DHCP Server To A DHCP server automatically assigns IP addresses to client stations logging onto a TCP IP network DHCP is based and maintains some Configure Your Processor backward compatibility The main difference is that BOOTP was designed for manual configuration while DHCP allows for dynamic allocation of network addresses and configurations to newly attached devices gt ATTENTION loss of process control Using Subnet Masks and Configure subnet masks and gateways using the Ethernet channel 1 Gateways configuration screen The processor must be assigned a fixed network address The IP address of the processor must not be dynamically provided Failure to observe this precaution may result in unintended machine motion or If BOOTP is enabled you can t change any of the advanced Ethernet IMPORTANT e d communications characteristics If your network is divided into subnetworks that use gateways or routers you must indicate the following information when configuring channel 1 Publication 1766
23. ENET Setup Master Password If the Master password is incorrect an error message will be 000000 ENET Setup Password Wrong Po Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 142 Using the LCD 7 If the password is correct the Ethernet network type screen is displayed as below Press Up or Down key to select the appropriate Ethernet mode ETH bootp Press U D key If you press the OK key at the static mode the IP address flashes 000000 HEHOTE ENET Mode stati IP address 192 168 1BH 281 8 After configuring the IP address press the OK key The Subnet Mask screen is displayed 000000 ENET Mode stati Subnet Mask 255 255 255 9 After configuring the Subnet Mask press the OK key The Gateway address is displayed 000006 REMOTE ENET stati Gateway address 192 168 18H BH1 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Using LCD 143 10 After configuring the Gateway address press OK key The Primary DNS is displayed 000000 ENET stati Pri DONS 198 18H 1080 1 11 After configuring the Primary DNS press the OK key The Secondary DNS is displayed 000000 HEHOTE ENET Mode stati Sec ONS 198 188 166 BH To exit the Network configuration Menu press the ESC key on the TIP LCD keypad at any time
24. You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to your personal computer directly without using an external optical isolator such as Advanced Interface Converter AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as shown in the illustration below because Channel 0 is isolated within the controller MicroLogix 1400 Channel 0 Personal Computer i ER pa 1761 or 1761 CBL PM02 Tema JL 44593 1 Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications Using a Modem You can use modems to connect a personal computer to one MicroLogix 1400 controller using DF 1 Full Duplex protocol to multiple controllers using DF1 Half Duplex protocol or Modbus RTU Slave protocol via Channel 0 as shown in the following illustration See Appendix E for information on types of modems you can use with the micro controllers IMPORTANT Do not attempt to use DH 485 protocol through modems under any circumstance The communication timing using DH 485 protocol is not supported by modem communications Personal Computer m Modem Cable straight through ga lr MicroLogix 1400 Cus Channel 0 Protocol Options e DF Full Hal e Modbus RTU Slave protocol Modem Dupl tocol to 1 controll uplex protocol to Ean
25. DH 485 Modbus RTU Master Slave ASCII DNP3 Slave The communications port on Channel 0 of the MicroLogix 1400 controller utilizes a combined isolated RS 232 485 interface RS 232 and RS 485 are Electronics Industries Association ELA standards that specify the electrical and mechanical characteristics for serial binary communication They provide a variety of system configuration possibilities RS 232 and RS 485 define electrical connection characteristics of protocols The MicroLogix 1400 controller supports an additional non isolated RS 232 interface on Channel 2 One of the biggest benefits of an RS 232 interface is that it lets you integrate telephone and radio modems into your control system using the appropriate DF1 protocol only not DH 485 protocol but it is for point to point connections only between two devices The RS 485 interface supports connection of devices in a multidrop hard wired configuration using DH 485 DF1 Half Duplex Modbus or DNP3 protocols Also the RS 485 interface supports connection in a multidrop hard wired configuration using ASCII protocols DF 1 Full Duplex protocol provides a point to point connection between two devices DF1 Full Duplex protocol combines data transparency American National Standards Institute ANSI X3 28 1976 specification subcategory D1 and 2 way simultaneous transmission with embedded responses subcategory F1 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 232
26. Number 5 Clase Events fia Hold Time after Dass Everts x s 5 Number Class2 Events fo Hold Time alte Class2 Events x1 s Number Class3 Events fi 0 Hold Time aite Class3 Events 1 5 SeeiTimenu xd 0 Groups DMP3 Obiect Data File Number biect Contig File Number Binary Inout fio Bins Input 2 Binary Cult n Binay Output Courter 665 12 Counter 32 Courter 32615 13 Counter 32bts 33 Anolog Input 166115 Frozen Counter 15645 24 Analog Input 32biis 15 Frozen Counter 32608 5 Analog Input 15bits Analog Inout 32645 Analog Inpul S hort Floating e Analog 1661 Analog Output 3261 18 Analog Input Short Floating Analog 5 Floating 19 Double B t input 5 Double Bit Inot 20 Small BCD o Smal BCD fa Cows Aer Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 280 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 For the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Channel Configuration E General Channel 0 Channel 1 Chan 1 Channel2 DNP3 Slave DNP3 Slave r Application Layer Enable Confirmation Channel for Unsolicited Responses Max Response Size 2048 7 Send Int Unsol Null Resp on Restart Confirmation Timeout 1 0000 Enable Unsolicited On Start Up Number of 0 Class Class2 Class3 Select Timeout 1 spo Enable Unsolicite
27. Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 206 Troubleshooting Your System Error Conditions If an error exists within the controller the controller LEDs operate as desctibed in the following table If the LEDS TheFollowing Error Probable Cause Recommended Action indicate Exists All LEDs off No input power or No line Power Verify proper line voltage and connections to the controller power supply error z Power Supply This problem can occur intermittently if power supply is overloaded Overloaded when output loading and temperature varies Power and Hardware faulted Processor Hardware Cycle power Contact your local Allen Bradley representative if the FAULT LEDs on Error error persists sulig Loose Wiring Verify connections to the controller Power LED on Application fault Hardware Software For error codes and Status File information see MicroLogix 1400 and FAULT LED Major Fault Detected Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual flashing Publication 1766 RM001 RUN Operating system Missing or Corrupt See Recovering from Missing or Corrupt OS State on page D 228 FORCE fault Operating System FAULT LEDs all flashing Controller Error Recovery Model Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Use the following error recovery model to help you diagnose software and hardware problems in the micro controller The model provides common questions you might ask to help troublesho
28. RS 232 RS 485 Interface 241 TIP Use a 1763 NCO1 Series A or later cable to connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to a DH 485 network You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to your DH 485 network directly without using a RS 232 to RS 485 converter and optical isolator such as the AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as shown the illustration below because Channel 0 has isolation and RS 485 built in AIC AIC SLC 5 04 PanelView 550 DH 485 Network AIC AIC TS MicroLogix 1400 SLC 5 04 PLC 5 icroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix SLC 5 04 DH Network 44609 Example DH 485 Connections The following network diagrams provide examples of how to connect MicroLogix controllers to the DH 485 network You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to your DH 485 network directly without using a RS 232 to RS 485 converter and optical isolator such as the Advanced Interface Converter AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as shown in the illustrations below because Channel 0 has isolation and RS 485 built in However you may need to use an AIC to connect Channel 2 of the MicroLogix 1400 controller to a DH 485 network For more information on the AIC see the Advanced Interface Converter and DeviceNet Interface Installation Instructions Publication 1761 5 11 Publication 1766 UMO
29. Specification 1762 0A8 1762 0B8 1762 0B16 1762 0B32T 1762 0V32T Shipping weight 215 g 0 48 Ibs 210 g 0 46 Ibs 235 g 0 52 Ibs 200 g 0 44 Ibs 200 g 0 44 Ibs approx with carton Voltage category 100 240V ac 24V dc 24 dc 24V dc source 24 dc sink Operating voltage 85 265 ac at 20 4 26 4V dc 20 4 26 4V dc 10 2 26 4V dc 10 2 26 4V dc range 47 63 Hz Number of outputs 8 8 16 32 32 Bus current draw 115 mA at 5V dc 115 mA at 5V dc 175 mA at 5V dc 175 mA at 5V dc 175 mA at 5V dc 0 575 W 0 575 W 0 88 W 0 mA at 24V de 0 mA at 24V de Heat dissipation max 2 9 W 1 61 W 2 9 W at 30 C 3 4 W at 26 4 dc 2 7 W at 26 4V de 86 F 2 1 Wat 55 C 131 F Signal delay max resistive load On delay 1 2 cycle Off delay 1 2 cycle On delay 0 1 ms Off delay 1 0ms On delay 0 1 ms Off delay 1 0 ms On delay 0 5 ms Off delay 4 0 ms On delay 0 5 ms Off delay 4 0 ms Off state leakage current max On state current min On state voltage drop max 2 mA at 132V 2 5 mA at 265V 10mA 1 5V at 0 5 A Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 1 0 mA 1 0 mA 1 0V de 1 0mA 1 0 mA 1 0V de 0 1 mA at 26 4V de 1 0 mA 0 3V dc at 0 5 A 0 1 mA at 26 4V dc 1 0 mA 0 3V dc at 0 5A Output Specifications Specifications 183 Specification 1762 0A8 1762 0B8 1762 0B16 1762 0B32T 1762 0V32T Continuous current 0 25 A at 55 0
30. Specification 1762 0W8 1762 0W16 1762 0X61 1762 1080W6 Isolated groups Group 1 Outputs O Group 1 Outputs 0 All 6 Outputs Group 3 to 3 to 7 Individually Outputs 0 to 5 Isolated Group 2 Outputs 4 Group 2 Outputs 8 to 7 to 15 Output group to Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V ac for 1 s or 2596V dc for 1 s backplane isolation 265V ac working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Output group to output Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V ac for 1 s or 2596V dc for 1 s group isolation 265V ac working voltage basic insulation 150V ac working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Vendor D code 1 Product type code 7 Product code 120 121 124 98 1 Only applicable to Series 1 0 modules Relay Contact Ratings 1762 OW8 1762 OW16 and 1762 1080W6 Maximum Amperes Amperes Volt Amperes Volts Gontimous Make Break Make Break 240V ac 25A 7 5A 0 75A 1800VA 180 120 2 5A 15A 1 5A 1800VA 180 VA 125V dc 1 0A 0 2241 28 VA 24V dc 2 0A 1248 1 1 5A above 40 C 104 F 2 For DC voltage applications the make break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined by dividing 28 VA by the applied DC voltage For example 28 VA 48V DC 0 58A For DC voltage applications less than 14V the make break ratings for relay contacts cannot exceed 2A Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 186 Specifications
31. 8 3 0 0 0 0 8B ao 0 74 00 mua g pirno r p n 5 000000 0000 00 00 0 0 30 5 DU gg dH Hu 0 0 0 U 0 0 0 0 B30 7 oo 6 0 Oo Oo mo nn lo 30 8 oo g u gg 020 0 noor o no D D 30 9 0000000000 00 0 0 0 0 Er H 1 B30 2 0 Radix Binary bs E oo fea Propeites Usage DNP3 Binary Output Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read the object with Any Variation Binary Output Static Objects g10v0 Binary Output All Variations g10v2 Binary Output Output status with flags default Binary Output Command Objects e g12v1 Binary Command Control relay output block CROB Related Object File Number Binary Output Object File Number Related Configuration File Number Binary Output Config File Number To generate a Binary Output Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure Binary Output Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 290 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 When the Binary Output Object File is configured Index number starts from 0 1 bit is used for 1 Index As an example a Binary Output Object File is configure
32. Configuring the Ethernet Port The Port Settings screen of the LCD displays the Ethernet port settings assigned to the controller Follow these steps to edit the Ethernet port settings for your controller Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 144 Using the LCD 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key N A Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 000000 User Display b dvanced Set Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Settings Menu screen is displayed KeyIn Cfg EHET Cfg If ENET Cfg is selected press the OK key If not select ENET Cfg using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key 000006 Cfg Cfg If Port Setting is selected press the OK key If not select Port Setting using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key 000006 ENET Cfg bPort Setting Protocol setup Using the LCD 145 5 The password screen is displayed Press Up Down Left and Right keys to enter Master password with maximum 10 digits In this example the current Master password is allocated as 1234
33. Gateway Specifies the IP address of a gateway on the same subnet as the MicroLogix 1400 that provides connections to another IP network TIP You can use any commercially available BOOTP server If you do not have BOOTP Server capabilities on your network and you want to dynamically configure Channel 1 you can download the free Rockwell Automation BOOTP server from the Rockwell Automation website Go to http www ab com networks ethernet bootp html When is enabled the following events occur at power up The processor broadcasts a BOOTP request message containing its hardware address over the local network or subnet The BOOTP server compares the hardware address with the addresses in its look up table The BOOTP server sends a message back to the processor with the IP address and other network information that corresponds to the hardware addtess it received With all hardware and IP addresses in one location you can easily change IP addresses in the BOOTP configuration file if your network needs to be changed The request can be disabled by clearing the Enable parameter in the channel configuration file When both BOOTP Enable and DHCP are cleared disabled the MicroLogix 1400 uses the existing channel configuration data If BOOTP is disabled or no BOOTP server exists on the network you OTTEN must use RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software to enter change the I
34. Output Terminal Block Voltage Load 44680 Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 54 Wiring Your Controller Analog Channel Wiring Guidelines Consider the following when wiring your analog channels The analog common COM is connected to earth ground inside the module These terminals are not electrically isolated from the system They are connected to chassis ground Analog channels are not isolated from each other Use Belden 8761 or equivalent shielded wire Under normal conditions the drain wire shield should be connected to the metal mounting panel earth ground Keep the shield connection to earth ground as short as possible To ensure optimum accuracy for voltage type inputs limit overall cable impedance by keeping all analog cables as short as possible Locate the I O system as close to your voltage type sensors or actuators as possible The controller does not provide loop power for analog inputs Use a power supply that matches the transmitter specifications as shown below Analog Input Transmitter Specifications 2 Wire Transmitter Transmitter Controller O IV1 IV2 or 1V3 Controller 44530 Minimizing Electrical Noise on Analog Channels Inputs on analog channels employ digital high frequency filters that significantly reduce the effects of electrical noise on input signals However because of the variety of applications and environments where anal
35. This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This file number is used to define the list of the critical function codes in Secure Authentication A critical function code should be defined in a word element in this file The maximum number of element in this file should not exceed 32 the maximum number of the function codes that can be defined The value of this parameter is N file only Valid range is 0 7 9 to 255 Default value is 0 When this file number is configured to 0 and there is no configuration file assigned some function codes are considered as critical by default See the table below for the critical function codes When this file number of this parameter is not 0 and it is a valid N data file all function codes are considered as non critical In this case you must define all critical function codes in this file Note that the function code FC CONFIRM is considered as critical once the file number is configured newly If you don t want the function code 0 to be considered as critical the number of elements in the file should be adjusted and the element value 0 should not be in any elements 0 0x00 optional 1 0x01 optional 2 0x02 critical optional 3 0x04 critical optional 4 0x04 critical optional 5 0x05 critical optional 6 0x06 critical optional 7 0x07 optional 8 0x08 optional 9 0x09 optional 10 0x0A optional 11 0x0B
36. ovi C3 DCO DC1 062 063 064 OUTS OUT 00 OUT9 ovo 5 VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC Group 0 Group1 Group 2 Group 3 ATTENTION 44524 Group 4 5 6 Output Terminal Block The 24V DC sensor supply of the 1766 L32BWA and 1766 L32BWAA controllers should not be used to power output circuits It should only be used to power input devices for example sensors and switches See Master Control Relay on page 25 for information on MCR wiring in output circuits Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 48 X Wiring Your Controller Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 1766 L32AWA L32AWAA Input Terminal Block INO 12 IN10 COM 3 IN13 IN15 IN17 IN19 IVO 1 IN4 IN6 COM 2 IN 1 11 IN12 IN14 IN16 IN18 COM 1 IV3 ANA L L L L us VAC 1 VAC L2 N OUTO OUT OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 065 0077 OUT8 OUTIO ANA DCO DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 OUTS OUT6 ae OUT9 OUTI1 ovo VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC JL JL JL J L 0 Groupi Group2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 44525 Output Terminal Block 1766 L32BXB L32BXBA Input Terminal Block 1 1 IN10 COM 3 IN13 IN15 IN17 IN19 IVo 2 IN4 ING COM2 INQ IN11 IN12 114 IN16 IN18 COM IV1 IV3 ANA L J f L 1 L L VDC 24 NEUT OUT
37. 0 Number of Pages 1 Msg Connection Timeout x 1m5 5000 Msg Reply Timeout 1m5 250 Inactivity Timeout Min 20 M SMTP ClentEnable Setting 10 Mbps Hall Duplex Cortact Location cae IMPORTANT The user program is cleared as part of the operating system upgrade process You must restore your program after successfully loading the operating system upgrade The Ethernet communication configuration parameters are retained and the SNMP is enabled by default after a successful firmware upgrade IMPORTANT A power cycle is needed in order for the changes in the Channel Configuration page to be applied Using ControlFLASH for Firmware Upgrade Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System 215 2 Ensure that you complete the IP configuration for the OS firmware upgrade Note the assigned IP address of the controller If the IP address is not configured you can still perform the IP configuration using Static BOOTP or DHCP settings Once the IP configuration is done it is used throughout the firmware upgrade process If the IP configuration has been done the IP address may be read from the processor when online with RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro In the Channel Configuration dialog box select the Chan 1 System tab or use the LCD If BOOTP DHCP Enable is selected and if the IP Address is 0 0 0 0 then note the Ethernet Hardware Address which begi
38. 255 L FLT 24 0 or 4 8 9 255 F 0 255 0 OSTR 5 0 255 2 S 0 65 for S 0 for S 3 9 255 B 0 255 for B 0 15 for B 7 9 255 BSTR 6 0 255 2 S 0 65 for S 0 for S 3 9 255 B 0 255 for B 0 15 for B 7 9 255 TIME 7 0 6 2 S 0 65 for S for S N L 3 9 255 0 255 for B N L 0 15 for B 7 9 255 9 255 L Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 316 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 When the Descriptor Code is selected as PTYP the Point Addressing parameters for the Descriptor element are replaced by 10 Point Addressing parameters These should be configured in the same order of the DAEL elements in the relevant Prototypes Descriptor Element Configuration Index hoo Descriptor Code Data Type Code m Max Data Lenath bytes p 7 Ancillary Value 0000000000000000000000000 Cancel Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Point Address 1 Point Address Type Standard DNP3 Point Point Type NONE Point Index jo r Point Address Point Address Type Standard DNP Point Type NONE Point Index 0 Point Address 2 Point Address Type Standard DNP3 Paint Point NONE 7 Point Index o Point Address 7 Point Address Type Standard DNP Point Type Point Index o Point Address 3 Point Address Type Standar
39. Hold Time after Class1 Events x1s Number of Class2 Events Hold Time after Class2 Events x1s Number of Class3 Events Hold Time after Class3 Events x1s DNP3 Object Data File Number DNP3 Object Config File Number content of the Config File In some cases MicroLogix 1400 may not send an Unsolicited Response even though the parameters are configured properly Normally when the parameter Enable Unsolicited On Start Up is checked the MicroLogix 1400 initiates an Unsolicited Response with the function code ENABLE_UNSOLICITED 20 if there are any events logged into the event buffer However when a request with the function code DISABLE UNSOLICITED 21 is received an Unsolicited Response will not be sent When the parameter Enable Unsolicited On Start Up is unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 does not trigger the Unsolicited Response until a request with the function code ENABLE UNSOLICITED 20 from the DNP3 Master is received Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 333 The example below shows how to initiate and send the Unsolicited Response Master Node0 in Channel 0 Configuration tab indicates that the Unsolicited Response is reported to the Master with the node address 3 Channel Configuration CELINE Em DNP35Slave 1320 NONE Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 334 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Collision Avoidance Public
40. Minimizing Electrical Noise on Analog Channels 54 Grounding Your Analog 55 Expansion L C Wings ep pora epe ve NR WELCHES ane T Rt Ed 55 Digital Wiring Diagrams 55 Anal g Wining seas weal llth EO e t NANG REA 63 Chapter 4 Supported Communication 71 Default Communication Configuration 72 Using the Communications Toggle Functionality 72 Changing Communication Configuration 73 Connecting to the RS 232 76 Making DF1 Point to Point 76 Using ted Pee de de eos ah 77 Connecting to a DF1 Half Duplex Network 80 Connecting to a RS 485 Network 0 0 eee ee eee 82 DH 485 Configuration 83 Recommended 85 DH 485 Communication Gable 85 Using the LCD Table of Contents 5 Connecting the Communication Cable to the DH 485 Connector 86 Grounding and Terminating the DH 485 Network 87 Commec tne te AICE usse aet a hay a E rel o 88 Cable Selection Guide orit mede ed Phe inde 90 Recommended User Supplied Components 93 Safety Considerations x esa o oe ab espace e OC RE n 94 Install and Attach the IQ oue e uet E HAERES Saad 94 Po
41. Short Floating Point Analog Input Object From 20 to 29 As an example a configuration of 16 bit 32 bit and Short Floating Point Analog Input Object Files is shown below Data File N14 has 10 elements L15 has 10 elements and F16 has 10 elements accordingly A total of 30 Analog Input Object indexes are configured Index 0 of the Analog Input Object is N14 0 Index 10 is L15 0 Index 20 is F16 0 and Index 29 is 16 9 Data File N14 dec 4161 Obj N14 0 Radix Decimal Colin s a Properties Usage Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 301 Data File L15 dec 321 Obj EN xl Radix Decimal UU Columns 5 s 1 jus Properties Usage Help Data File F16 AFI Obj 2 Columns 5 Hee As an example an Analog Input Config File is shown below These files have 10 elements each Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 302 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 B36 0 0 and B36 0 1 can be configured for Class Level 0 1 2 or 3 for DNP3 Index 0 of the 16 bits Analog Input Object File B36 1 0 and B36 1 1 can be configured for Class Level for DNP3 Index 1 of the Analog Input Object File Default Class Level is 0 Any other bits are reserved In the example below for 16 bit Analog Input Config File Class Level of Index 0 is 1 B36 0 0 and B36 0 1 Cla
42. This is the default baud rate for a MicroLogix device on the DH 485 network All devices must be at the same baud rate This rate is stored in the controller Communications Status file CS0 5 8 to CS0 5 15 Setting Maximum Node Address Once you have an established network set up and are confident that you will not be adding more devices you may enhance performance by adjusting the maximum node address of your controllers It should be set to the highest node address being used IMPORTANT All devices should be set to the same maximum node address MicroLogix Remote Packet Support MicroLogix controllers can respond and initiate with communications or commands that do not originate on the local DH 485 network This is useful in installations where communication is needed between DH 485 and DH networks The example below shows how to send messages from a device on the DH network to a MicroLogix controller on the DH 485 network This method uses an SLC 5 04 processor as the bridge connection When using this method as shown in the illustration below PLC 5 devices can send read and write commands to MicroLogix controllers MicroLogix controllers can respond to MSG instructions received The MicroLogix controllers can initiate MSG instructions to devices on the DH network PC can send read and write commands to MicroLogix controllers PC can do remote programming of MicroLogix controllers Connecting to Networks
43. Variation 07 08 limited qty 32 1 Analog Input Event 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index without time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 2 Analog Input Event 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index without time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 3 Analog Input Event 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index with time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 4 Analog Input Event 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index with time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 5 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Single prec flt pt without 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp time 32 7 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Single prec flt pt with time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 40 0 Analog Output Status 1 read 00 01 start stop Variation 06 no range or all 40 1 Analog Output Status 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 32 bit with flag 06 no range or all 40 2 Analog Output Status 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 16 bit with flag 06 no range or all Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 374 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Implementation Table for Series B
44. hot spots near the controller Additional cooling provisions might be necessary when high ambient temperatures are encountered TIP Do not bring in unfiltered outside air Place the controller in an enclosure to protect it from a corrosive atmosphere Harmful contaminants or dirt could cause improper operation or damage to components In extreme cases you may need to use air conditioning to protect against heat build up within the enclosure A hard wired master control relay MCR provides a reliable means for emergency machine shutdown Since the master control relay allows the placement of several emergency stop switches in different locations its installation is important from a safety standpoint Overtravel limit switches or mushroom head push buttons are wired in series so that when any of them opens the master control relay is de energized This removes power to input and output device circuits Refer to the figures on pages 27 and 28 Never alter these circuits to defeat their function since serious injury ATTENTION and or machine damage could result gt TIP If you are using an external DC power supply interrupt the DC output side rather than the AC line side of the supply to avoid the additional delay of power supply turn off The AC line of the DC output power supply should be fused Connect a set of master control relays in series with the DC power supplying the input and output circuits Place the main
45. ooo off of Sd aye mcs mu og of 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 o LCD Edit Disable is set to unchecked disable Data File Properties The TUF element of the LCD Function File is set to 3 to specify the bit file B3 as the target bit file to monitor on the LCD as shown in the screen capture below Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 114 Using the LCD rumtonFiles _ E HSC PTOX PWMX sT El LCD BH pcso Jai CBL Customized Boot Logo ASCII File SCD Start with Customized Display TO Data Input Timeout of LCD Instructic 0 LCD Instruction Job Done 1 ERR LCD Display Operation Error Bit 0 ERN LCD Module Operation Error Num 0 JOG Jog data update Mode TMIN Trimpot Low Value Trimpot High Value Trimpot 0 Data TMIN Trimpot 1 Data WND Instruction Display Window HOK OK key in Customized Display _ xcooonmocot The controller mode is set to REMOTE RUN Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Using the LCD 115 Follow these steps to view and change the data values of the bit file B3 1 On the Main Menu screen select Monitoring by using the Up and Down keys on the
46. 90 1 Application Identifier 16 init appl 06 no range or all 17 start appl 5B free format 18 stop appl Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 376 Implementation Table for Series controllers Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 DNP Object Group amp Variation Request DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num dec hex Codes dec hex 91 1 Status of Requested 129 response 07 limited qty Operation qty 1 101 0 Binary Coded Decimal 1 read 06 no range or all Integers Any Variation 101 1 Binary Coded Decimal 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop Integers small 130 unsol resp 17 28 index 120 1 Authentication Challenge 32 Auth Request 5B free format 131 Auth resp 5B free format 120 2 Authentication Reply 32 Auth Request 5B free format 131 Auth resp 5B free format 120 3 Authentication Aggressive Any requests 07 limited qty 129 response 07 limited qty Mode Request 120 3 Authentication Aggressive 130 unsol resp 07 limited qty Mode Request 120 4 Authentication Session Key 32 Auth Request 07 limited qty Status Request 120 5 Authentication Session Key 131 Auth r
47. Click the OK button AB_SNMP DLL Enter IP Address Enter the IP address of the target module name or dot notation 10 116 38 203 Device Identification Vendor Allen Bradley Product Name 1766 L32BWAA Series A Revision 2 0 System Name MicroLogix 1400 Location Contact OK 10 Select the appropriate revision from the Firmware Revision dialog box and click the Next button Firmware Revision Catalog Number 1766LEC Serial Number Currert Revision 4 20 Con trol r Select the new revision lor this update Revision 2 Show All Current Folder c program files controlilash Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 220 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 The Summary dialog box is displayed Summary DANGER The target module is about to be update with new frmware During the update the module will be unable to perform its normal contro function Please make sure that al processes affected by this equipment have been suspended ard that all safety critical functions are not affected To abort this firmware update press Cencel now To begin the update now press Finish Catalog Number 1766LEC Serial Number Curent Revision amp 2 0 New Revision amp 2 0 More Info es 11 Click the Finish button Control The ControlFLASH dialog box is
48. DC Power Source selector switch cable port 2 power source external external power source connected to item 5 5 Terminals for external 24V DC power supply and chassis ground For additional information on connecting the AIC refer to the Advanced Interface Converter AIC User Manual publication 1761 UM001 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 90 Communication Connections Cable 1761 CBL APoo 2 1761 CBL PMO2U Length 45 cm 17 7 in 2 m 6 5 ft Cable Selection Guide 1761 1761 02 2 44600 Connections from to AIC External Power Power Supply Selection Required Switch Setting SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 04 processors ch O port 2 yes external MicroLogix 1000 1200 or 1500 ch 0 port 1 yes external MicroLogix 1400 ch 2 port 2 yes external PanelView 550 through NULL modem port 2 yes external adapter DTAM Plus DTAM Micro port 2 yes external PC COM port port 2 yes external External power supply required unless the is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch should be set to cable 2 Series C or later cables are required Cable 1761 002 1761 2 2 External power supply required unless the AIC is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selecti Length
49. Description for Channel 2 CS2 42 Description Reserved Always 0 43 CS0 43 52 43 List Category ID 10 44 CS0 44 CS2 44 Length 14 45 46 CS0 45 CS0 46 52 45 52 46 Format Code 2 Pre Send Time Delay 47 CS0 47 CS2 47 Node Address for this Slave 48 CS0 48 CS2 48 Reserved always 0 49 50 49 CS2 49 RTS Send Delay 50 CS0 50 CS0 51 CS2 50 CS2 51 RTS Off Delay bits 0 7 Baud Rate bits 8 9 Parity bits 10 15 Reserved Always 0 52 50 52 52 52 List Category ID 6 53 50 53 52 53 Length 32 54 55 CS0 54 CS0 55 CS2 54 CS2 55 Format Code 2 Application Layer Error Codes 0 NO ERROR No error found in the Application Layer 1 FC CANNOT BROADCAST Reserved 2 FC NOT SUPPORTED The received packet has unsupported Function Code 3 OBJ NOT SUPPORTED The received packet has unsupported object s 4 BAD REQUEST LENGTH Reserved 5 CONFIGURATION ERROR The error was caused by the invalid configuration during packet generating E g invalid Data Set Configuration 6 BAD PARAMETER The received packet has invalid parameters except Function Code and Object Codes F g invalid Qualifier codes 7 BAD FILE TYPE The error was caused by invalid configuration in DNP3 Slave Application Layer Invalid File Type specified 8 BAD FILE NUMBER The error was caused b
50. F Ambient Temperature above 40 C 104 F o Oc A Maximum Current per Relay Amps 1 2 3 4 5 Number of Relays Controlling Loads o Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 188 Specifications Common Specifications Specification Dimensions Analog Modules 1762 IF20F2 1762 IF4 1762 IR4 1762 IT4 and 1762 0F4 90 mm height x 87 mm depth x 40 mm width height including mounting tabs is 110 mm 3 54 in height x 3 43 in depth x 1 58 in width height including mounting tabs is 4 33 in Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F Temperature operating 20 65 4 149 F Operating humidity 5 95 non condensing Operating altitude 2000 m 6561 ft Vibration Operating 10 500 Hz 5 g 0 030 in max peak to peak Shock Operating 30 g Module power LED indicates power is applied Recommended cable Belden 8761 shielded For 1762 IT4 Shielded thermocouple extension wire for the specific type of thermocouple you are using Follow thermocouple manufacturer s recommendations Agency certification C UL certified under CSA C22 2 No 142 UL 508 listed CE compliant for all applicable directives C Tick marked for all applicable acts 1762 IR4 and 1762 IT4 Hazardous environment class Class Division 2 Hazardous Location Groups B C D UL 1604 C UL under CSA C22 2
51. I FClastemorz 0 Received Write FC Counter D Last Trans in response ERN Received Etc FC Counter Data file Num last error request 0 Trans Solicited Res FC Counter 0 Data element Num lasterrorrequest 0 Trans Unsolicited Res FC Counter 0 Transport Layer Error Code 0 Number of events to be reported 0 Transport Layer Error I FC Function Code Res Response Trans Transmitted 7 Channel Status DNP3 Slave Application Layer Application Layer Error Code J Received Confirm FC Counter D Application Layer Error Count 0 Received Read FC Counterz J FClasterorz 0 Received Write FC Counter z J Last Trans IIN response J J Received Etc FC Counterz 0 Data file Num lasterrorrequest 0 Trans Solicited Res FC Counterz 0 Data element Num lasterrorrequest I Trans Unsolicited Res FC Counter 0 Transport Layer Error Code 0 Number of events to be reported 0 Transport Layer Error Count 0 FC Function Code Res Response Trans Transmitted Diagnostics for Ethernet Channel Channel 1 This feature is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 353 Diagnostic Counters and Errors in DNP3 Slave subsystem for the Ethernet channel are logged in the Data File The data file is configured in the parameter Di
52. If the menu items shown are not displayed on the Main Menu screen scroll down by pressing the Down key REMOTE User Display b dvanced Set Press the OK key on the LCD keypad Select Comms EEPROM using the Down key and then press the OK key kComms LED Setup Select Store to MM to save user program and data and then press the OK key LIBET ETE Comms to HH Load from HH Using the LCD 155 5 If your controller is in a non executing mode skip to the next step Otherwise switch your controller to a non executing mode Mode remate RUH HUH PHDB mode Conf i rm 6 The usual method for using a memory module is to reuse the device Select Reuse Device or Write Only by pressing the Up or Down keys LIBET ETE 1 Heuse Device 2 Write Only Select Num Once Write Only is set write protection cannot be removed A change IMPORTANT cannot be made to the control program stored in a write protected memory module If a change is required use a different memory module For more information on transferring data to and from memory modules see Memory Module Operation on page 162 7 This screen appears if the save is complete Press the OK key to go back to executing mode Stored to HH PHOG gt RUN mode Conf
53. PN OUT 1 L2 or DC OUT 2 OUT 3 CR O OUT 4 m OUT5 HCR 44579 Wiring Your Controller 63 Analog Wiring Consider the following when wiring your analog modules The analog common COM is not connected to earth ground inside the module All terminals are electrically isolated from the system lt Channels are not isolated from each other Use Belden 8761 or equivalent shielded wire Under normal conditions the drain wire shield should be connected to the metal mounting panel earth ground Keep the shield connection to earth ground as short as possible To ensure optimum accuracy for voltage type inputs limit overall cable impedance by keeping all analog cables as short as possible Locate the I O system as close to your voltage type sensors or actuators as possible The module does not provide loop power for analog inputs Use a power supply that matches the input transmitter specifications 1762 IF20F2 Input Type Selection Select the input type current or voltage using the switches located on the module s circuit board and the input type range selection bits in the Configuration Data File Refer to MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 001 You can access the switches through the ventilation slots on the top of the module Switch 1 controls channel 0 switch 2 controls channel 1 The factory default setting for both switch 1 and swit
54. The BOOTP enable switch When BOOTP is enabled the MicroLogix 1400 attempts to 1 enabled read write learn its network related parameters at powerup via a BOOTP request There must be a BOOTP server on the network capable of responding to this BOOTP request When both BOOTP and DHCP are disabled the MicroLogix 1400 uses the locally configured network related parameters IP Address Subnet Mask Broadcast Address etc DHCP Enable The DHCP auto configuration enable switch When DHCP is enabled a DHCP server O disabled read write automatically assigns network related parameters to the MicroLogix 1400 when it logs into a TCP IP network There must be a DHCP server on the network capable of allocating network addresses and configuring parameters to newly attached device When both BOOTP and DHCP are disabled the MicroLogix 1400 uses the locally configured network related parameters IP Address Subnet Mask Broadcast Address etc SNMP Server SNMP enable switch Check this to enable SNMP Simple Network Management 1 enabled read write Enable Protocol SMTP Client The SMTP Client service enable switch When SMTP is enabled MicroLogix 1400 is O disabled read write Enable capable of transmitting e mail messages generated by a 485CIF write message with a string element There must be a SMTP server on the network capable of processing e mail service This provides an extremely versatile mechanism to report alarms status and other data rela
55. Type Series A Bytes Series B 243 Read Only VSTR length of length ofthe Device manufacturer s This variation This variation the string string value hardware version returns hardware returns hardware value series and revision series and revision of the controller of the controller HW SER A REV HW SER A REV 01 03 Supported ranges HW SER x REV yy where x is A F and is 00 31 For example HW SER A REV 01 HW SER B REV 03 or HW SER C REV 31 244 Reserved for future assignment 245 Read VSTR length of length ofthe User assigned location Non NULL terminated Write the string string value name value max max 255 255 bytes bytes 246 Read VSTR length of length ofthe User assigned ID Non NULL terminated Write the string string value code number value max 255 255 bytes bytes 247 Read VSTR length of length ofthe User assigned device Non NULL terminated Write the string string value name value max max 255 255 bytes bytes 248 Read Only VSTR 12 12 Device serial number This variation returns Ethernet MAC ID 0000BCxxxxxx 249 Read Only VSTR 6 6 DNP subset and This variation This variation conformance returns Subset returns Subset level and Test level and Test procedure version procedure version 2 2008 2 2009 250 Read Only VSTR length of length ofthe Device manufacturer s This variation This variation the string string value product name and mo
56. User Manual publication 1761 6 4 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 86 Communication Connections Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 When cutting cable segments make them long enough to route them from one AIC to the next with sufficient slack to prevent strain on the connector Allow enough extra cable to prevent chafing and kinking in the cable Use these instructions for wiring the Belden 3106A or 9842 cable See Cable Selection Guide on page 90 if you are using standard Allen Bradley cables Connecting the Communication Cable to the DH 485 Connector TIP A daisy chained network is recommended Do not make the incorrect connection shown below Belden 31064 Belden 3106A or Belden 3106A or or 9842 9842 9842 Connector Connector Connector Incorrect Single Cable Connection When connecting a single cable to the DH 485 connector use the following diagram Orange with White Stripes 6 Termination White with Orange Stripes X prata 2 Shild 1 Chassis Ground Blue 3106A orN NL Blue with White Drain Wire Stripes 9842 Shrink Tubing Recommended Multiple Cable Connection Communication Connections 87 When connecting multiple cables to the DH 485 connector use the following diagram to Next Device Connections using Belden 3106A Cable to Previous Device For this Wire Pair Connect this Wire To this Terminal Shield
57. When the LCD Setup menu screen is displayed press the OK key Comms PLCD Setup 4 Select Contrast to adjust the contrast of LCD REMOTE LCD Setup bContrast Back Light Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 158 Using the LCD 5 Adjust the contrast value using the Left and Right keys on the LCD keypad LED Contrast Bright Dark mmm 50 Configuring the backlight 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad If the menu items shown ate not displayed on the Main Menu screen scroll down by pressing the Down key REMOTE User Display bAcvanced Set 2 Press the OK key on the LCD keypad Qi Select LCD Setup using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad When the LCD Setup menu screen is displayed press the OK key REHUTE Comms Setup Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Using the LCD 159 4 Select Back Light to adjust backlighting options for the LCD LED Setup Contrast Back Light 5 The default value for the backlight is 30 seconds You can adjust backlight time using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad LED Setup BackL i qht 1 3Hsec on Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 160 Using the
58. i For DNP3 DS Prototype X you can configure the MicroLogix 1400 to Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 construct the Data Set Prototype objects NONE NONE 2 NONE NONE 3 NONE NONE 4 NONE NONE 5 NONE NONE 7 NONE NONE 8 NONE NONE 3 10 General Number of Descriptor Elements For DNP3 DS Descriptor X you can configure the MicroLogix 1400 to Max Data Length bytes Ancillary Value Length bytes 0 0 construct the Data Set Descriptor objects DNP3 Data Set Descriptor 0 Characteristics RD I EV Event Class Event Class o Trigger Event Disable Change of State Event Descriptor Element Configuration 00 CD CD 4 UN Index Descriptor Code DataType Code Data Length bytes Ancillary Value Lenath bytes Ancillary Value Event Occurrence Condition Point Address Type PI N PL 0 Standard DNP3 Point NONE 0 0 1 Standard DNP3 Point NONE 0 0 2 Standard DNP3 Point NONE 0 0 3 Standard DNP3 Point 0 0 Point Type PI Point Index FN File Number FE File Element FSE File Sub Element ecooooooooco cOooooooococo ecoooooocococco cms Ancillary Value E 309 Publication 17
59. instruction A mnemonic and data address defining an operation to be performed by the processor A rung in a program consists of a set of input and output instructions The input instructions are evaluated by the controller as being true or false In turn the controller sets the output instructions to true or false instruction set The set of general purpose instructions available with a given controller I O Inputs and Outputs Consists of input and output devices that provide and or receive data from the controller Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 404 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 jump Change in normal sequence of program execution by executing an instruction that alters the program counter sometimes called a branch In ladder programs a JUMP instruction causes execution to jump to a labeled rung ladder logic A program written in a format resembling a ladder like diagram The program is used by a programmable controller to control devices least significant bit LSB The digit or bit in a binary word code that carries the smallest value of weight LED Light Emitting Diode Used as status indicator for processor functions and inputs and outputs LIFO Last In First Out The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file low byte Bits 0 to 7 of a word logic A process of solving complex problems through the repeated use of simple functions that c
60. read file 5B free format 129 response 5B free format 70 5 File Control file transport 2 write file 5B free format 129 response 5B free format 70 6 File Control file transport 129 response 5B free format status 70 7 File Control file descriptor 28 get file info 5B free format 129 response 5B free format 70 8 File Control file 31 activate config 5B free format specification string 80 1 Internal Indications Packed 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop format 2 write 00 start stop index 7 85 0 Data Set Prototype 1 read 06 no range or all 85 1 Data Set Prototype 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 5B free format 06 no range or all 17 28 index 86 1 Data Set Descriptor 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 5B free format Contents 06 no range or all 17 28 index 86 2 Data Set Descriptor 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 5B free format Characteristics 06 no range or all 17 28 index 87 0 Data Set Present Value 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 17 28 index 87 1 Data Set Present Value 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 5B free format 06 range or all 17 28 index 88 0 Data Set Event 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 88 1 Data Set Event Snapshot 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 5B free format 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp
61. the devices depend on a DF1 Half Duplex Master to give each of them access in a timely manner As the number of slave devices increase the time between when slave devices are polled also increases This increase in time may also be large if you are using low baud rates As these time periods grow you may need to increase the poll timeout and reply timeout values for slave devices Ifa program download is started when using DF1 Half Duplex but then is interrupted due to electromagnetic interference or other events discontinue communications to the controller for the ownership timeout period and then restart the program download The ownership timeout period is 60 seconds After the timeout you can re establish communications with the processor and try the program download again The only other way to remove program ownership is to cycle power on the processor Using Modems with MicroLogix Programmable Controllers The types of modems you can use with MicroLogix controllers include the following dial up phone modems A MicroLogix controller on the receiving end of the dial up connection can be configured for DF1 Full Duplex protocol with or without handshaking The modem connected to the MicroLogix controller should support auto answer The MicroLogix 1400 supports ASCH out communications Therefore it can cause a modem to initiate or disconnect a phone call leased line modems Leased line modems are used with dedicated phone
62. 1 IN 2 DES E fea IN3 100 120V ac IN4 E IN 5 6 ee cae 9 IN7 AC STOREN Y COM connecte L2 AC a internally COM 44570 1762 108 Wiring Diagram DC sinking DC sourcing T Si IN3 24V de INS ee ae IN7 DC nm m DC sinkin DC DC COM 44571 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 1762 1016 Wiring Diagram Wiring Your Controller 57 DC Sinking pi re DC Sourcing IN 0 fu aa T 2 o 3 ita 24V dc Heiden went IN5 IN6 DC DC Sinking COM 0 DC Sourcing DC Sinking DC Sourcing 24V de DC Sinking DC Sourcing 44572 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 58 Wiring Your Controller 1762 1032T Wiring Diagram DC sourcing DC sinking 24V DC DC sourcing Y DC COM 1 DC COM 1 INO INT 1 N2 N3 IN4 79 7 1 IN 5 rR IN7 2 7 4 DC sinking DC sinking DC sourcing DC sinking DC sourcing DC sinking DC sinking DC COM 3 DC COM 3 IN16 7 1 IN17 18 24VDC 19 Y IN 20 IN 21 N22 2 7 N23 7
63. 15 14 13 12 11 10 ie e e e e oo oo O 2 a a oa a O0 G Bn Ss ea nm m oo 828 2 2 2 om So rm poco gy c ccc oc eo or oo O O O O O O coo coc To oll _ r ol rf B40 0 0 Radin Binary Columns Eee po Properties Usage Help DNP3 Data Set Object This feature is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 307 These object groups and variations are supported Data Set Objects g85v0 Data Set Prototype Any Variation g85v1 Data Set Prototype With UUID g86v1 Data Set Descriptor Data set contents g86v2 Data Set Desctiptor Characteristics g87v0 Static Data Set Any Variation g87v1 Static Data Set Present value g88v0 Event Data Set Any Variation g88v1 Event Data Set Snapshot Related Object Configuration File Number Data Set Prototypes Object File Number Data Set Descriptors Object File Number To generate a Data Set Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller configure Data Se
64. 16 6 6 Bus current draw max 80 mA at 5V dc 140 mA at 5V dc 110 mA at 5V dc 110 mA at 5V dc 0 40W 0 70W l 0 55W 80 mA at 24V de 90 mA at 24V de 180 mA at 24V dc 110 mA at 24V dc 2 16W 432 2 64W Heat dissipation max 2 9W e1w 28W 5 0 W at 30V dc 4 4 W at 26 4V dc The Watts per point plus the minimum W with all points energized Signal delay max resistive load On Delay 10 ms Off Delay 10 ms On Delay 10 ms Off Delay 10 ms On Delay 10 ms max 6 ms typical Off Delay 20 ms max On delay 10 ms max Off delay 10 ms max 12 ms typical Off state leakage max 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA 0 mA On state current min 10mA 10 mA 100 mA 10 mA On state voltage drop Not Applicable max Continuous current per 2 5 A Also see Relay Contact Ratings on 7 A Also see Relay 2 5 A Also see point max page 185 Contact Ratings on Relay Contact page 186 Ratings on page 185 Continuous current per 8A 8A 7 A Also see Relay 8A common max Contact Ratings on page 178 Continuous current per 16A 16A 30A Also see 8A module max Module Load Ratings 1762 on page 187 Surge current max See Relay Contact Ratings on page 185 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 See Relay Contact Ratings on page 186 See Relay Contact Ratings on page 185 Specifications 185 Output Specifications
65. 1761 CBL APOO Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications 45 cm 17 7 in 1761 CBL PMO02 Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications 2 m 6 5 ft 1761 CBL HM02 Series or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications 2 m 6 5 ft 2707 NC9 Series or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications 15 m 49 2 ft 1763 01 Series or later 30 cm 11 8 in 1747 CP3 Series or later 3 m 9 8 ft UNSUPPORTED CONNECTION Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 ATTENTION Do not connect MicroLogix 1400 controller to another MicroLogix family controller such as MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 or to the 1747 DPS1 Network port using a 1761 CBL AMOO 8 pin mini DIN to 8 pin mini DIN cable or equivalent This type of connection will cause damage to the RS 232 485 communication port Channel 0 of the MicroLogix 1400 and or the controller itself Communication pins used for RS 485 communications are alternately used for 24V power on the other MicroLogix controllers and the 1747 DPS1 network port Making a DF1 Point to Point Connection You can connect the MicroLogix 1400 programmable controller to your personal computer using a serial cable 1761 CBL PM02 from your personal computer s serial port to the controllers Channel 0 The recommended protocol for this configuration is DF1 Full Duplex Communication Connections 77
66. 2 In the Request History panel you will see the hardware addresses of devices issuing BOOTP or DHCP requests BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 File Tools Help Request History hrimin s Clear History Add to Relation List Ethernet Address MAC IP Address Hostname 00 0F 73 FF 00 78 20 8 Relation List New Delete Enable BOOTP Enable Disable BOOTP DHCP Ethernet Address MAC IP Address Status Unable to service BOOTP request from 00 0F 73 FF 00 78 Entries O of 256 3 Double click on the hardware address of the device you want to configure You will see the New Entry pop up window with the device s Ethernet Address MAC NewEnty X Ethernet Adres q9 0F 73 FF 00 78 PAddres 192 468 11 Hostnam Descriptio ML1100 Device No 1 4 Enter the IP Address and Description you want to assign to the device and click OK Leave Hostname blank Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 390 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface The device will be added to the Relation List displaying the Ethernet Address MAC and corresponding IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway if applicable BOOTP DHCP Server 2 3 File Tools Help Request History Clear History Add to Relation List Hostname hriminis Type Ethernet Address MAC 1997 Address
67. 240 V AC User Embedded Embedded Comm Ports Power Discrete 1 0 Analog 1 0 24V DC 12 Fast 24VDC Inputs None 1 RS232 RS485 8 Normal 24VDC Inputs 1 Ethernet 12 Relay Outputs 1 RS23212 1766 1766 L32BXB L32BWAA 1766 L32AWAA 24 V DC 100 240 V AC None 20 120VAC Inputs 12 Relay Outputs 12 Fast 24VDC Inputs 8 Normal 24VDC Inputs 6 Relay Outputs 3 Fast DC Outputs 3 Normal DC Outputs 24V DC 12 Fast 24VDC Inputs 4 Voltage 8 Normal 24VDC Inputs Inputs 12 Relay Outputs 2 Voltage 1766 L32BXBA 24 V DC 1 Isolated RS 232 RS 485 combo port 7 Non isolated RS 232 Standard D sub connector Component Descriptions Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 None 20 120VAC Inputs 12 Relay Outputs 12 Fast 24VDC Inputs 8 Normal 24VDC Inputs 6 Relay Outputs 3 Fast DC Outputs 3 Normal DC Outputs MicroLogix 1400 Memory Module and Built in Real Time Clock The controller has a built in real time clock to provide a reference for applications that need time based control The controller is shipped with a memory module port cover in place You can order a memory module 1766 MM1 as an accessory The memory module provides optional backup of your user program and data and is a means to transport your programs between controllers Hardware Overview 15 The program and data in your MicroLogix 1400 is non volatile and is stored when the powe
68. 32 bit 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop without flag 06 no range or all 21 10 Frozen Counter 16 bit 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop without flag 06 no range or all 22 0 Counter Event Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 07 08 limited qty 22 1 Counter Event 32 bit with 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index flag 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 22 2 Counter Event 16 bit with 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index flag 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 22 5 Counter Event 32 bit with 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index flag and time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 22 6 Counter Event 16 bit with 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index flag and time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 23 0 Frozen Counter Event Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 07 08 limited qty 23 1 Frozen Counter Event 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index with flag 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 23 2 Frozen Counter Event 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index with flag 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Implementation Table for Series controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Micrologix 1400 Distributed Networ
69. 4995 F F Thermocouple 270 225 C 454 373 F 7 5 C 13 5 F 10 C 18 F 0 0378 C C 0 0378 F F Thermocouple E 210 1000 C 346 1832 F 30 5 C 0 9 F 0 8 C 1 5 F 0 0199 C 0 0199 F F E ublication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 194 Specifications 1762 IT4 Accuracy Input Type With Autocalibration Enabled Without Autocalibration Accuracy 3 for 10 Hz 50 Hz and 60 Maximum Temperature Drift 4 Hz Filters max at 25 C 77 F at 0 60 C at 0 60 C 32 140 F Ambient 32 140 F Ambient Ambient Thermocouple E 270 210 C 454 346 F 4 2 C 7 6 F 6 3 C 411 4 F 0 2698 C C 0 2698 F F Thermocouple R 1 7 3 1 F 2 6 C 4 7 F 0 0613 C 0 0613 F F Thermocouple S 1 7 3 1 F 2 6 C 4 7 F 0 0600 C C 0 0600 F F Thermocouple C 1 8 C 3 3 F 3 5 C 6 3 F 40 0899 C 0 0899 F F Thermocouple B 3 0 C 5 4 F 45 C 8 1 F 40 1009 C C 0 1009 F F 50 mV 15 uV 25 uV 0 44uV C 0 80LV F 100 mV 20 uV 30 uV 30 691 V C 01 25uV F 1 The module uses the National Institute of Standards and Technology NIST ITS 90 standard for thermocouple linearization 2 Accuracy and temperature drift information does
70. 5 IS 14 1 e E a 3m Ga Gao ga an OO UNEB o 0O 0O 8 8 D 24 GODO m ae 0 0O 0O dU I e oo O 8 8 O oo 82 02 O O OD eo eo 8 oS ox cO00500n o0o002e0005 c Ff Ff ol D 6 m O 9 7 D 4 rf B350 0 Radix Binary Columns fie E 1 pe Properties Usage Help Data File N14 dec 16bits Analog Input Object File Radi Decimi 7 MN Coums 10 2 Desc Properties Usage Help Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 330 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Control Generating Event The MicroLogix 1400 checks all elements in the Object Data file for changes at the end of a scan and generates events where needed The key method to turn on and off event generating by ladder logic is to assign un assign the Class information bits in the Object Config Files The example below shows how to control the event generation condition by ladder logic and implements Deadband for Analog Input Objects which is only necessary for Series A MicroLogix 1400 In this example for 16 bit Analog Input point 0 N11 0 if the
71. 5 Gm or 1761 CBL ASO3 1747 or TJGI CBLAMO CHO m 1761 CBL ACOO m or 1761 CBL HM02 B Recommended Tools To connect a DH 485 network to additional devices you need tools to strip the shielded cable and to attach the cable to the AIC Advanced Interface Converter We recommend the following equipment or equivalent Working with Cable for DH 485 Network Description Part Number Manufacturer Shielded Twisted Pair Cable 3106A or 9842 Belden Stripping Tool Not Applicable Not Applicable 1 8 Slotted Screwdriver Not Applicable Not Applicable DH 485 Communication Cable The suggested DH 485 communication cable is either Belden 3106A or 9842 The cable is jacketed and shielded with one or two twisted wire pairs and a drain wire One pair provides a balanced signal line and one additional wire is used for a common reference line between all nodes on the network The shield reduces the effect of electrostatic noise from the industrial environment on network communication The communication cable consists of a number of cable segments daisy chained together The total length of the cable segments cannot exceed 1219 m 4000 ft However two segments can be used to extend the DH 485 network to 2438 m 8000 ft For additional information on connections using the AIC refer to the Advanced Interface Converter AIC
72. 5 A at 55 0 5 A at 55 0 5 A at 60 0 5A at 60 point max 131 F 131 F 131 F 140 F 140 F 0 5 A at 30 C 1 0 A at 30 C 1 0 at 30 C 86 F 86 F 86 F Continuous current per 1 0 A at 55 C 4 0 at 55 C 4 0 at 55 C 2 0 A at 60 C 2 0 A at 60 C common max 131 F 131 F 131 F 140 F 140 F 2 0 A at 30 C 8 0 A at 30 C 8 0 A at 30 C 86 F 86 F 86 F Continuous current 2 0 A at 55 C 4 0 at 55 4 0 at 55 4 0 A at 60 4 0 A at 60 module max 131 F 8 0 A at 30 131 F 140 F 140 F 4 0 A at 30 C 86 F 8 0 A at 30 C 86 F Surge current max 5 0 A Repeatability is once every 2 s for a duration of 25 ms 2 0 A Repeatability is once every 2 s at 55 C 131 F once every second at 30 86 F fora duration of 10 ms 2 0 A Repeatability is once every 2 at 55 C 131 F once every second at 30 C 86 F fora duration of 10 ms 2 0 A Repeatability is once every 2 s at 60 C 140 F for 10 ms 2 0 A Repeatability is once every 2 s at 60 C 140 F for 10 ms Isolated groups Output group to backplane isolation Group 1 Outputs 0 to 3 Group 2 Outputs 4 to 7 Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V ac for 1 s or 2596V dc for 1 s 265V ac working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Group
73. 8 5 19 Compliance to European Union 19 EMC 19 Low Voltage Directive RR EU 20 Installation Considerations 5 5 20 Safety Consideratofis ul o e TROU EN Dre db 21 Hazardous Location 21 Disconnecting Main 22 Safety Circuits 22 Power jose 25 Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay 23 Power Considerations uds oor Ebor edge ace CA Qr eb hid way 23 Isolation Transformers cen ces Tue 23 Supply som Tar en dy so t T PP wn Kae 23 Loss or Power Source os tc bee ciet ede qo aia 24 Input States on Power DOWN 24 Other Types of Line 24 Preventing Excesstve 25 Master Relay tian o setite 25 Using Emergency Stop Switches 26 Schematic Using Symbols esee oer rx 27 Schematic Using ANSI CSA 28 Installing a Memory Module 29 Using th Battery x aoi 29 Connecting the Battery Wire Connector 31 Controller Mounting 32 Controller and Expansion I O 32 Mounting the Co
74. 8 0 ms On delay 8 0 ms Off delay 8 0 ms On delay 8 0 ms Off delay 8 0 ms Off state voltage max 20V ac 5V dc 5V dc 5V dc 5V dc Off state current max 2 5 mA 1 5 mA 1 5 mA 1 0mA 1 5 mA On state voltage min 79V ac min 10V dc 10V dc 10V dc 10V dc 132V ac max On state current 5 0 mA min at 2 0 mA min at 2 0 mA min at 1 6 mA min at 10 mA at 5V dc 79V ac 47 Hz 10V dc 10V dc 10V dc 12 0 mA nominal 8 0mAnominal at 8 0 nominalat 2 0 mA min at at 120V ac 60 Hz 24V dc 24V dc 15V dc 16 0 mA max at 12 0 mA max at 12 0 mA max at 5 7 mA max at 132V ac 63 Hz 30V dc 30V dc 26 4V dc 6 5 mA max at 30 0V dc Inrush current max 250 mA Not applicable Not applicable Not applicable 250 mA Nominal impedance 12K o at 50 Hz KQ KQ 3K Q 10K at 60 Hz IEC input compatibility Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1 Type 14 Isolated groups Group 1 inputs Group 1 inputs Group 1 inputs Group 1 Inputs Group 1 inputs 0 7 internally 0 7 internally 0 7 Group 2 0 7 Group 2 0 3 Group 2 connected connected inputs 8 15 Inputs 8 15 inputs 4 7 commons commons Group 3 Inputs 16 23 Group 4 Inputs 24 31 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 182 Specifications Input Specifications Specification 1762 1A8 1762 108 1762 1016 1762 1032T 1762 1080W6 Input group to Verified by one of Verified by one of Ver
75. Addressing Point Address Type Standard DNP 3 Point Point Address Type Standard DNP3 Point Data Type Maximum Data Point Type Point Index Low Byte Point Index High Byte Code Length bytes NONE 0 0 NONE 0 0 No point type is associated NONE 0 0 BI 1 Binary input 0 to Maximum 4095 UINT 22 0 1 20r4 INT 23 0 1 20r4 When the Data Types other than OSTR and BSTR are OSTR 25 0 to 255 used the Point Index must be set to a point offset that is BSTR 6 255 divisible by 16 TIME 7 0 or 6 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 3 Double bit input 0 to Maximum 2047 When the Data Types other than OSTR and BSTR are used the Point Index must be set to a point offset that is divisible by 8 Cl 20 0 to Maximum 511 Counter Al 30 0 to Maximum 767 Analog input BCD 101 0 to Maximum 255 BCD point Point Address MicroLogix Data File Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 315 Point Address Data Maximum Data File Number File Element File Sub Element Type Code Length bytes MicroLogix Data NONE 0 0 0 0 0 He VSTR 1 0 82 9 255 ST 9 255 0 40 UINT 2 0 1 2074 2 S 0 65 for S for S N L 3 9 255 0 255 for B L 0 15 for B 7 9 255 9 255 L INT 3 0 1 20r4 2 S 0 65 for S for S N L 3 9 255 0 255 for B L 0 15 for B 7 9 255 9
76. DCb DCc DCa DCb DCc NOT NOT USED USED DC DC DC COMO INO IN4 IN2 IN3 COM 1 INA INS ING IN7 COM2 IN8 INQ IN10 IN11 1766 L32BXBA only DC COM 12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 IN17 IN18 IN19 ANA Vo 16 Ive Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 52 Wiring Your Controller 1766 L32BXB L32BXBA Sourcing Input Wiring Diagram DCc DCb DCc DC DC DC como INO IN1 IN2 IN3 COM 1 IN4 INS ING IN7 COM 2 IN8 INO IN10 IN11 1766 L32BXBA only DC COM cOM3 INi2 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 INI7 IN18 IN19 ANA VO IVi 24 I3 1766 L32AWA L32AWAA and 1766 L32BWA L32BWAA Output Wiring Diagram 4DCa Lia Lea Lib L2b Lic L2c Lid L2d Lad Lie L2e L3e Lit Lat Lat Lat Let Aoc QuQuuouuUgomouogoooogooooooguggogooo E L2 N DCO OUTO DC1 OUTI DC2 UT OUT4 OUTS DC OUT7 DCE 0 OUTI1 ovo ovi VAG ANA 1 100 240 vac 1766 L32BXB L32BXBA Output Wiring Diagram DCa 00 DCe DCc DCe DCf DCf DCf Aouro Aoi ze DCO OUTO DC1 OUT vDC2 OUT4 OUTS OUT7 COM2 DC3 OUT8 DC4 OUT 065 OUTIO OUT ovo Ovi 1 DON J ANA IH U 1 4 2 4 Controller 1 0 Wiring Minimizing Electrical Noise Because of the variety of applications and environments wh
77. Data Set Descriptors Configuration Parameters These parameters ate used to construct Data Set Descriptors objects DNP3 Data Set Descriptor 0 General Number of Descriptor Elements 0 Event Occurrence Condition fase Point Address Type PUN PLC Standard DNP3 Point NONE 0 0 Standard DNP3 Point NONE 0 0 2 Standard DNP3 Point NONE 0 0 Standard DNP3 Point 0 0 Point Type PI Point Index FN File Number FE File Element FSE File Sub Element Trigger Event Disable Change of State Even 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Cancel Number of Descriptor Elements 0 10 This must the same as the number of the Descriptor elements that are configured Characteristics Used to assign characteristics to this Descriptor RD set if data set is readable ST set if outstation maintains a static data set EV set if outstation generates a data set event Event Class Used to assign Event Class to this Descriptor 0 None e 1 Class 1 2 Class 2 3 Class 3 Trigger Event Set this parameter to generate an event unconditionally This bit can also be set by the ladder logic to generate timed events Once this parameter is set by the ladder logic or communications the MicroLogix 1400 clears it automatically after generating an event at the end of scan This parameter is stored as a bit in the relevant Data Set Descriptor Config file a
78. Data Value of a Trim Pot on page 149 The current Key In mode determines how the value changes are applied when you press the Up and Down keys to change the data value for a trim pot When set to Continuous the changes are applied immediately whenever you press the Up and Down keys When set to Discrete the changes are applied only when you press the OK key after you have changed the value using the Up and Down keys By using the Key In Mode screen as shown below you can change the Key In mode to use Discrete Changing Key In Mode Follow these steps to change the current Key In mode Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 136 Using the LCD 1 P Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 On the Main Menu screen select Advance Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000000 RU User Display b dvanced Set Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Settings Menu screen is displayed 000000 bKeyIn Hode Cfg ENET Cfg Select KeyIn Mode using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key RU The Key In Mode screen is displayed The current mode Continuous in this example is selected marked up with the symbol Ir 000000 KeyIn Hode Continuous Discrete RU Using Communication
79. EN P March 2011 Channel Configur ation Channel 1 Link Layer Configuration In RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro open Channel Configuration in the MicroLogix 1400 Series B project tree To enable DNP3 over IP protocol check DNP3 over IP Enable in the Channel 1 configuration Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 249 Unlike serial port configuration cycle power to the controller after downloading the Ethernet port configuration to enable the DNP3 over IP feature Channel Configuration 10 100 Mbps Full Duplex Half Duplex e Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 250 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Link Layer related configuration can also be done in the Chan 1 DNP3 tab Channel Configuration DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration Application Layer related configuration can be done in the DNP3 Slave tab Publication 1766 UMOO1F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 251 For the MicroLogix 1400 Series A controllers you can see the following tabs Channel Contiqur ation Eg CharrelO Channel 1 Channel 2 Slave Data Link Laver Channel for Unsolciied Response fcha Bl m Application Layer Enable Unsolicited On Stait Up Serd Initial Unsolicited Start Up Eneble Unsolciled Class Enable Unsolcited Fer 1 2 L em m idi Enable Unsolcite
80. L32AWA or 1766 L32BXB Maximum Allowable Values Current Calculated Values Current Subtotal from Table on page 396 1225 mA at 5V DC 1155 mA at 24V DC System Loading 0 mA 260 mA 260 mA at 5V DC 0 mA 180 mA 180 mA at 24V DC System Loading 33 845 W Validating Systems using 1766 L32BWA Maximum Allowable Values Current for Devices Connected to the 24 DC Sensor Supply 260 mA x 5V 180 mA x 24V 1 300 mW 4 320 mW 5 620 mW 5 62 W Calculated Values Sum of all sensor currents 250 mA at 24V DC Current for MicroLogix Accessories and Expansion 1 0 140 mA at 24V DC example sensor value Current Values Subtotal from Table 1225 mA at 5V DC 1155 mA at 24V DC System Loading 0 mA 260 mA 260 mA at 5V DC 0 mA 180 mA 180 mA at 24V DC System Loading 39 845 W 140 mA x 24V 260 mA x 5V 180 mA x 24V 3 360 mW 1 300 mW 4 320 mW 8 980 mW 8 98W System Loading Worksheet The tables below are provided for system loading validation See System Loading Example Calculations on page 396 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 398 System Loading and Heat Dissipation Current Loading Calculating the Current for Expansion 1 0 Catalog Number n A B nxA nxB Number of Device Current Requirements Calculated Current at5VDC at24VDC mA at5VDC
81. LCD Notes Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Chapter 6 Real Time Clock Operation Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules The MicroLogix 1400 controller has a built in real time clock RTC You can order a memory module as an accessory For more information on Real Time Clock Function File and Memory Module Information File refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication TIP 1766 01 type of memory module is available for use with the MicroLogix 1400 controller 1766 MM1 Memory Module 384 KB Operation at Power up and Entering a Run or Test Mode At power up and when the controller enters a run or test mode the values date time and status of the RTC are written to the RTC Function File in the controller The following table indicates the accuracy of the RTC for various temperatures RTC Accuracy Ambient Temperature Accuracy 0 C 32 F 13 121 seconds month 25 C 77 F 54 5 seconds month 40 C 104 F 29 78 seconds month 55 131 F 43 150 seconds month 1 These numbers are maximum worst case values over a 31 day month Writing Data to the Real Time Clock When valid data is sent to the real time clock from the programming device or another controller the new values take effect immediately The real time clock does not allow you to load or store invalid da
82. LICET TL SHHP Enabled Enabled OOOO REMOTE Enabled HTTP Disabled Power cyclexxx TIP To exit the Protocol Setup Menu press the ESC key on the LCD keypad at any time Trim Pot Operation The MicroLogix 1400 controller provides two trimming potentiometers trim pots POTO and POT1 which allow modification of integer data within the controller The data value of each trim pot can be used throughout the control program for timers counters analog presets depending upon the requirements of the application You can change the data value of each trim pot using the trim pot screens provided by the LCD To access to the Trim Pot Set screen which is the top screen for the trim pot functionality select TrimPot Set on the LCD default menu screen as shown below and press the OK key on the LCD keypad 000000 bTrimPot Set RU System Info Fault Code Trim pot data is updated continuously whenever the controller is powered up Using the LCD 149 Changing Data Value of a Trim Pot Follow these steps to change the data value of a trim pot either POTO or 1 On the Menu screen select TrimPot Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad 000000 bTrimPot Set System Info Fault Code 2 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Trim Pot Select screen is displayed as shown below RU rimpot Set LCD POTH LCD B
83. Maximum file size is 384 Kbytes The first application segment of the ladder program should be larger than or equal to the size of System Exe File structure 64 bytes An application segment of the ladder program cannot be exceed 2048 bytes Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 342 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Rules for Initializing a User Program A DNP3 master should send the function code DELETE_FILE 27 for initializing user programs When MicroLogix 1400 receives a request with the function code DELETE_FILE 27 it clears the current user program which was downloaded into the controller and restores the default user program User programs cannot be initialized while the controller is in Executing mode Before initializing programs a mode change request should be sent with the function code STOP_APPL 18 Rules for uploading Communication Status Files A DNP3 master should send the function code OPEN FILE 25 READ 1 and CLOSE_FILE 26 for uploading Communication Status Files The function code WRITE 2 for downloading Communication Status Files is not supported The file name should be DIAG CHO CSF DIAG CH1 ESF and DIAG CH2 CSF for Channel 0 Channel 1 and Channel 2 respectively Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network This section covers how to change the controller mode via DNP3 network To change th
84. MicroLogix 1400 activates all configurations as well as channel configurations after the last application file segment is received For the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller the function code Activate Configuration 0 1 is supported Unlike Series controller the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller does not activate all configurations as well as channel configurations after the last application file segment is received To activate all configurations you need to send a command with the function code Activate Configuration 0x1F after downloading the user program Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 341 Maximum file size is 384 Kbytes The MicroLogix 1400 supports downloading up to 256Kbyte size of user program when Recipe is not configured When Recipe is configured Maximum file size is 384 Kbytes The first application segment of the ladder program should be larger than or equal to the size of System Exe File structure 64 bytes An application segment of the ladder program cannot be exceed 2048 bytes When the MicroLogix 1400 receives the first application segment it acquires Edit Resource from the system If the last application segment is received properly the MicroLogix 1400 returns Edit Resource to the system After acquiring Edit Resource each of the application segments should be received within the Edit Resource Owner Timeout The MicroLogix 1400 controller checks the integrity of the program afte
85. MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 267 This parameter is used for configuring the expected session key change count The valid range is 1 to 10000 Default value is 2000 Reply Timeout x100 ms in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This parameter is used for configuring the reply timeout in 100 msec The valid range is 0 1200 120 s Default value is 20 2 s Maximum Error Count in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This parameter is used for configuring the maximum error count The valid range is 0 10 Default value is 2 HMAC Algorithm in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This parameter is used for configuring the HMAC Algorithm 1 HMAC SHA 1 truncated to 4 octets serial 2 HMAC SHA 1 truncated to 10 octets networked 3 HMAC SHA 256 truncated to 8 octets serial 4 HMAC SHA 256 truncated to 16 octets networked The valid range is 1 4 Default value is 2 User Info Config File Number in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This file number is used to define user information Secure Authentication The value of this parameter is N file only Valid range is 0 7 9 255 Default value is 0 Publication 1
86. O o E o sb B35 6 ooo 00008 800 300 0 D 35 7 B35 8 0002020000000202000 D B35 9 EU EIZ Radic Bran v Desc DNP3 Analog Input Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read the object with Any variation Analog Input Static Objects g30v0 Analog Input Any Variations g30v1 Analog Input 32 bit with flag g30v2 Analog Input 16 bit with flag g30v3 Analog Input 32 bit without flag default g30v4 Analog Input 16 bit without flag default g30v5 Analog Input Single prec flt pt with flag default Analog Input Event Objects g32v0 Analog Input Event Any Variation g32v1 Analog Input Event 32 bit without time default g32v2 Analog Input Event 16 bit without time default g32v3 Analog Input Event 32 bit with time g32v4 Analog Input Event 16 bit with time g32v5 Analog Input Event Single prec flt pt without time default g32v7 Analog Input Event Single prec flt pt with time Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 300 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Related Object File Number 16 bit Analog Input Object File Number 32 bit Analog Inpu
87. OS state 228 using 213 controller 401 grounding 45 1 0 wiring 52 installation 19 LED status error conditions 206 205 minimizing electrical noise 52 32 34 35 preventing excessive heat 25 status indicators 203 controller modes 130 controller overhead 401 controller spacing 32 counter 402 CPU Central Processing Unit 402 cursor display 108 D data table 402 default communication configuration 72 DeviceNet Communications 96 97 DeviceNet network connecting 96 97 selecting cable 96 DF1 Full Duplex protocol connecting 76 description 231 example system configuration 232 using a modem 77 234 DF1 Half Duplex protocol description 232 DH485 communication protocol configuration parameters 83 236 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 DH485 network configuration parameters 239 82 devices that use the network 237 example system configuration 241 installation 85 planning considerations 237 DIN rail 402 disconnecting main power 22 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 243 DNP3 analog input object 299 303 BCD object 305 binary input object 287 289 counter object 294 device attribute object 321 344 292 frozen counter object 297 objects 278 slave application layer 272 260 double integer file monitoring 122 download 402 download a user program via DNP3 network 336 DTE Data Terminal Equipment 402 duplicate IP address detection 383 E Electronics Industries Association EIA 231 EMC Directive 19 20 EMI 402 enc
88. Offset Description 40 Counter for Commands Sent 41 Reserved 42 Counter for Replies Received 43 Counter for Replies Received with Error 44 Counter for Replies Timed Out 45 Reserved 46 Error Count in sessions 47 Error Code in sessions 40 Outgoing Message Connections 49 Maximum Connections Allowed 50 Counter for Commands Received 51 Reserved 52 Counter for Replies Transmitted 53 Reserved 54 Reserved 55 Reserved 56 Reserved 57 Reserved Firmware use only 58 Reserved Firmware use only 59 Reserved Firmware use only Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 355 TCP Client Link Layer Diagnostics for DNP3 TCP Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 356 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Word Offset Description 60 Application Layer Error Codes 0 NO_ERROR No error found in the Application Layer 1 FC_CANNOT_BROADCAST Reserved 2 FC_NOT_SUPPORTED The received packet has unsupported Function Code 3 OBJ NOT SUPPORTED The received packet has unsupported objects 4 BAD REQUEST LENGTH Reserved 5 CONFIGURATION ERROR The error was caused by the invalid configuration during packet generating E g invalid Data Set Configuration 6 BAD PARAMETER The received packet has invalid parameters except Function Code and Object Codes E g invalid Qualifier codes 7 BAD FILE TYPE The error was caused by invalid configuration in DNP3 Slave Application Lay
89. Point Sink Source 24V DC Input and 6 Point AC DC Relay Output Module Analog 1762 IF4 4 Channel Voltage Current Analog Input Module 1762 OF4 4 Channel Voltage Current Analog Output Module 1762 IF20F2 Combination 2 Channel Input 2 Channel Output Voltage Current Analog Module Temperature 1762 IRA 4 Channel RTD Resistance Input Module 1762 IT4 4 Channel Thermocouple mV Input Module Use only the following communication cables with the MicroLogix 1400 controllers These cables are required for Class I Div 2 applications e 1761 CBL AMOO Series C or later e 1761 CBL AP00 Series or later e 1761 CBL PMQ02 Series or later e 1761 CBL HM02 Series C or later 2707 NC9 Series C or later e 1763 NC01 Series A or later 1747 CP3 Series A or later Programming Communication Options Hardware Overview 17 UNSUPPORTED CONNECTION Do not connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to another MicroLogix family controller such as MicroLogix 1000 MicroLogix 1200 MicroLogix 1500 or the network port of a 1747 DPS1 Port Splitter using a 1761 CBL AMOO 8 pin mini DIN to 8 pin mini DIN cable or equivalent This type of connection will cause damage to the RS 232 485 communication port Channel 0 of the MicroLogix 1400 and or the controller itself The communication pins used for RS 485 communications on the MicroLogix 1400 are alternately used for 24V power on the other MicroLogix controllers and the network port of the 1747 DPS1 Port Sp
90. Refer to the following typical pinout for constructing straight through cable pins 4 and 6 are internally connected for 1766 LEC only AIC Optical Isolator Modem or 1766 LEC Channel 2 9 25 Pin 9 3 TXD gt TXD 2 3 2 RXD 4 RXD 3 2 5 GND lt gt GND 7 5 1 co CD 8 1 4 DTR gt DTR 20 4 6 DSR DSR 6 6 8 CTS 4 CTS 5 8 7 RTS gt RTS 4 7 Communication Connections 79 Constructing Your Own Null Modem Cable If you construct your own null modem cable the maximum cable length is 15 24m 50 ft with a 25 pin or 9 pin connector Refer to the following typical pinout Optical Isolator Modem 9 Pin 25 Pin 9 Pin 3 TXD TXD 2 3 2 RXD RXD 3 2 5 GND gt GND 7 5 1 CD 4 CD 8 1 4 DTR 20 4 gt 6 DSR DSR 6 6 8 CTS CTS 5 8 7 RTS gt RIS 4 7 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 80 Communication Connections Connecting to a DF1 Half Duplex Network When a communication port is configured for DF1 Half Duplex Slave available parameters include the following DF1 Half Duplex Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Baud Rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2 KBps 38 4 KBps Parity none even Node Address 0 254 decimal Control Line no handshakin
91. Small Related Object File Number Small BCD Object File Number Related Configuration File Number Small BCD Config File Number To generate a Small BCD Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure the Small BCD Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 306 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 When a Small BCD Object File is configured the Index number starts from 0 1 word is used for 1 Index of Small BCD Object As an example a Small BCD Object File is configured as shown below Data File N21 has 10 elements Index 0 of the Small BCD Object is N21 0 Index 1 is N21 1 and Index 9 is N21 9 2 Data File N21 dec Small BCD Object File As an example a Small BCD Config File is configured as shown below The file has 10 elements B40 0 0 and B40 0 1 can be configured for Class Level 0 1 2 or 3 for DNP3 Index 0 of the Small BCD Object File B40 1 0 and B40 1 1 can be configured for Class Level for DNP3 Index 1 of the Small BCD Object File Default Class Level is 0 Any other bits are reserved In the example below for Small BCD Config File Class Level of Index 0 is 1 B40 0 0 and B40 0 1 Class Level of Index 1 is 2 B40 1 0 and B40 1 1 Class Level of Index 2 is 3 B40 2 0 and B40 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File B40 bin Small BED Config File
92. Software Considerations on page 239 for tips on setting the parameters listed above Connecting to Networks RS 232 RS 485 Interface Devices that use the DH 485 Network 237 In addition to the MicroLogix controllers the devices shown in the following table also support the DH 485 network Allen Bradley Devices that Support DH 485 Communication Catalog Description Installation Function Publication Number Bulletin 1761 MicroLogix 1000 SeriesC or These controllers support DH 485 communications 1761 6 3 Controllers later Bulletin 1762 MicroLogix 1200 Series Aor These controllers support DH 485 communications 1762 UM001 later Bulletin 1763 MicroLogix1100 Series Aor These controllers support DH 485 communications 1763 UM001 later Bulletin 1764 MicroLogix 1500 Series Aor These controllers support DH 485 communications 1764 UM001 later Bulletin 1747 SLC 500 SLC Chassis These processors support a variety of 1 0 requirements and 1747 UM011 Processors Processors functionality 1746 BAS BASIC Module SLC Chassis Provides an interface for SLC 500 devices to foreign devices 1746 UM004 Program in BASIC to interface the 3 channels 2 RS232 and 1 1746 PM001 DH 485 to printers modems or the DH 485 network for data 1746 RM001 collection 2760 Flexible Interface 1771 PLC Provides an interface for SLC 500 using protocol cartridge 1747 6 12 Module
93. The Advanced Settings Menu screen is displayed as shown below KeyIn Cfg ENET Cfg If ENET Cfg is selected press the OK key If not select ENET Cfg using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key O00000 Cfg Cfg Using the LCD 147 4 If Protocol setup is selected press the OK key If not select Protocol setup using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key 00000 REHOTE ENET Cfq Port Setting Protocol setup 5 The passwotd screen is displayed Press Up Down Left and Right keys to enter a Master password up to a maximum of 10 digits In this example the current Master password is allocated as 1234 ENET Setup Master Password After entering the Master password press the OK key on the LCD keypad nN The following menu is displayed SNHP Enabled HTTP Enabled If you want to change the SNMP setting press the Up or Down key and press the OK key to apply the change Disabl HTTP Enabled Power cyclexxx Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 148 Using the LCD Using Trim Pots Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 7 change the HTTP setting press the Up or Down key and press the OK key to apply the change
94. The last trim pot whose data value you changed is selected by default If you are accessing to this screen for the first time is selected by default 3 Select a trim pot either POTO or POT1 whose data value you want to change using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad In this example we will select POTO 4 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Trim Pot 0 screen is displayed as shown below Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 150 Using the LCD Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 TMIN and TMAX indicate the range of data value for the trim pots both POTO and POT1 The factory default for TMIN TMAX and POTO values are 0 250 and 0 in decimal respectively TMIN and TMAX on this screen are read only but you can change them using the LCD Function File in your application program The TMIN and TMAX elements can only be changed by a program download For mote information on how to change Trim Pot configuration including TMIN and TMAX refer to the LCD Function File described in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RM001 The same TMIN and TMAX values are used for both trim pots POTO IMPORTANT and POT1 This behavior is intended by design for simplicity in Trim Pot configuration When you enter this screen the last digit of the POTO value is flashing It indicates the current digit Press the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad t
95. UMO001F EN P March 2011 subnet mask gateway address Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface 391 A subnet mask is a filter that a node applies to IP addresses to determine if an address is on the local subnet or on another subnet If an address is located on another subnetwork messages are routed through a local gateway to be transferred to the destination subnetwork If your network is not divided into subnets then leave the subnet mask field at the default If you are Then manually configuring channel 1 ebe sure the BOOTP enable field is disabled and have a network with subnets euse your programming software to enter the subnet mask and gateway address using BOOTP to configure channel ebe sure BOOTP is enabled 1 and have a network with einclude the subnet mask s and gateway address es subnets Manually Configuring Channel 1 for Controllers on Subnets If you are manually configuring channel 1 for a MicroLogix 1400 controller located a subnet deselect both of the BOOTP Enable and DHCP Enable options by clicking on the checked box as shown in the figure below Channel Configuration General Channel Channel 1 Channel 2 Driver d Hardware Address IP Address 192 168 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address User Provided Web Pages Starting Data File Number 0 Number of Pages 1 Default Domain Name Pri
96. UMO01F EN P March 2011 222 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System The LCD displays this screen 1 66 LEC BOOT FAN 01 BH ready The Run Fault and Force LEDs display a walking Pattern Stage 3 The LCD displays this screen Progress Catalog Number 1766LEC Serial Number Current Revision amp 2 0 New Revision A 20 Waiting while module burns flash 1766 LEC BOOT FRN H1 88 flashing At this stage the Power and Force LEDs are solid ON After flashing of the controller the LCD shows this screen 1 BOOT FAN 91 BB reset Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System 223 15 After the flashing is complete the following dialog box prompts you to wait for the controller to reset verify that the POWER LED is solid GREEN and verify the FAULT LED is turned OFF A 1 wait until the controller reset 2 verify the POWER LED is sold GREEN 3 verify the FALLT LED is turned OFF 7 e 16 Click the OK button 17 Enter the hardware address if prompted Otherwise the AB SNMP BOOTP Server Running dialog box may appear AB SNMP BOOTP Server Could not find the host on the network This machine wil now attempt to act as a BOOTP server for this IP address Enter the hardware address ol the module below or cancel to re enter the address 00008 394 89 Cancel
97. Unchecked The valid range is 0 32767 Default value is 0 As long as it is set for greater than 0 the NEED TIME Internal Indication IIN1 4 bit will be set at startup and then after every Time Synchronization Interval minutes Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 262 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 When the parameter Enable Time Synchronization On Start Up Only is Disabled Unchecked and the parameter Time Synchronization Interval x1 mins is configured to 0 IIN1 4 bit is never turned on Max Response Size The MicroLogix 1400 sends Application Layer frame to fit in Max Response Size If the Response packet size is larger than this value the MicroLogix 1400 fragments the Response packet The valid range is 27 2048 in bytes Default value is 2048 Confirmation Timeout x1 ms When Enable Confirmation is enabled the MicroLogix 1400 waits for Application Layer Confirmation until the Confirmation Timeout x1 ms has expired The valid range is 100 65535 in 1ms increments Default value is 10000 Number of Retries This parameter is only for Unsolicited Response If this value has the maximum which is 65535 it means infinite retries of the Unsolicited Response The valid range is 0 65535 Default value is 0 Number of Class Events If the MicroLogix 1400 is configured not to initiate Unsolicited Response this parameter used to limit the maxi
98. absolute value of the difference between the present value of N11 0 and the value that was most recently queued as an event for that point exceeds the deadband value then an event is generated for that point Data File List Name Number Type Scope Debug Words Elements Last Output 0 0 Global No 18 6 0 5 Input 1 Global No 24 8 7 Status 2 5 Global No 0 66 9 65 3 Global No 1 B3 0 Timer 4 T Global No 3 T4 0 Counter 5 C Global No 3 C5 0 Control 6 R Global No 3 R6 0 Integer 7 N Global No N7 0 Float 8 F Global No 2 1 F8 0 16 bit Analog Input Object File 11 N Global No 10 10 N11 9 Binary Output Object File 12 B Global No 10 10 B12 0 16 bit32 bit Analog Input Config File 21 B Global No 10 10 B21 9 A16l OLD 30 N Global No 10 10 N30 9 16 DEADB 31 N Global No 10 10 N31 9 16 Temp 32 N Global No 10 10 32 9 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 331 LAD Z Totel Runga in File 3 0000 0001 0002 CLR Cleer Dest B210 0000000000000000 lt SUB Subtract Source A Source B Dest ABS Absolute Value Source 14320 Dest Bitwise Inclusive OR Source A 1 Source B In the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers new configuration files are defined for the Deadband for Analog Input Objects and the Threshold for Counter Objects The feature of the configuration fi
99. any program and files should not be in open state Request 14 OxOE WARM RESTART No MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 15 0xOF FC INITIALIZE DATA No Obsolete Request 16 0x10 FC INITIALIZE APPL Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Clears fault and changes the controller mode to Remote Program See Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page 342 Request 17 0x11 FC_START_APPL Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Clears fault and changes the controller mode to Remote Run See Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page 342 Request 18 0x12 FC_STOP_APPL Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Changes the controller mode to Remote Program See Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page 342 Request 19 0x13 FC_SAVE_CONFIG No Deprecated Request 20 0x14 FC_ENABLE_UNSOLICITED Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 21 0x15 FC_DISABLE_UNSOLICITED Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 22 0x16 FC ASSIGN CLASS No Request 23 0x17 FC DELAY MEASURE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Used for non LAN Request 24 0x18 FC RECORD CURRENT TIME No MicroLogix 1400 parses Used for LAN Request 25 0x19 FC_OPEN_FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 26 0x1A FC_CLOSE_FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 27 0x1B FC_DELETE_FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 28 0x1C FC_GET_FILE_INFO No MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 29 0x1D FC AUTHENTICATE FILE Yes MicroLogix 1400 pa
100. applicable not applicable not applicable M On port 1 pin 4 is electronically jumpered to pin 6 Whenever the AIC is powered on pin 4 will match the state of pin 6 An 8 pin mini DIN connector is used for making connections to port 2 This connector is not commercially available If you are making a cable to connect to port 2 you must configure your cable to connect to the Allen Bradley cable shown above In the 1761 2 cable pins 4 and 6 are jumpered together within the DB 9 connector Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 94 Communication Connections Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Safety Considerations This equipment is suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D or non hazardous locations only WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD AIC must be operated from an external power source A This product must be installed in an enclosure All cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means See Safety Considerations on page 21 for additional information Install and Attach the AIC 1 Take care when installing the AIC in an enclosure so that the cable connecting the MicroLogix controller to the AIC does not interfere with the enclosure door 2 Carefully plug the terminal block into the RS 485 port on the AIC you are putting on the network Allow enough cable slack to prevent stress on the plug 3 Provide strain relief f
101. burns Storage Store lithium batteries in a cool dry environment typically 20 C 2 5 C 68 F 77 F and 40 60 humidity Store the batteries and a copy of the battery instruction sheet in the original container away from flammable materials Transportation One or Two Batteries Each battery contains 0 23 of lithium Therefore up to two batteries can be shipped together within the United States without restriction Regulations governing shipment to or within other countries may differ Three or More Batteries Procedures for the transportation of three or more batteries shipped together within the United States are specified by the Department of Transportation DOT in the Code of Federal Regulations CFR49 Transportation exemption to these regulations DOT E7052 covers the transport of certain hazardous materials classified as flammable solids This exemption authorizes Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 200 Replacement Parts Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 transport of lithium batteries by motor vehicle rail freight cargo vessel and cargo only aircraft providing certain conditions are met Transport by passenger aircraft is not permitted A special provision of DOT E7052 11th Rev October 21 1982 par 8 provides that Persons that receive cell and batteries covered by this exemption may reship them pursuant to the provisions of 49 CFR 173 22a in any of t
102. configuration via configuration software screen or the user program by writing a unique bit pattern into the module s configuration file 1 Rated working voltage is the maximum continuous voltage that can be applied at the input terminal including the input signal and the value that floats above ground potential for example 30V DC input signal and 20V DC potential above ground 2 detection time is equal to the module scan time which is based on the number of enabled channels the filter frequency of each channel and whether cyclic calibration is enabled 3 Maximum current input is limited due to input impedance 1762 IT4 Accuracy Specifications 193 1762 IT4 Repeatability at 25 77 F 2 Input Type Repeatability for 10 Hz Filter Thermocouple J 0 1 C 0 18 F Thermocouple 110 1300 C 166 2372 F 0 1 C 0 18 F Thermocouple 210 110 C 346 166 F 0 25 C 0 45 F Thermocouple T 170 400 C 274 752 F 0 1 C 40 18 F Thermocouple T 270 170 C 454 274 F 1 5 C 2 7 F Thermocouple 270 1370 454 F 2498 F 0 1 C 0 18 F Thermocouple 270 170 C 454 274 F 2 0 C 3 6 F Thermocouple E 220 1000 C 364 1832 F 0 1 C 0 18 F Thermocouple E 270 220 C 454 364 F 1 0 C 1 8 F Thermo
103. controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num dec hex Codes dec hex 40 3 Analog Output Status 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop Single prec flt pt with flag 06 no range or all 41 1 Analog Output 32 bit 3 select 17 27 28 index 129 response echo of request 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 41 2 Analog Output 16 bit 3 select 17 27 28 index 129 response echo of request 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 41 3 Analog Output Single prec select 17 27 28 index 129 response echo of request flt pt 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 50 1 Time and Date Absolute 1 read 07 limited qty 1 129 response 07 limited qty time qty 1 2 write 07 limited qty 1 50 3 Time and Date Absolute 2 write 07 limited qty 1 time at last recorded time 51 1 Time and Date CTO 129 response 07 limited qty Absolute time synchronized 130 unsol resp qty 1 51 2 Time and Date CTO 129 response 07 limited qty Absolute time 130 unsol resp qty 1 unsynchronized 52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 response 07 limited qty qt
104. displayed ControlFLASH 2 Are you sure you want to begin V updating the target device 12 Click the Yes button If your computer has more than one Ethernet interface installed the following dialog box displays the assigned IP addresses of each of the listed Ethernet interfaces Otherwise go to step 16 Select address af Ethernet interface to use far fx 10 116 34 94 10 116 38 204 13 Highlight the IP address of the PC Ethernet interface that connects to the Ethernet network hosting the target processor and click the OK button Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System 221 14 You may need to wait several seconds before the Progress dialog box is displayed A typical sequence is shown below While the download is in progress the RUN LED FAULT LED and FORCE LED display a Walking Pattern First RUN LED ON then FAULT LED ON and then FORCE LED ON in sequence When the flashing starts the POWER LED and the FORCE LED stay solid ON The concurrent ControlIFLASH and LCD displays during the Firmware download are shown here Stage 1 Catalog Number 1766LEC Senal Number Current Revision 4 20 New Revision 4 20 Starting update Please Watt m The LCD displays this screen 1 66 LEC BOOT FAN H1 BH ready Stage 2 Progress Catalog Number 1766LEC Serial Number Current Revision A 2 0 New Revision A 2 0 Transmitting Chunk 1934 of 3072 Publication 1766
105. electrical interface is selected through your choice of communication cable The existing MicroLogix 1761 communication cables provide an interface to the RS 232 drivers The 1763 NCO1 cable provides an interface to the RS 485 drivers Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 18 Hardware Overview Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 The controller may also be connected to serial devices such as bar code readers weigh scales serial printers and other intelligent devices using ASCII See Default Communication Configuration on page 72 for the configuration settings for Channel 0 MicroLogix 1400 can be connected directly to RS 485 network via channel 0 using ASCII The MicroLogix 1400 supports EtherNet IP communication via the Ethernet communication Channel 1 In addition either Modbus TCP or DNP3 over IP can be enabled for Channel 1 You can connect your controller to a local area network that provides communication between various devices at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps This port supports CIP explicit messaging message exchange only The controller cannot be used for CIP implicit messaging real time I O messaging The controller also includes an embedded web server which allows viewing of not only module information TCP IP configuration and diagnostic information but also includes the data table memory map and data table monitor screen using a standard web browset See Chapter 4 for more information on connecting to the availabl
106. firewall VPN or virus protection software running on the computer 2 Cycle power to the processor 3 Restart the firmware upgrade procedure as described in the section Using ControlFLASH for Firmware Upgrade on page 215 Communication error during TFTP transfer AB_SNMP DLL Communications error during TFTP transfer This error message is displayed when there is a communication error during TFTP transfer To clear this error 1 Check your Ethernet connections are intact 2 Cycle power to the processor 3 Restart the firmware upgrade procedure as described in the section Using ControIFLASH for Firmware Upgrade on page 215 4 If the error still persists connect the controller s Ethernet port directly to the computer s Ethernet port using a crossover cable and then repeat from step 2 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 228 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Missing or Corrupt 0 state The Boot Firmware runs the controller in this state Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 ATTENTION Do not interrupt the flash procedure once you have begun to download the firmware If the flash procedure is interrupted the controller will be in a Missing or Corrupt OS state on the next power N Up When the controller is in this state the controller shows either one of the following The POWER LED is solid ON and the RUN FAULT and FORCE LEDs are blinking simultaneously
107. handshaking For radio modem connections use DF1 Radio Modem protocol especially if store and forward capability is required For general multi drop modem connections or for point to point modem connections that require RTS CTS handshaking use DF1 Half Duplex slave protocol In this case one and only one of the other devices must be configured for DF1 Half Duplex master protocol IMPORTANT Never attempt to use DH 485 protocol through modems under any circumstance TIP All MicroLogix controllers support RTS CTS modem handshaking when configured for DF1 Full Duplex protocol with the control line parameter set to Full Duplex Modem Handshaking or DF1 Half Duplex slave protocol with the control line parameter set to Half Duplex Modem MicroLogix 1400 controllers also support DCD Data Carrier Detect line for DF1 Radio Modem protocol For other protocols you can only access the DCD signal from your ladder logic No other modem handshaking lines such as Data Set Ready and Data Terminal Ready are supported by MicroLogix 1400 controller The DH 485 protocol defines the communication between multiple devices that coexist on a single pair of wires DH 485 protocol uses RS 485 Half Duplex as its physical interface RS 485 is a definition of electrical Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 236 Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 characteristics it is 7 07 a proto
108. i rm Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 156 Using the LCD Loading communication EEPROM Follow these steps to load user programs and data from the memory module to the controller s memory 1 Select Load from MM to load user programs and data REMOTE Comms Store to HH bLoad from HH 2 If your controller is in a non executing mode skip to the next step Otherwise switch your controller to a non executing mode REMOTE Mode remote RUH gt mode Conf i rm 3 This screen appears if the load from the memory module is complete Press the OK key to go back to executing mode LIBET ETE Loaded from HH gt mode Conf i rm TIP For more information on transferring data to and from memory modules see Memory Module Operation on page 159 LCD setup In the LCD Setup screen you can configure the contrast value and backlight for the LCD Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Using the LCD 157 Configuring contrast value 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up N QW and Down keys on the LCD keypad If the menu items shown are not displayed on the Main Menu screen scroll down by pressing the Down key User Display b dvanced Set Press the OK key on the LCD keypad Select LCD Setup using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad
109. in the RUN mode This prevents the use of the online editing feature The type of online editing is dependent on the MicroLogix 1400 processor s mode switch position in LCD display and the processor s mode There are two types of online editing Program Online Editing when the processor is in either PROG mode REM Program mode Runtime Online Editing when the processor is in either REM Test or REM Run mode The following table summarizes the MicroLogix 1400 processor mode switch positions in LCD and modes that enable online editing mode switch Position MicroLogix 1400 Editing Mode Processor Mode RUN RUN Not Available PROGram Program Program Online Editing REMote REMote Program Program Online Editing REMote REMote Test Runtime Online Editing REMote REMote Run Runtime Online Editing IMPORTANT ATTENTION gt Online editing is not available when the mode switch in LCD screen is in the RUN position Use the online editing function while in the RUN mode to make minor changes to the ladder program We recommend developing your program offline since ladder rung logic changes take effect immediately after testing your edits Improper machine operation may occur causing personnel injury or equipment damage Online Editing 169 Edit Functions in Runtime Online Editing During a runtime online editing session the processor s executing ladder logic The edit zone markers tell the processo
110. is connected to pin 1 of the plug on the other end The straight through RJ45 cable is commonly used to connect network cards with hubs on 10Base T and 100Base Tx networks On network cards pair 1 2 is the transmitter and pair 3 6 is the receiver The other two pairs are not used On hubs pair 1 2 is the receiver and 3 6 the transmitter It may be best to wire your cables with the same color sequence In this cable layout all pins are wired one to one to the other side The pins on the RJ45 connector are assigned in pairs and every pair carries one differential signal Each line pair has to be twisted In small networks where only two Ethernet devices need to be connected together point to point a cross over RJ45 cable may be necessary where the transmit and receive lines on both JR45 connectors are cross connected The color coding for the cross over RJ45 cable have been defined in the EIA TIA 568A standard In a cross over cable layout you should remember that one end is normal and the other end has the cross over configuration However because the MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port implements auto crossover also called Automatic MDI MDI X Configuration a straight through cable may be used even for direct point to point connections between the MicroLogix 1400 and another Ethernet device TCP IP is the mechanism used to transport Ethernet messages On top of TCP Ethernet IP and or Modbus TCP protocol is required to establish session
111. ke ae eee 209 Codes 211 Calling Rockwell Automation for 212 Appendix D Preparing for Firmware Upgrade 213 Install ControlFLASH 213 Prepare the Controller for Firmware 4 214 Using ControlFLASH for Firmware 215 ControlFLASH Error Messages 225 Missing or Corrupt OS state 228 Recovering from Missing or Corrupt OS State 228 Appendix E RS 232 Communication 231 RS 485 Communication 231 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 8 Table of Contents Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 DFT Full D plex Protocol ccs WR REDI RES 231 DF1 Half Duplex 1 5 232 DF1 Half Duplex 232 Considerations When Communicating as a DF1 Slave on a Multi drop 234 Using Modems with MicroLogix Programmable Controllers 234 DH 485 Communication 1 235 DH 485 Configuration 236 Devices that use the DH 485 Netwo
112. no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop without flag 7 freeze 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 6 Counter 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop without flag 7 freeze 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 21 0 Frozen Counter Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 21 1 Frozen Counter 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop with flag 21 2 Frozen Counter 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop with flag 21 5 Frozen Counter 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop with flag and time 21 6 Frozen Counter 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop with flag and time 21 9 Frozen Counter 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop without flag 21 10 Frozen Counter 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop without flag 22 0 Counter Event Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 07 08 limited qty 22 1 Counter Event 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index with flag 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 22 2 Counter Event 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index with flag 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 23 0 Frozen Counter Event 1 read 06 no ran
113. of 0 The configured outstation defined data number in the sets DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file 10 max 216 Read Only UINT 4 2 Max number of binary 10 10 outputs per request 217 Read Only UINT 4 2 Local timing accuracy 10 000 in microseconds 218 Read Only UINT 4 2 Duration of timing 0 in seconds accuracy 219 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for analog output 0 0 events 220 Read Only UINT 4 2 Max analog output index 256 3 221 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of analog outputs 0 256 3 222 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for binary output 0 events 223 Read Only UINT 4 2 Max binary output index 256 16 224 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of binary outputs 0 256 16 225 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for frozen counter 1 events 226 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for frozen 1 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 counters Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 323 Object Group 0 Variations for Attribute Set 0 Variation Read Attribute Length Max Description Value Series A Value Series Write Data Bytes Length in Type Series A Bytes Series B 227 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for counter 1 events 228 Read Only UINT 4 2 Max counter index 256 2 229 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of counter points 0 256 2 230 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for frozen analog 0 inputs 231 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for analog input 1 even
114. of Changes To help you find new and updated information in this release of the manual we have included change bars as shown to the right of this paragraph Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Summary of Changes 2 Firmware Revision History Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Features are added to the controllers through firmware upgrades See the latest release notes 1766 001 to be sure that your controller s firmware is at the level you need Firmware upgrades are not required except to allow you access to the new features You can only upgrade firmware within the same series of controller Summary of Changes Table of Contents Hardware Overview Installing Your Controller Table of Contents Firmware Revision 2 Preface Who Should Use this 11 Purpose of this Man al peter EP eat 11 Related Documentation up pack titer etos pd Ael 12 Common Techniques Used in this 12 Chapter 1 Hardware Deabules qa epe raga 13 Component Descriptions eer ney Ne ER Ry RR Ee 14 MicroLogix 1400 Memory Module and Built in Real Time Clock 14 1762 Expansion 15 Communication Gables qin oie MSS Gomes on RES 16 p redis 17 Communication OPU ons saci to Miron v RON Wey abet 17 Chapter 2 Agency 5 8
115. only from the DNP3 Master Node Address which is configured in the parameters Master Node0 on page 258 and Master Node1 Master Node2 Master Node3 Master Node4 on page 258 The maximum number of Master Node Address for the Master Address Validation is 5 Enable Self Address The valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When this bit is Disabled Unchecked any packets which contain the destination address 65532 FFFCh are ignored When this bit is Enabled Checked any packets which contain the destination address 65532 FFFCh are accepted and processed Enable Access Control The valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests from any DNP3 Master When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests only from the DNP3 Master IP Address which is configured in the parameters Master IP Address0 to Master IP Address4 The maximum number of Master IP Address for the Access Control is 5 End Point Type The valid selections are Listening Dual and Datagram Only Default is Listening End Point Type Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 258 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Master Node0 This value is used to validate Master node ad
116. or open circuit condition by bit reporting for analog inputs Over or under range or open circuit condition by bit reporting for analog inputs Over or under range or open circuit condition by bit reporting for analog inputs 1 For proper operation both the plus and minus input terminals must be within 27V 10V for 1762 IT4 of analog common 2 Vem 1 Vcg AC 3 Vem 0 includes offset gain non linearity and repeatability error terms 4 Only applicable to Series 1 0 modules Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Over or under range or open circuit condition by bit reporting for analog inputs Input Specifications 1762 IR4 Specification Input types Specifications 191 1762 IR4 100 Q Platinum 385 e 200 Q Platinum 385 500 Q Platinum 385 e 1 000 2 Platinum 385 e 100 Q Platinum 3916 e 200 Q Platinum 3916 500 Q Platinum 3916 e 1 000 2 Platinum 3916 e 10 Q Copper 426 e 120 Q Nickel 672 120 Q Nickel 618 e 604 Q Nickel Iron 518 e0 150 Q e 0 500 Q e 0 1 000 Q e 0 3 000 Q Heat dissipation 1 5 Total Watts The Watts per point plus the minimum Watts with all points enabled Normal mode rejection ratio Typical accuracy Autocalibration enabled at 25 C 77 F ambient with module operating temperature at 25 C 77 F 1 70 dB minimum at 50 Hz with the 10 or 50 Hz filter selected 70 dB minimum at 60 Hz with the 10 or
117. or later cables are required Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Communication Connections 97 Cable Length Connections from to DNI 1761 CBL AMOO 45 cm 17 7 in MicroLogix 1000 port 2 MicroLogix 1100 1400 channel 0 port 2 MicroLogix 1200 port 2 MicroLogix 1500 port 2 o E T 1761 CBL AP00 1761 CBL PM02 ji Cable Length Connections from to DNI 1761 CBL APOO 45cm 17 7 in SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 04 processors port 2 1761 CBL PM02 2 6 5 ft PC COM port port 2 1764 LRP processor channel 1 port 2 MicroLogix 1400 channel 2 port 2 Connecting to Ethernet You can connect directly a MicroLogix 1400 to an Ethernet network via the Ethernet port Channel 1 You do not need to use an Ethernet interface card such as the Ethernet Interface ENI and ENIW catalog number 1761 NET ENI and 1761 NET ENIW to connect your MicroLogix 1400 controller to an Ethernet network For additional information on connecting to an Ethernet network see Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface on page 377 Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 98 Communication Connections RS 232 485 Port Channel 0 Ethernet Connections 44606 The Ethernet connector Channel 1 is an RJ45 10 100Base T connector The pin o
118. other port supports limited functionality and it does not support some features like Unsolicited Response DNP3 Slave configuration is shared by both Channel 0 and Channel 2 ports if the Channel 0 and Channel 2 are configured to DNP3 protocol Any changes in DNP3 Slave configuration tab will affect both channels Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 252 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 For the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers you can see the following tabs Channel Configuration E General Channel 0 Channel1 Channel2 Chan 1 DNP3 DNP3 Slave DNP3 Slave Application Layer Enable Confirmation Channel for Unsolicited Responses v Max Response Size 2048 Send Init Unsol Null Resp on Restart Confirmation Timeout 1 10000 7 Enable Unsolicited On Start Up Number of 0 Class Class2 Class3 Select Timeout x1 I0 Enable Unsolicited for Class Time Sync Interval 1 mins 0 fi 0 n 0 fi 0 Enable Time Sync On Start Up Only Hold Time after Events 1 5 E E DNP3 Object File Numbers m Default Variation 3 DataFiles Config Files Config File Number p Class Flag OL T D jo o o p Dataset Object File Max Number 1 Numbers of Files Binary Duk o NN b Counter 16bits o E Counter 32bits jo p o D oun r Secure Authentication Frozen Cou
119. program which was downloaded by RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 275 FC START APPL FC Byte 0x11 17 Start Application This function code is used to start the user program which was downloaded by RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software FC STOP APPL FC Byte 0x12 18 Stop Application This function code is used to stop the user program which was downloaded by RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micto FC ENABLE UNSOLICITED FC Byte 0x14 20 Enable Unsolicited Message This function is used to dynamically enable unsolicited messages generated in the MicroLogix 1400 FC DISABLE UNSOLICITED FC Byte 0x15 21 Disable Unsolicited Message This function is used to dynamically disable unsolicited messages generated in the MicroLogix 1400 FC DELAY MEASURE FC Byte 0x17 23 Delay Measurement used for Non LAN Procedure This function code is used to measure the communication channel delay time FC_RECORD_CURRENT_TIME FC Byte 0x18 24 Record Current Time used for LAN Procedure This function code is used in the procedure for time synchronizing MicroLogix 1400 controllers that communicate over a LAN This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers FC_OPEN_FILE FC Byte 0x19 25 Open File This function code is used to make a file available for reading or writing FC_CLOSE_FILE FC Byte 26 Close File Publication 1766 UMO
120. r DCD 5 4 CTS 6 3 TXD TXD 7 2 RD 8 1 DCD Communication Connections 93 Recommended User Supplied Components These components can be purchased from your local electronics supplier User Supplied Components Component external power supply and chassis ground Recommended Model power supply rated for 20 4 28 8V dc NULL modem adapter standard AT straight 9 25 pin RS 232 cable see table below for port information if making own cables 1761 or 1761 CBL PM02 Port 1 En Port 3 Port 2 RS 485 connector B DB 9 RS 232 cable straight D connector 6 7 gt 2 6 73 5 3 ae 8 Ke sj 4 a 9 O 5 3 a SHLD 2 L GND 1 AIC Terminals Pin Port 1 DB 9 RS 232 Port 202 1761 CBL PM02 Port 3 RS 485 cable Connector 1 Jreceived line signal detector 24V dc chassis ground DCD 2 received data RxD ground GND cable shield 3 transmitted data TxD request to send RTS signal ground 4 DTE ready pray received data RxD DH 485 data B 5 signal common GND received line signal detector DH 485 data DCD 6 DSR clear to send CTS termination 7 request to send RTS transmitted data TxD not applicable 8 clear to send CTS ground GND not applicable 9 not
121. signal has been presented at the input terminal of the controller one shot A programming technique that sets a bit for only one program scan online Describes devices under direct communication For example when RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro is monitoring the program file in a controller operating voltage For inputs the voltage range needed for the input to be in the On state For outputs the allowable range of user supplied voltage output device A device such as a pilot light or a motor starter coil that is controlled by the controller processor A Central Processing Unit See CPU processor file The set of program and data files used by the controller to control output devices Only one processor file may be stored in the controller at a time program file The area within a processor file that contains the ladder logic program program mode When the controller is not executing the processor file and all outputs are de energized program scan A part of the controller s operating cycle During the scan the ladder program is executed and the output data file is updated based on the program and the input data file programming device Executable programming package used to develop ladder diagrams protocol The packaging of information that is transmitted across a network 407 To acquire data from a storage place For example the processor READs information from the input data file to solve t
122. supports data file download protection This allows user data to be saved not overwritten during a download TIP Data file download protection is only functional if the processor does not have a fault size of all protected data files in the memory module exactly match the size of protected data files within the controller and all protected data files are of the same type See Protecting Data Files During Download in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual Publication 1766 001 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 164 Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Memory Module Write Protection The memory module supports write once read many behavior Write y protection is enabled using your programming software IMPORTANT Once set write protection cannot be removed A change cannot be made to the control program stored in a write protected memory module If a change is required use a different memory module Removal Insertion Under Power The memory module can be installed or removed without risk of damage to either the memory module or the controller except during a data transaction If the memory module is removed during a data transaction data corruption can occut If a memory module is installed while the MicroLogix 1400 is executing the memory module is not recognized until either a power cycle occuts or until the c
123. table below shows how the LCD uses the configuration information with integer file number 7 LCD 0 TUF 7 The data protection for its file depends on the setting for LCD Edit Disable If LCD Edit Disable is set to 1 in file properties the corresponding data file is considered read only by the LCD and the Protected message is displayed IMPORTANT Although you cannot change protected data from the LCD keypad the control program or other communication devices have access to protected data Protection bits do not provide any overwrite protection to data within the target integer file It is entirely the user s responsibility to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten TIP The LCD always starts at word 0 of a data file It cannot start at any other address within the file For explanations in this section we assume the following in the application program An integer file N7 which is 256 elements long 256 words is defined with the preset data as shown in the screen capture below Data File N7 dec INTEGER nix Offs 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 30 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 150 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 60 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 70 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 80 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 90 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 gt 11 ce NTI Radix Decimal gt Symbol Columns 10 z o E JN Pr
124. the Installation Instructions for the specific module 2 Conducted Immunity frequency range may be 150 kHz to 30 MHz if the Radiated Immunity frequency range is 30 1000 MHz Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Input Specifications Specification Shipping weight approx with carton 1762 1 8 209 0 0 46 Ibs 1762 108 200 g 0 44 Ibs 1762 1016 230 g 0 51 Ibs 1762 10327 200g 0 44 Ibs Specifications 1762 1080W6 280g 0 62 Ibs 181 Voltage category 100 120V ac 24V de 24V de 24V de 24V de sink source sink source sink source sink source Operating voltage 79V ac 132V ac at 10 30V dc at 10 30V dc 10 30V dc 10 30V dc at range 47 Hz 63 Hz 30 C 86 F 10 26 4V dc 92 24 points at 30 C 30 C 86 F 10 26 4V de at 86 F 10 26 4V de at 55 C 131 F 10 26 4V de 65 C 149 F 23 points at 60 C 140 F Number of inputs 8 8 16 32 8 Bus current draw max 50 mA at 5V de 50 mA at 5V de 70 mA at 5V de 170 mA at 5V de 110 mA at 5V de 0 25W 0 25W 0 35w 8 0 mA at 24V dc 80 mA at 24V dc Heat dissipation max 2 0 W 37W 4 3 W at 26 4V 5 4 W at 26 4V dc 5 0 W at 30V dc 5 4 W at 30v 6 8 W at 30V dc 4 4 W at 26 4V dc The Watts per point plus the minimum W with all points energized Signal delay max On delay 20 0 ms Off delay 20 0 ms On delay 8 0 ms Off delay 8 0 ms On delay 8 0 ms Off delay
125. the MicroLogix 1400 some of the variations are written so that you can read or write your own strings in your application The object group of the Device Attribute object is 0 The supported range of the variation is 211 255 The R W property shows if the object is Read Only Read or Write If the R W property is writable the value which was written by DNP3 master device is stored to non volatile memory The object group of the Device Attribute is 0 The supported range of the variation is 211 255 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 322 Object Group 0 Variations for Attribute Set 0 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Variation Read Attribute Length Max Description Value Series A Value Series B Write Data Bytes Length in Type Series A Bytes Series B 211 Read Only VSTR 27 Identifier of support for Returns the Returns the user specific attributes identifier for identifier for user specific user specific attributes attributes Rockwell NULL for DNP3 Automation Inc 1 212 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of master defined 0 0 data set prototypes 213 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of 0 The configured outstation defined data number in the set prototypes DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file 10 max 214 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of master defined 0 0 data sets 215 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number
126. the SNMP client The maximum length is 63 read only characters Location The Location string which is specified by the SNMP client The maximum length is 63 read only characters Network Link The Link ID assigned to the MicroLogix 1400 by either an RSLinx topic or by the 0 read write ID routing table in a 1756 DHRIO or 1756 DH485 module The range is 0 199 Starting Data The first ASCII A file number in a contiguous block of 4 32 ASCII files 4 per User 0 read write File Number Provided Web Page The range is 9 252 or 0 for disable Number of The number of User Provided Web Pages provided the Starting Data File Number is 1 read write Pages non zero The range is 1 8 DNP3 over IP When DNP3 over IP is enabled checked the MicroLogix 1400 enables DNP3 over IP 0 disable read write Enable feature on Ethernet channel Power cycle is required for changes to take effect Modbus TCP When Modbus TCP is enabled checked the MicroLogix 1400 enables Modbus TCP 0 disable read write Enable feature on Ethernet channel Power cycle is required for changes to take effect Disable When EtherNet IP Incoming Connections is disabled checked the MicroLogix 1400 does 0 disable read write EtherNet IP not allow the incoming EtherNet IP connection However MicroLogix 1400 can send the Incoming outgoing EtherNet IP commands to other EtherNet IP devices Power cycle is required for Connections changes to take effect Disable When Duplicate IP Ad
127. transfer applications to or from the controller TIP For more information on program data upload refer to your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software documentation Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 166 Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules Notes Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Chapter 7 Online Editing Directions and Cautions for A Download is Required Before Starting Online Editing MicroLogix 1400 Online Editing User At least one download is required before you can start online editing If you are using a MicroLogix 1400 from out of box state or after clearing processor memory or a firmware upgrade at least one download is required before starting online edits If not an error occurs and programming software will go offline due to a default image mismatch between programming software RSLogix500 and the MicroLogix 1400 You can also see the fault code 1Fh which is a user defined fault code In otder to prevent this error you need to download the program to the MicroLogix 1400 although the program is empty This problem happens only in out of box state or after clear processor memory RSLogix 500 Pro x Program could not be compiled Online Edit Error Going Offline PTO and PWM instructions may not be deleted during runtime online edit This is because if the PTO or PWM instructions were deleted during runtime online edit outputs could stop in an unpredictable state cau
128. transfer rate MicroLogix 1400 controllers support Ethernet IP with CIP explicit messaging message exchange BOOTP DHCP Client HTTP Server SMTP Client DNS Client SNMP Server Socket Interface with CIP Generic messaging Modbus TCP Client Server and DNP3 over IP MicroLogix 1400 controllers do not support Ethernet I O master capability through CIP implicit messaging real time I O messaging Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 72 Communication Connections Default Communication Configuration Using the Communications Toggle Functionality Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 For more information on MicroLogix 1400 communications refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RMO001 The MicroLogix 1400 communication Channel 0 has the following default communication configuration TIP For Channel 0 the default configuration is present when e The controller is powered up for the first time e The communications toggle functionality specifies default communications specified using the LCD Display The DCOMM indicator on the LCD Display is on i e lit in solid rectangle An OS upgrade is completed See Chapter 5 for more information about using the LCD Display See Appendix E for more information about communicating DF1 Full Duplex Default Configuration Parameters Parameter Default Baud Rate 19 2 KBps Parity none S
129. 0 and or Channel 2 Serial ports The MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller also supports DNP3 over IP protocol via Channel 1 Ethernet port To program the MicroLogix 1400 controller use RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software version 8 10 00 or later for Series A controller and version 8 30 00 later for Series B controller Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 246 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 In RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro open Channel Configuration in the MicroLogix 1400 project tree RSLogix 500 Pro UNTITLED Ede Yew Search Comms Tools Window Hep IE 07 lt gt 3 d m 2 fuser Aen Tires X Processo Status gt Function Fies Contiguration Channel Status gg Program Files svso 551 ont LAD 2 There are 4 configurations related to DNP3 protocol in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software Channel 0 configuration Channel 2 configuration Channel 1 configuration DNP3 Slave Application Layer configuration Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 247 Channel 0 and Channel 2 Link Layer Configuration Link Layer related configuration can be done in the Channel 0 and or Channel 2 tab Channel Confiqur ation Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 248 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UMO001F
130. 0 elements and L13 has 10 elements accordingly In total 20 Counter Object indexes are configured Index 0 of the Counter Object is N12 0 Index 1 is N12 1 Index 10 is L13 0 and Index 19 is L13 9 Data File N12 dec 1Gbits Counter Object File Radie Decimal 10 Z Bb zl Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 296 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 As an example a Counter Config File is shown below These files have 10 elements for each B32 0 0 and B32 0 1 can be configured for Class Level 0 1 2 or 3 for DNP3 Index 0 of the 16 bits Counter Object File B32 1 0 and B32 1 1 can be configured for Class Level for DNP3 Index 1 of the Counter Object File Default Class Level is 0 Any other bits are reserved So in the example below for 16 bit Counter Config File Class Level of Index 0 is 1 B32 0 0 and B32 0 1 Class Level of Index 1 is 2 B32 1 0 and B32 1 1 Class Level of Index 2 is 3 B32 2 0 and B32 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File B32 bin 1 5 Counter Contig File 15 14 13 12 11 10 fEset e e e m i D D D 2 gt D D D D O O O O O o E 0500500555505 ORI DoD Oe D D O O O O oom fee cr D D D O
131. 001F EN P March 2011 242 Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface DH 485 Network with a MicroLogix Controller AIC AIC D O PanelView SLC 5 04 DH 485 Network AIC AIC AIC AIC a 8 Ex 09 Lae lips E fae MicroLogix MicroLogix 1400 MicroLogix MicroLogix 1000 GEESE Computer 1200 1500 DH 485 Network Belden shielded twisted pair cable Belden shielded twisted pair cable 1763 Nco1 1761 or 1761 CBL PM02 24V DC user supplied port 1 or port 2 1747 to PC or 1761 CBL ACOO Lr pen 1 DB 9 RS 232 port Eu 2 mini DIN 8 RS 232 port 3 RS 485 port 4 Series A or later cables are required Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Modbus Communication Protocol ASCII Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Inter
132. 0080002080000 B30 1 000200000200 0001 30 2 1 30 3 00000000900 0 000 30 4 00000000900 230 5 000000000 0 30 6 0080002300000 30 7 ap ogo o oro n ao B30 8 0000000000 30 9 0000000000 8302 0 Radix Binary Columns fie E Eo Properties Usage Help Data File B10 bin Binary Input Object File iS Ga 00000000000 000000200002 0000 0000002030 002 0000 00000020302 0020000 ponpugonpuaazagatunonssusglst 000000203030 002 C0000 0 00 0 O 6 DO O 0 0 0 oop aooo op o 00 0 D 0000n0020002020P000080 LI 10 0 0 Binary b Columns fie Desc ee po Properties Usage Help Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 329 In the same manner this 16 bit Analog Input Object File has bit 1 bit 0 of 36 0 B36 1 and B36 2 configured to 0 1 1 0 and 1 1 respectively The event for the index 0 of 16 bit Analog Input Object will be generated as a Class 1 event the event for the index 1 as a Class 2 event and the event for the index 2 as a Class 3 event if there are any changes for the points N14 0 141 or N14 2 For any other 16 bit Analog Input points the events will not be generated Data File B36 bin 16bits Analog Input Config File
133. 01F EN P March 2011 276 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 After the file reading or writing operation this function code used to unlock the file FC DELETE FILE FC Byte 0 1 27 Delete File A DNP3 master uses this function code to delete a file FC GET FILE INFO FC Byte 0x1C 28 Get File Information This function code is for the master to retrieve information about a file in the MicroLogix 1400 This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers FC_AUTHENTICATE_FILE FC Byte 0 10 29 Authenticate File This function code is used to obtain an authentication key that is needed to open or delete a file FC_ABORT_FILE FC Byte Ox1E 30 Abort File This function code is used to immediately request termination of the current read write operation and close the file without saving This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers FC ACTIVATE CONFIG FC Byte x1F 31 Activate Config This function code is used to begin using the configuration or executable code specified by the objects included in the request This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers FC AUTHENTICATION REQUEST FC Byte 0x20 32 Authentication Request The master uses this function code when sending authentication messages to the MicroLogix 1400 that require a response This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B contro
134. 0A Not Applicable max surge duration 10 ms Not Applicable max rate of repetition at 30 C 86 F max rate of repetition at 60 C 140 F once every second once every 2 Not Applicable Not Applicable seconds Turn On Time maximum 11 us 28 ns Turn Off Time maximum 89 us 2 3 us 1 Output 2 3 and 4 are designed to provide increased functionality over the other FET outputs Output 2 3 and 4 may be used like the other FET transistor outputs but in addition within a limited current range they may be operated at a higher speed Output 2 3 and 4 also provide a pulse train output PTO or pulse width modulation output PWM function Specifications 177 AC Input Filter Settings Nominal Filter Setting ms ON Delay ms OFF Delay ms High Speed DC Input Filter Settings Inputs 0 to 11 Nominal Filter Setting ms ON Delay ms OFF Delay ms Maximum Counter Frequency Hz Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum 30 Duty Cyclo 0 005 0 001 0 005 0 001 0 005 100 0 kHz 0 008 0 003 0 008 0 003 0 008 60 0 kHz 0 0125 0 0075 0 0125 0 007 0 0115 40 0 kHz 0 025 0 019 0 025 0 018 0 023 20 0 kHz 0 075 0 062 0 072 0 066 0 074 6 7 kHz 0 100 0 089 0 100 0 088 0 098 5 0 kHz 0 250 0 229 0 250 0 228 0 248 2 0 kHz 0 500 0 459 0 500 0 455 0 492 1 0 kHz 1 00 0 918 0 995 0 910 0 979 0 5 kHz 2 000 1 836 1 986 1 820 1 954 250 Hz 4 000 3 672 3 968 3 640 3 904 125 Hz 8 000 7 312 7 868
135. 1 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 351 For the elements of the DNP3 Slave Link Layer diagnostic counter CS0 9 to CS0 17 and CS2 9 to CS2 17 the counter values are available with the structured display in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro as below Channel Status 1 Channel 1 Channel 2 DNP3 Slave Messages Sent 0 Messages Received This Node p Messages Observed n Messages Received o Undelivered Messages o Link Layer Error Count 0 Messages Retied n LinkLayerEmorCode 0 Modem Lines RTS CTS DCD Llear 3 Channel Status Ei DNP3 Slave Messages Sent n __ Messages Received This Node 0___ Messages Observed Messages Received Undelivered Messages 0 Link Layer Error Count 0 Messages a Link Layer Error Code Modem Lines RATS CTS DCD Ce Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 352 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 For the elements of the DNP3 Slave Application Layer diagnostic counter CS0 55 to CS0 69 and CS2 55 to CS2 69 the counter values are available with the structured display in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software as below Channel States TT Channel 0 ti Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 2 Et DNP3 Slave Application Layer Application Layer Error Code Received Confirm FC Counter Application Layer Error Count I Received Read FC Counter
136. 1 Outputs 0 to 7 Group 1 Outputs 0 to 15 Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1200V ac for 1 s or 1697V dc for 1 s 75V dc working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Group 1 Outputs 0 15 Group 2 Outputs 16 31 internally connected to common Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1200V ac for 2 s or 1697V dc for 2 s 75V dc working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Output group to output group isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V ac for 1 s or 2596V dc for 1 s Not applicable Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1200V ac for 2 s or 1697V dc for 2 s 75V dc working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation 265V ac working voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Vendor 1 0 code 1 Product type code 7 Product code 119 101 103 100 102 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 184 Specifications Output Specifications Specification Shipping weight approx with carton 1762 0W8 228 g 0 50 Ibs 1762 0W16 285 g 0 63 Ibs 1762 0 6 220 g 0 485 Ibs 1762 1080W6 280 g 0 62 Ibs Voltage category AC DC normally AC DC normally AC DC Type C Relay AC DC normally open relay open relay open relay Operating voltage 5 265V ac 5 265V ac 5 265V ac 5 265V ac range 5 125V dc 5 125V dc 5 125V dc 5 125V dc Number of outputs 8
137. 16bits 5 Analog Input 32bits o Analog Input Short Floating fo Double Bit Input umm SmalBcD 0 Binary Output Counter 1661 Counter 32bits Analog Input 1 6bits Analog Input 32bits Analog Input Shart Floating Analog Output 16bits Analog Output 32bits Analog Output Short Floating Double Bit Input Small BCD Cancel Apply The MicroLogix 1400 controller currently supports the first of the two methods listed below for collision avoidance Detecting transmitted data line on RS485 communication Detecting out of band carrier DCD on RS232C communication When the MicroLogix 1400 is connected to RS485 network it monitors all data on the link If the MicroLogix 1400 is preparing to transmit a packet and finds the link busy it waits for an interval defined by the Backoff Time until itis no longer busy Backoff Time Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms Max Random Delay x1 ms Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 335 Time Synchronization The Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms in the Link Layer Channel Configuration file is a fixed delay and the Max Random Delay x1 ms in the Channel Configuration file is a maximum random delay for Channel 0 and Channel 2 You must specify those parameters to get the collision avoidance mechanism After the Backoff_Time the MicroLogix 1400 tries again either indefinitely or up to a c
138. 2 1 Includes offset gain non linearity and repeatability error terms 2 Only applicable to Series B 1 0 modules Valid Input Output Data Word Formats Ranges for 1762 IF20F2 Normal Operating Range Full Scale Range RAW Proportional Data Scaled for PID 0 10V dc 10 5V dc 32760 16380 0 0V dc 0 0 4 20 mA 21 0 mA 32760 16380 20 0 mA 31200 15600 4 0 mA 6240 3120 0 0 mA 0 0 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 196 Specifications Notes Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Appendix B MicroLogix 1400 Replacement Kits Lithium Battery 1747 BA Replacement Parts This chapter contains the following information a table of MicroLogix 1400 replacement parts procedure for replacing the lithium battery The table below provides a list of replacement parts and their catalog number Description Catalog Number Lithium Battery See page 197 When the controller s Battery Low indicator is lit check whether the battery wire connector is connected correctly or replace the replaceable battery with a new one immediately When the indicator turns on it means that either the battery is disconnected or that the battery requires replacement The controller is designed to operate for up to 2 weeks from the time that the indicator first turns on We recommend that you replace the battery immediately when the indicator turns on Installation Fo
139. 2 0W16 6 1 W x number of modules 6 1 WU W 1762 0X6l 2 8 W x number of modules 28Wx W 1762 1080W6 4 4 W x number of modules 44Wx W Add Sub Totals to determine Heat Dissipation W 1 Only applicable to Series 1 0 modules Glossary The following terms are used throughout this manual Refer to the Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary publication AG 7 1 for a complete guide to Allen Bradley technical terms address A character string that uniquely identifies a memory location For example I 1 0 is the memory address for the data located in the Input file location word1 bit 0 AIC Advanced Interface Converter A device that provides a communication link between various networked devices Catalog Number 1761 application 1 A machine or process monitored and controlled by a controller 2 The use of computer or processor based routines for specific purposes baud rate The speed of communication between devices All devices must communicate at the same baud rate on a network bit The smallest storage location in memory that contains either a 1 ON or a 0 OFF block diagrams A schematic drawing Boolean operators Logical operators such as AND OR NAND NOR NOT and Exclusive OR that can be used singularly or in combination to form logic statements or circuits Can have an output response of T or F branch A parallel logic path within a rung of a ladder program communication s
140. 2 BO Index 2 BO Close Index 1 3 BO Index 3 BO Trip Index 1 4 BO Index 4 BO Close Index 2 5 BO Index 5 BO Trip Index 2 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 292 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Table 1 Binary Output Activation model or Complementary two output Database Index Complementary latch model model 4094 BO Index 4094 BO Close Index 2047 4095 BO Index 4095 BO Trip Index 2047 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 These control codes and point models ate implemented in the MicroLogix 1400 controller 0x00 NUL NUL Clear field Off 0x20 NUL NUL Clear field On 0x01 Pulse On NUL Clear field Off Activation Model 0x21 Pulse On NUL Clear field On Activation Model 0x03 Latch On NUL Clear field Off Complementary latch model 0x23 Latch On NUL Clear field On Complementary latch model 0x04 Latch Off NUL Clear field Off Complementary latch model 0x24 Latch Off NUL Clear field On Complementary latch model 0x41 Pulse On Close Clear field Off Complementary two output mode 0x61 Pulse On Close Clear field On Complementary two output mode 0x81 Pulse On Trip Clear field Off Complementary two output mode 0 1 Pulse On Trip Clear field On Complementary two output mode When the MicroLogix 1400 is in Non Executing mode the controller will not accept a Binary Command The MicroLogix 1400 returns a Control Status Cod
141. 2 ONP3 Slave Data Link Laver Channel Response cheno Application Laver EnableLtnsolicited On Stet Up EnableLtnsolicited Fer Clase Enable Unsolicited Fer Class2 V Frahlel tnsolinited Classa T Send initial Unsolicted On Start Up T Enable Confsmation Enable Time Synchroneetion On Stat Up Only Response See 2040 Spnchrengation Interval x mins U Confirmation Tinzoul 7 ms fi 0000 Number of o Number af Class Evonas 1000 Hold Time after Claset Event 3 Number of Class2 vents 1000 Hold Time after Clas 2 Events x1 s of Closs3 venls 000 Hold Time after Class3 Events T jf Select T meout 1 s io DNP3 Date File SDNPS File Numer Binay input f0 Bnaylnpul 0 Tinay 0 Dinary Oupa 0D 0 Counter 0 Counter 3znes o Counter o Analoginput iSbts 14 Frozen Countes 1868 0 Analog Input 325 fr Frozen Counter S2bits p Analog InputShort Floating O Analog ines 165 36 Analg 160 D Analog Input 22618 D Analog Output 325 0 Anaiog Input Shout Floating 0 Analog Output Short Flestia fo baubis Gitnpu T Double Bitirout 0 Smataco SmalBCD 0 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 327 4 files will be automaticall
142. 29 response 17 28 index Event With relative 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp time 10 0 Binary Output Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 10 2 Binary Output Output 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop status with flags 12 1 Binary Command 3 select 17 28 index 129 response echo of request Control relay output 4 operate block CROB 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 20 0 Counter Any Variation 1 read 06 no range or all 7 freeze 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 366 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Description Function Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num Codes dec hex Codes dec hex 20 1 Counter 32 bit with 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 7 freeze 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 2 Counter 16 bit with 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 7 freeze 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 5 Counter 32 bit 1 read 06
143. 35 x 7 5 or 35x 15 mm EN 50 022 35 x 15 Before mounting the module on a DIN rail close the DIN rail latch Press the DIN rail mounting area of the module against the DIN rail The latch momentarily opens and locks into place Use DIN rail end anchors Allen Bradley part number 1492 5 or 1492 EAH35 for vibration or shock environments The following illustration shows the location of the end anchors Installing Your Controller 37 End anchor 44974 1762 expansion 1 0 must be mounted horizontally as illustrated TIP For environments with greater vibration and shock concerns use the panel mounting method described below instead of DIN rail mounting Panel Mounting Use the dimensional template shown below to mount the module The preferred mounting method is to use two M4 or 8 panhead screws per module Mounting screws are required on every module For more than 2 modules number of modules 1 x 40 mm 1 59 in 142 4 004 dy 100 06 90 MicroLogix 3 939 3 54 1400 SFL IS Ue D js D NOTE All dimensions are in mm A 1204 inches Hole spacing tolerance 165 mm 6 497 in 149 44568 0 4 mm 0 016 in Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 38 Installing Your Controller Connecting Expansion 1 0 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 The expansion I O module is
144. 45 cm 17 7 in 2 m 6 5 ft 2 Series C or later cables are required Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 t 761 CBL AMOO Connections from MicroLogix 1000 1200 or 1500 ch 0 to port 2 on another AIC 1761 CBL HM02U to AIC External Power Supply Required port2 port2 yes ion switch should be set to cable 44601 Power Selection Switch Setting cable external Communication Connections Cable 1747 CP3 1761 CBL Acoo 91 1761 CBL ACOO n 1747 CP3 I Length Connections from to AIC External Power Power Supply Selection Required Switch Setting 3 m 9 8 ft SLC 5 03 or SLC 5 04 processor channel 0 port 1 yes external 45 cm 17 7 in PC COM port port 1 yes external PanelView 550 through NULL modem port 1 yes external adapter DTAM Plus DTAM Micro port 1 yes external Port 1 on another AIC port 1 yes external MicroLogix 1400 ch 2 port2 yes external External power supply required unless the AIC is powered by the device connected to port 2 then the selection switch sho Cable straight 9 25 pin ld be set to cable
145. 55 15 Protected 11 If you have finished monitoring the bit file B3 press the ESC key to return to the Bit Integer File Select screen as shown in step 2 Monitoring Integer Files The LCD allows you to view and change the data value of an integer file You can access to this functionality via the Monitoring screen of the LCD To monitor an integer file on the LCD you have to specify its file number in the Target User Defined File Number TUF element of the LCD Function File and download your application program to the controller The TUF element can only be changed by a program download The value stored in the TUF element identifies the integer file with which the LCD will interface Valid integer files are N7 and N10 through N255 When the LCD reads a valid integer file number it can access up to 256 bits 0 255 on the LCD screen The protection bit LCD edit disable in the data Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 118 Using the LCD Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 file properties of the target integer file are used to define the read only or read write privileges for its file Valid file type include Bit Integer Double integer or Float as specified in the TUF element IMPORTANT Use your programming software to ensure that the integer file you specify in the TUF element as well as the appropriate number of elements exists in the MicroLogix 1400 user program The example
146. 6 y a a OUT 11 CR OUT 27 CR 1 OUT 12 V ourz V P OUT 13 ER OUT 29 OUT 14 7 V 1 OUT y 1 OUT 15 OUT 31 4 DC DC oc Y zn 1 pem i om 2 COM 1 COM 2 44915 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Wiring Your Controller 61 1762 OW8 Wiring Diagram UTR QUTO ori L2 DC1 COM H owe l 1 OUT3 1 VAC2 VAC VDC2 L2 062 COM OUTS OUT 6 N A OUT 7 ee ee 44576 N 4 Pd N rd 2 N OUT 4 VAC VDC 44577 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 62 Wiring Your Controller Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 1762 0 61 Wiring Diagram L1 0 OR DC bad OUTO N C 9 OUT1 N C e OUT1 N O L1 OR DC GAY our OUT2 0 OUT3 N C L2 OR DC L2 OR DC L2 OR DC OUTS N C OUTS 0 L2 OR DC 44578 1762 1080W6 Wiring Diagram DC Sinking DC Sourcing 1 N2 INS DC DC Sinking COMo 06 Sourcing DC Sourcing ne iji Hane ING INT DC Sinking DC Sourcing COM 1 L1 or DC 71 Connected Internally v I L1 or DC OX ouro
147. 60 Hz filter selected 0 5 C F for Pt 385 0 15 Q for 150 range 0 4 C F for Pt 3916 30 5 Q for 500 Q range 0 2 C F for Ni 1 0 Q for 1 000 Q range 0 3 C F for NiFe 1 5 Q for 3 000 Q range 0 6 C F for Cu Typical accuracy Autocalibration enabled at 0 55 32 131 FJ 0 9 C F for Pt 385 0 25 Q for 150 range 0 8 C F for Pt 3916 30 8 Q for 500 Q range 0 4 C F for Ni 1 5 Q for 1 000 Q range 0 5 C F for NiFe 25 Q for 3 000 Q range 1 1 C F for Cu Accuracy drift at 0 55 32 131 F 0 026 C C 0 026 F F for Pt 385 0 023 C C 0 023 F F for Pt 3916 0 012 C C 0 012 F F for Ni 0 015 C C 0 015 F F for NiFe 0 032 C C 0 032 F F for Cu 30 007 Q C 0 012 Q F for 150 Q range 0 023 Q C 0 041 Q F for 500 range 0 043 Q C 0 077 Q F for 1 000 Q range 0 07 2Q C 0 130 Q F for 3 000 Q range Excitation current source Open circuit detection time Input channel configuration 0 5 mA and 1 0 mA selectable per channel 6 1212 ms Via configuration software screen or the user program by writing a unique bit pattern into the module s configuration file Refer to your controller s user manual to determine if user program configuration is supported Calibration The module performs autocalibration on channel enable and on a configuration change between cha
148. 66 UMO001F EN P March 2011 310 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Data Set Prototypes Configuration Parameters These parameters are used to construct Data Set Prototypes object DNP3 Data Set Prototype 0 E umber of Prototype Elements 0 Prototype Elemen Index Descriptor Code DataType Code fN ax Data Length bytes Ancillary Value Ancillary Value NONE NONE 0 le it en cn amp cOoooooococ cOoooooococococ Cancel Help Number of Prototypes Elements 0 10 This must be the same the number of the Prototype elements that are configured Prototype Element Configuration Each Prototypes element is configured in this configuration Double click an element to edit it Prototype Element Configuration x Index fi Descriptor Code NONE v Data Type Code Data Length bytes Ancillary Value jf 7 Cancel Descriptor Code UUID for element 1 NSPC NAME DAEL for element 2 higher Data Type Code NONE for element 1 NONE VSTR UINT INT FLT OSTR BSTR TIME for element 2 or higher Max Data Length bytes 0 for element 1 0 255 for element 2 or higher Ancillary Value Binary Array in hexadecimal for element 1 ASCII strings for element 2 or higher Maximum 32 bytes Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 311
149. 7 280 7 804 63 Hz 16 000 14 592 15 668 14 560 15 604 31 Hz 1 This is the default setting Standard DC Input Filter Settings Inputs 4 and higher Nominal Filter Setting ms ON Delay ms OFF Delay ms Maximum Frequency Hz Minimum Maximum Minimum Maximum ae Duty velo 0 500 0 107 0 439 0 024 0 499 1 0 kHz 1 000 0 597 0 964 0 470 0 978 0 5 kHz 2 000 1 437 1 864 1 415 1 990 250 Hz 4 000 3 397 3 964 3 095 3 790 125 Hz 8 000 6 757 7 564 6 735 7 690 63 Hz 16 000 14 597 15 964 13 455 14 890 31 Hz 1 This is the default setting Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 178 Specifications Analog Input Filter Settings Analog Input Filter Settings Filter Bandwidth 3dB Freq Hz Sampling Frequency 250 Hz 250 Hz 1 kHz 60 Hz 60 Hz 1 kHz 50 Hz 50 Hz 1 kHz 10 Hz 10 Hz 1 kHz Relay Contact Ratings Maximum Volts Amperes Volt Amperes Make Break Continuous Make Break 240V AC 15 0 1 5 5 0 2 3 0 3600 VA 360 VA 120V AC 30 0 3 0A 5 0A7 3 0 A 3600 VA 360 VA 125V AC 0 22 AB 1 0A 28 VA 1 5 0 A for UL 508 3 0A for UL 1604 Class 1 Division 2 Hazardous Locations Groups A B C D e 3 3 0 A above 40 C 104 F For DC voltage applications the make break ampere rating for relay contacts can be determined by dividing 28 VA by the applied DC voltage For example 28 VA 48V DC 0 58A Fo
150. 766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 268 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 In RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software when this parameter is configured properly you can see a DNP3 Auth User Info Config File tree in Channel Configuration iol x Eg Project H Help 3 Controller 1 Controller Properties Processor Status TS Function Files 10 Configuration m his Channel Configuration bis Channel Status E DNP3 Auth User Info Contig File Eg Program Files 50 SYS1 Lap2 DNP3 Authentication User Info Config File User Number Dec Update Key Hex EE med 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000000000000 L4 Help The following table shows the structure of the DNP3 Secure Authentication User Info Configuration File An Update Key is made up of 16 bytes and must be entered in as 32 hexadecimal digits Word Offset Name Default Value By Default Value By Valid Range DEC Description Controller DEC RSLogix500 DEC 0 User Number 0 1 0 to 65535 For User 1 1 Reserved 0 0 0 For User 1 2 Update Key 0 0 0 0 to 65535 3 Update
151. 8 2 2 2 BSS i Se ee eco Se oo 0mnmuouux ugEs e 28 2 2 2 cuu eG a 8 8 8 8 8 8 amp 8 amp oM ee 8 2828 GOG E EX gt 8 a8 8 su 2 8 2 er So 85 a 8 8 2 oo ao 8 ew e o do o o z 5 Dae Y B10 zl Properties Usage Help As an example a Binary Input Config File shown below has 10 elements B30 0 0 and B30 0 1 can be configured for Class Level 0 1 2 or 3 for DNP3 Index 0 to 15 of the Binary Input Object File B30 1 0 and B30 1 1 can be configured for Class Level for DNP3 Index 16 to 31 of the Binary Input Object File Default Class Level is 0 Any other bits are reserved Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 289 Class Level of Index 0 to 15 is 1 B30 0 0 and B30 0 1 Class Level of Index 16 to 31 is 2 B30 1 0 and B30 1 1 Class Level of Index 32 to 47 is 3 B30 2 0 and B30 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File B30 bin Binary Input Config File set Sees one 0 000000000000 0 0 0 1 B gt 2
152. 922v1 Counter Event 32 bit with flag default 922v2 Counter Event 16 bit with flag default Related Object File Number Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 295 16 bit Counter Object File Number 32 bit Counter Object File Number Related Configuration File Number 16 bit Counter Config File Number 32 bit Counter Config File Number To generate a Counter Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure Counter Object File Numbers in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file When only one Counter Object File is configured the Index number starts from 0 for the configured object One word is used for one Index of a 16 bit Counter Object and one double word is used for one Index of a 32 bit Counter Object If both the 16 bit Counter Object File Number and 32 bit Counter Object File Number were configured in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file the starting index number of 16 bit Counter Object is 0 and the starting index number of 32 bit Counter Object starts from the ending index number of the 16 bit Counter Object For example if 10 elements of a 16 bit Counter Object were configured and 10 elements of a 32 bit Counter Object were configured the index number will be as below 16 bit Counter Object From 0 to 9 32 bit Counter Object From 10 to 19 Let s suppose you configured both 16 bit and 32 bit Counter Object Files as below Data File N12 has 1
153. Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Bulletin 1766 Controllers and 1762 Expansion 1 0 User Manual Rockwell Automation Important User Information Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http literature rockwellautomation com describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect to use of infor
154. C 60664 1 Do not remove the protective debris shield until after the controller ATTENTION and all other equipment in the panel near the controller are mounted and wiring is complete Once wiring is complete remove protective debris shield Failure to remove shield before operating can cause overheating debris strip Electrostatic discharge can damage semiconductor devices inside the ATTENTION s controller Do not touch the connector pins or other sensitive areas TIP For environments with greater vibration and shock concerns use the panel mounting method described on page 35 rather than DIN rail mounting Pollution Degree 2 is an environment where normally only non conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected 2 Over Voltage Category II is the load level section of the electrical distribution system At this level transient voltages are controlled and do not exceed the impulse voltage capability of the product s insulation B Pollution Degree 2 and Over Voltage Category I are International Electrotechnical Commission IEC designations Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 34 Installing Your Controller Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 DIN Rail Mounting The maximum extension of the latch is 14 mm 0 55 in in the open position A flat blade screwdriver is required for removal of the control
155. C2 COM 2 OUT 2 7 Group 3 Isolated relay output VAC DC3 OUT 8 Group 4 Isolated relay output VAC DC4 OUT 9 Group 5 Isolated relay output VAC DC5 OUT 10 OUT 11 A E A If you connect or disconnect wiring while the field side power is on an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding The local programming terminal port is intended for temporary use only and must not be connected or disconnected unless the area is free of ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 50 Wiring Your Controller Sinking and Sourcing Any of the MicroLogix 1400 DC embedded input groups can be configured as sinking or sourcing depending on how DC COM is wired the group Wiring Diagrams Type Definition Sinking Input The input energizes when high level voltage is applied to the input terminal active high Connect the power supply VDC to the input group s COM terminal Sourcing Input The input energizes when low level voltage is applied to the input terminal active low Connect the power supply VDC to the input group s COM terminal The 24V DC sensor power source must not be used to power output ATTENTION DE circuits It should only be used to power input devices for example sensors switches See Master Contro
156. Chassis 2760 SFC3 to other A B PLCs and devices Three configurable channels are available to interface with Bar Code Vision RF 2760 0001 Dataliner and PLC systems 1784 PKTX PC DH 485 IM PCI Computer Provides DH 485 using RSLinx 1784 6 5 22 PKTXD Bus 1784 PCMK PCMCIA IM PCMCIA slot Provides DH 485 using RSLinx 1784 UM519 in computer 2711 K5A2 PanelView 550 and Panel Mount Provides electronic operator interface for SLC 500 processors 2711 UM014 B5A2 K5A5 PanelView 900 B5A5 K5A1 Operator Terminals B5A1 K9A2 T9A2 K9A5 T9A5 K9A1 and T9A1 Important DH 485 Network Planning Considerations Carefully plan your network configuration before installing any hardware Some of the factors that can affect system performance are envitonment number of devices on the network connection and grounding quality in installation amount of communication traffic on the network type of process being controlled amount of electrical noise temperature and humidity in the network Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 238 Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 network configuration The major hardware and software issues you need to resolve before installing a network are discussed in the following sections Hardware Considerations You need to decide the length of the communication cable where you route it
157. Circuits DC Power Supply Use IEC 950 EN 60950 MCR 24V DC Lo Hi e 1 0 Line Terminals Connect to terminals of Power Circuits Supply 1766 L32AWA 1766 L32AWAA Line Terminals Connect to 24V DC terminals of 1766 L32BWA 1766 L32BWAA Power Supply 1766 L32BXB 1766 L32BXBA 44564 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 28 Installing Your Controller Disconnect Schematic Using ANSI CSA Symbols 230V AC gt Output Isolation Transformer Operation of either of these contacts will remove power from the external 1 0 circuits stopping machine motion Circuits Master Control Relay MCR Cat No 700 PK400A1 Emergency Stop Suppressor Push Button Stop Start Cat No 700 N24 ae Limit Switch als O O Suppr MCR MCR 115 pO AC 1 0 Circuits DC Power Supply Use NEC Class 2 for UL Listing MCR Lo Hi zm i 24 V DC 0 Line Terminals Connect to terminals of Power Supply 1766 L32AWA 1766 L32AWAA 1766 L32BWA 1766 L32BWAA Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Line Terminals Connect to 24V DC terminals of Power Supply 1766 L32BXB 1766 L32BXBA 44565 Installing Your Controller 29 Installing a Memory 1 Remove the memory module port cover Module 44534 2 Align the con
158. Configuration Error Code 4 CS0 4 52 4 bit 15 Reserved Always 0 bit 14 Modem Lost Bit bits 5 13 Reserved Always 0 bit 4 Communications Active Bit bit 3 Selection Status Bit bit 2 Outgoing Message Command Pending bit 1 Incoming Message Reply Pending bit 0 Incoming Command Pending 5 CS0 5 52 5 bits 8 15 Baud Rate that the selected link layer driver is operating at out communication channel bits 0 7 Node Address 6 CS0 6 CS2 6 Diagnostic Counters Category Identifier 7 CS0 7 52 7 Length 8 CS0 8 CS2 8 Format Code 9 CS0 9 CS2 9 bits 4 15 Reserved modem control line states Always 0 bit 3 Data Carrier Detect bit 2 Reserved modem control line state Always 0 bit 1 Request To Send bit 0 Clear To Send 10 CS0 10 CS2 10 Total Packets Sent 11 CS0 11 CS2 11 Total Packets Received for this node 12 CS0 12 CS2 12 Total Packets Observed Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Communication Status File Words Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 345 Words Offset File Element File Element Description Description for Description for Channel 0 Channel 2 13 50 13 52 13 Undelivered Message Packets 14 CS0 14 CS2 14 Message Packets Retried 15 CS0 15 CS2 15 NAK Packets Received 16 50 16 52 16 Link Layer Error Count 17 50 17 52 17 Link Layer Error Codes 0 ERR_NO_ERROR 1 ERR_NO_RX_BUFFER 2 ERR_TOO_SHORT 3 ERR_TOO_
159. Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface DF1 Half Duplex Protocol Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 The MicroLogix controller supports the DF1 Full Duplex protocol via RS 232 connection to external devices such as computets or other controllers that support DF1 Full Duplex DF1 is an open protocol Refer to DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual publication 1770 6 5 16 for information DF1 Full Duplex protocol also referred to as DF1 point to point protocol is useful where RS 232 point to point communication is required DF1 protocol controls message flow detects and signals errors and retries if errors are detected Example DF1 Full Duplex Connections For information about required network connecting equipment see Chapter 4 Communication Connections Personal Computer Personal Computer p cable 1761 CBL PM02 Null modem adapter Modem 1761 CBL PM02 44608 Half Duplex protocol is a multi drop single master multiple slave network DF1 Half Duplex protocol supports data transparency American National Standards Institute ANSI X3 28 1976 specification subcategory D1 In contrast to DF1 Full Duplex communication takes place in one direction at a time You can use the RS 232 485 port on the MicroLogix as both a Half Duplex programming port and a Half Duplex pee
160. D RESPONSE Yes MicroLogix 1400 sends Response 131 0x83 FC AUTHENTICATE RESP No 132 0x84 to No Reserved 255 OxFF Function Codes for MicroLogix 1400 Series B Controllers Message Function Name MicroLogix Description Type Code 1400 Support Confirmation 0 0x00 FC_CONFIRM Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses sends Request 1 0x01 FC_READ Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 2 0x02 FC WRITE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 3 0x03 FC SELECT Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 4 0x04 FC OPERATE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Function Codes for MicroLogix 1400 Series Controllers Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 363 Message Function Name MicroLogix Description Type Code 1400 Support Request 5 0x05 FC DIRECT OPERATE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 6 0x06 FC DIRECT OPERATE NR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 7 0x07 FC IMMED FREEZE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 8 0x08 FC IMMED FREEZE NR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 9 0 09 FC_FREEZE_CLEAR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 10 0x0A FC FREEZE CLEAR NR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 11 OxOB FC FREEZE AT TIME No Request 12 0x0C FC FREEZE TIME NR No Request 13 0x0D FC COLD RESTART Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses MicroLogix 1400 should not be in the executing mode and
161. Default value is 10 Hold Time after Class2 Events x1 s This parameter is only for Unsolicited Response The MicroLogix 1400 holds the events during Hold Time after Class2 Events x1 s before initiating an Unsolicited Response The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 5 The value of 0 indicates that responses are not delayed due to this parameter Note that parameters Number of Class2 Events and Hold Time after Class2 Events x1 s are used together so that if either one of the criteria are met an Unsolicited Response is transmitted Number of Class3 Events If the MicroLogix 1400 15 configured not to initiate Unsolicited Response this parameter used to limit the maximum number of events which is generated and logged into the event buffer for Class 3 events In this case value 0 will disable to generate the event If the MicroLogix 1400 is configured to generate Unsolicited Response and the number of queued Class 3 events is reached to this value Unsolicited Response is initiated The valid range is 0 to 6016 Default value is 10 Hold Time after Class3 Events x1 s This parameter is only for Unsolicited Response The MicroLogix 1400 holds the events during Hold Time after Class3 Events x1 s before initiating an Unsolicited Response The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 5 The value of 0 indicates that responses are not delayed due to this parameter Note that parameters Number of Class3 Events a
162. Drain Non jacketed Terminal 2 Shield Blue Blue Terminal 3 Common White Orange White with Orange Stripe Terminal 4 Data B Orange with White Stripe Terminal 5 Data A Connections using Belden 9842 Cable For this Wire Pair To this Terminal Shield Drain Non jacketed Terminal 2 Shield Blue White White with Blue Stripe Cut back no connection Blue with White Stripe Terminal 3 Common White Orange White with Orange Stripe Terminal 4 Data B Orange with White Stripe Terminal 5 Data A 0 To prevent confusion when installing the communication cable cut back t he white with blue stripe wire immediately after the insulation jacket is removed This wire is not used by DH 485 Grounding and Terminating the DH 485 Network Only one connector at the end of the link must have Terminals 1 and 2 jumpered together This provides an earth ground connection for the shield of the communication cable Both ends of the network must have Terminals 5 and 6 jumpered together as shown below This connects the termination impedance of 120 ohm that is built into each AIC or the 1763 NC01 cable as required the DH 485 specification Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 88 Communication Connections Connecting the AIC Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 End of Line Termination Jumper Jumper Em Belden 3106A or 9842 Cable 1219 m 4000ft Maximum
163. Electrostatic discharge can damage semiconductor devices inside the ATTENTION 7 controller Do not touch the connector pins other sensitive areas 1 Pollution Degree 2 is an environment where normally only non conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally temporary conductivity caused by condensation shall be expected Overvoltage Category II is the load level section of the electrical distribution system At this level transient voltages are controlled and do not exceed the impulse voltage capability of the products insulation Safety Considerations Installing Your Controller 21 ATTENTION Vertical mounting of the controller is not supported due to heat build up considerations ATTENTION Be careful of metal chips when drilling mounting holes for your controller or other equipment within the enclosure or panel Drilled fragments that fall into the controller or modules could cause damage Do not drill holes above a mounted controller if the protective debris shields are removed or the processor is installed display and have adverse effects on the controller WARNING Do not place the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controller in direct sunlight Prolonged exposure to direct sunlight could degrade the LCD The controller is not designed for outdoor use Safety considerations an important element of proper system installation Actively thinking about the safety of yourself and ot
164. Enter the hardware address of the module below or cancel to re enter the IP address CER 7 Enter the hardware address of the controller that is being upgraded as noted in step 2 of Prepare the Controller for Firmware Upgrade on page 214 and click the OK button For the IP address to be configured using the ControlFLASH server the BOOTP settings should be enabled in the Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 218 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System controller see step 2 of Prepare the Controller for Firmware Upgrade on page 214 AB SNMP BOOTP Server Could not find the host on the network This machine will now attempt to act s aBOOTP server for this IP address Enter the hardware address of the module below or cancel to re enter the IP address 00008 334 Cancel 8 The AB_SNMP Server Running dialog box may take several seconds or minutes to appear AB SNMP BOOTP Server Running fx Waiting for BOOTP request from hardware address 00008 94 9 Providing IP address 10 116 38 203 Cancel You may need to wait several seconds before you are returned to the AB SNMP DLL Enter IP Address dialog box Within several seconds the Device Identification box displays the processor s current revision information Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System 219 9
165. Ethemet 7 Default Domain Name Primary Name Server 0 0 0 0 Number of Pages Secondary Server 0 0 0 0 Protocol Control BOOTP Enable DHCP Enable Msg Connection Timeout x 5000 SNMP Server Enable 7 SMTP Client Enable Msg Reply Timeout 19 3000 v HTTP Server Enable DNP3 over IP Enable Inactivity Timeout Min 30 Auto Negotiate Disable Duplicate IP Address Detection Port Setting 00 Mbps Full Duplex Half Duplex Contact Location Hardware Address o0 00 O0 00 00 00 fo IP Address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Gateway Address 0 0 0 0 User Provided Web Pages Starting Data File Number 0 Modbus TCP Enable Disable EtherNet IP Incoming Connections mt p Cancel Apply Help This section covers DNP3 Slave Application Layer Function Codes and DNP3 Slave Application pp y layer Internal Indications For details of Packet Formats for the request and response refer to the DNP3 Protocol specifications Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 273 Function Codes FC_CONFIRM FC Byte 0x00 00 Confirm A DNP3 master sends a message with this function code to confirm receipt of a response fragment In a general environment the MicroLogix 1400 receives a response with this function c
166. F1 default If you change to the user defined configuration from the default configuration mode by selecting Disable and pressing the OK key the DCOMM Mode Change Notification will be displayed 000006 RU Comms config 15 restored 6 Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Set Menu screen as shown in step 3 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 76 Communication Connections Connecting to the RS 232 Port There are two ways to connect the MicroLogix 1400 programmable controller to your personal computer using the DF1 protocol using a point to point connection or using a modem Descriptions of these methods follow ATTENTION All devices connected to the RS 232 485 communication port must be referenced to controller ground or be floating not referenced to a potential other than ground Failure to follow this procedure may result in property damage or personal injury e For 1766 L32BWA controllers the COM of the sensor supply is also connected to chassis ground internally The 24V DC sensor power source should not be used to power output circuits It should only be used to power input devices e For 1766 L32BXB controllers the VDC NEUT or common terminal of the power supply is also connected to chassis ground internally Available Communication Cables Communication Cables Length 1761 CBL AMOO Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications 45 cm 17 7 in
167. F4 only X408 010 0 0000 1001 Invalid format select Channel 0 X40A 010 0 0000 1010 Invalid format select Channel 1 X40B 010 0 0000 1011 Invalid format select Channel 2 X40C 010 0 0000 1400 Invalid format select Channel 3 represents Don t Care Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 212 Troubleshooting Your System Calling Rockwell If you need to contact Rockwell Automation or local distributor for E assistance it is helpful to obtain the following ptior to calling Automation for Assistance controller type series letter revision letter and firmware FRN number of the controller controller indicator status controller error codes Refer to MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual Publication 1766 RM001 for error code information Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Preparing for Firmware Upgrade Appendix D Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System The operating system OS can be upgraded through the Ethernet port of the controller In order to download a new operating system you must have the following ControlFLASH Upgrade Kit containing the new OS Go to http www ab com programmablecontrol plc micrologix downloads html to download the upgrade kit a Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows 2000 Windows NT Windows XP or Windows Vista based computer to run the download software The C
168. F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r r r Element 2 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r r r Element 3 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r r Element 4 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r r r r Element 5 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r r r r r r reserved F7 F0 Object Flags FLAG7 FLAG6 FLAG5 LOCAL_FORCED REMOTE_FORCED COMM_LOST RESTART ONLINE For Small BCD type data you can configure Class information in the Configuration file The lower 2 bits in each element of the Configuration files are the configuration of Class information to the relevant objects PO bit in the first element is for excluding Small BCD Data from Class 0 poll responses Other bits are reserved Related Configuration File Numbers Small BCD Config File Number Bit Offset 15 14 113 112 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Element 0 r r r r PO r C1 CO Element 1 r r r r r r r r C1 CO Element 2 r r r r r r r C1 CO Element 3 r r r r r r r r C1 CO Element 4 r r r r r r r r r C1 CO Element 5 r r r r r r r r C1 CO C1 CO reserved C1 CO Class level 0 to 3 For Small BCD Element 0 for data index 0 PO 0 for including Small BCD Data to Class 0 poll response Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 287 DNP3 Binary Input Object The suppo
169. Key 1 0 0 0 to 65535 4 Update Key 2 0 0 0 to 65535 5 Update Key 3 0 0 0 to 65535 6 Update Key 4 0 0 0 to 65535 7 Update Key 5 0 0 0 to 65535 8 Update Key 6 0 0 0 to 65535 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 269 Word Offset Name Default Value By Default Value By Valid Range DEC Description Controller DEC RSLogix500 DEC 9 Update Key 7 0 0 0 to 65535 10 User Number 0 0 0 to 65535 For User 2 11 Reserved 0 0 0 For User 1 12 Update Key 0 0 0 0 to 65535 13 Update Key 1 0 0 0 to 65535 14 Update Key 2 0 0 0 to 65535 15 Update Key 3 0 0 0 to 65535 16 Update Key 4 0 0 0 to 65535 17 Update Key 5 0 0 0 to 65535 18 Update Key 6 0 0 0 to 65535 19 Update Key 7 0 0 0 to 65535 90 User Number 0 0 0 to 65535 For User 10 91 Reserved 0 0 0 For User 10 92 Update Key 0 0 0 0 to 65535 93 Update Key 1 0 0 0 to 65535 94 Update Key 2 0 0 0 to 65535 95 Update Key 3 0 0 0 to 65535 96 Update Key 4 0 0 0 to 65535 97 Update Key 5 0 0 0 to 65535 98 Update Key 6 0 0 0 to 65535 99 Update Key 7 0 0 0 to 65535 Diagnostic File Number in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers The diagnostic file number is used to store the diagnostics for the troubleshooting of DNP3 Secure Aut
170. LCD keypad BOO000 REMOTE I O Status bHonitoring Made Switch 2 Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The File Number prompt is displayed B EI File Num 983 Data Press OK to edi 3 If number 3 is selected as shown in step 2 press the OK key If not selected press the Up or Down key to select it and then press the OK key 4 The current data value ON of the B3 0 0 bit is displayed as shown below Note that 0 0 is flashing which means the cursor is at the target bit position B 8 6 UnProtected 5 We will change the data value of the B3 0 0 bit to OFF 0 First press OK to select the displayed address and move the cursor to the data value position Then ON will flash which means the cursor is at the data value position Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 116 Using the LCD Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 6 Press the Down key Then the data value will be represented as OFF Note that OFF is still flashing which means the cursor 15 still at the data value position 7 Press OK to apply the changes Then the new value OFF 0 is applied Note that the target bit 0 0 in this example is flashing The cursor is moved automatically to the target bit position You can identify this change of data value is reflected to your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software
171. LE a E REO 133 Configuring Advanced Settings 134 nan cine Key In Mode alia slate le AD 135 Keyl 135 Changing Key In 135 Using Communications Toggle Functionality 137 Ethernet Network Configuration 137 Viewing Ethernet T Ru were 137 Configuring the IP Address 4 Ve Dee e te thes 139 Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 6 Table of Contents Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules Online Editing Specifications Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Configuring the Ethernet Port 143 Configuring Ethernet Protocol 146 Usine E EN A e E 148 Trim Pot Operations o dore ode os eed eos 148 Changing Data Value of a Trim 149 Trim Pot Configuration in LCD Function 150 Error Conditions 25v os aS EEEE AE ia 151 Viewing System Informablotio i5 est v chew Ra EFE X SR TES 151 Viewing Fault Codes quor e Ee eb ese x ans 152 Saving Loading Communication EEPROM 154 Saving communication EEPROM 154 Loading communication 156 ELED Sep DM EAR EAE EH TRIER 156 Configuring contrast value 157 Configuring the aav Fa Tr tmp a
172. LOCAL FORCED Always 0 Not used 5 reserved Always 0 Not used 6 reserved Always 0 Not used 7 reserved Always 0 Not used Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 321 Object Flags for Analog Output for Series A controllers Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode 1 RESTART Always 0 Not used 2 COMM LOST Always 0 Not used 3 REMOTE FORCED Always 0 Not used 4 LOCAL FORCED Always 0 Not used 5 reserved Always 0 Not used 6 reserved Always 0 Not used 7 reserved Always 0 Not used Object Flags for Analog Output for Series B controllers Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not exist May be 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file exists 1 RESTART 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 0 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file 2 COMM_LOST does not exist 3 REMOTE_FORCED May be 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file 4 LOCAL FORCED SNB 5 reserved 6 reserved 7 reserved DNP3 Device Attribute Object The Device Attribute object can be used to identify DNP3 Slave devices With
173. LONG 4 ERR_UART_ERROR 5 ERR_BAD_CRC 6 ERR CTS TIMEOUT 7 ERR CTS DROP MID PKT 8 ERR UNKNOWN CHAR 18 50 18 52 18 Reserved Always 0 19 CS0 19 52 19 Reserved Always 0 20 50 20 52 20 Reserved Always 0 21 50 21 52 21 Reserved Always 0 22 50 22 52 22 Reserved Always 0 23 50 23 52 23 Data Link Layer Active Node Table 24 CS0 24 CS2 24 Length 25 CS0 25 CS2 25 Format Code 26 50 26 52 26 Number of Nodes 27 50 27 52 27 Reserved Always 0 28 CS0 28 CS2 28 Reserved Always 0 29 CS0 29 CS2 29 Reserved Always 0 30 CS0 30 CS2 30 Reserved Always 0 31 CS0 31 CS2 31 Reserved Always 0 32 CS0 32 CS2 32 Reserved Always 0 33 CS0 33 CS2 33 Reserved Always 0 34 CS0 34 CS2 34 Reserved Always 0 35 CS0 35 52 35 Reserved Always 0 36 CS0 36 CS2 36 Reserved Always 0 37 CS0 37 CS2 37 Reserved Always 0 38 CS0 38 CS2 38 Reserved Always 0 39 CS0 39 CS2 39 Reserved Always 0 40 50 40 52 40 Reserved Always 0 41 50 41 52 41 Reserved Always 0 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 346 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Communication Status File Words Words Offset File Element File Element Description Description for Description for Channel 0 Channel 2 13 CS0 13 52 13 Undelivered Message Packets 14 50 14 52 14 Message Packets Retried 15 CS0 15 52 15 Packets Received 16 50 16 52 16 Link La
174. Logix 1400 Controller AIC AIC ig B amp PanelView BOB 8 I SLC 5 04 PanelView 550 DH 485 Network AIC AIC Alc Q R le zi le Dre T J B jm fem MicroLogix MicroLogix 1400 MicroLogix MicroLogix 1000 1500 DH 485 Network Belden shielded twisted pair cable Belden shielded twisted pair cable 1763 NC01 1761 CBL AP00 or 1761 CBL PM02 24V DC user supplied port 1 or port 2 lili 1747 CP3 to PC or 1761 CBL ACOO 1 08 9 RS 232 port 2 mini DIN 8 RS 232 port 3 RS 485 port 4 Series A or later cables are required Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Communication Connections 85 Typical 3 Node Network Channel 0 Connection PanelView 550 PanelView LM M EE MicroLogix 1400 RJ45 port 1761 CBL ASO9
175. N1 6 DEVICE TROUBLE This bit is set when the controller is in Fault mode IIN1 7 DEVICE RESTART This bit is set when the DNP3 driver is just configured in channel configuration IINZ0 NO FUNC CODE SUPPORT This bit is set when a request which has an unknown function code is received Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 278 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 DNP3 Objects and MicroLogix 1400 Data Files Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 IIN2 1 OBJECT_UNKNOWN This bit is set when a request which has an unknown object is received IIN2 2 PARAMETER ERROR This bit is set when a request with a qualifier range field that cannot be processed is received IN2 3 EVENT BUFFER OVERFLOW This bit is set when an event buffer overflow condition exists in the controller and at least one unconfirmed event is lost IIN2 4 ALREADY EXECUTING Not supported IIN2 5 CONFIG_CORRUPT This bit is set when a bad file type and bad file number are detected IN2 6 Reserved IN2 7 Reserved You can access the last transmitted IIN bits in the response through accessing the element of Communication Status file 50 58 CS2 58 For more details see Diagnostics All of the DNP3 Objects which are supported in the MicroLogix 1400 are summarized in Implementation Table on page 364 Data file types used in DNP3 Objects are not the same as that used in the MicroLogix control
176. No 213 Noise immunity NEMA standard ICS 2 230 Radiated and conducted emissions EN50081 2 Class A Electrical EMC The module has passed testing at the following levels ESD immunity A kV contact 8 kV air 4 kV indirect IEC1000 4 2 Radiated RF immunity 10 V m 80 1000 MHz 80 amplitude modulation 900 MHz keyed carrier IEC1000 4 3 EFT B immunity 2 kV 5 kHz IEC1000 4 4 Surge transient immunity 1 kV galvanic gun IEC1000 4 5 Conducted immunity 10V 0 15 80 MHz 2 9 IEC1000 4 6 1 Referto the module s Installation Instruction for exact operating temperature range 2 Conducted Immunity frequency range may be 150 kHz to 30 MHz if the Radiated Immunity frequency range is 30 1000 MHz 3 For grounded thermocouples the 10V level is reduced to 3V Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 General Specifications Specifications 189 Specification 1762 IF20F2 1762 IF4 1762 0F4 1762 IR4 1762 IT4 Shipping weight 240 g 0 53 Ibs 235 g 0 517 Ibs 260 g 0 57 Ibs 220 g 0 53 Ibs approx with carton Bus current draw 40 mA at 5V de 40 mA at 5V de 40 mA at 5V de 40 mA at 5V de 40 mA at 5V de max 105 mA at 24V 50 mA at 24V de 165 mA at 24V de 50 mA at 24V de 50 mA at 24V de Analog normal Voltage 0 10V dc Voltage Voltage 0 10Vde NA NA operating range Current 4 20 mA 10 10V dc Current 4 20 mA Current 4 20 mA Full scale analog Volta
177. No response message is returned when this request is issued from a DNP3 master FC_IMMED_FREEZE FC Byte 0x07 07 Immediate Freeze Upon receiving a request with this function the MicroLogix 1400 copies the current value of a counter point to a separate memory location associated with the same point The copied value remains constant until the next freeze operation to the same point FC_IMMED_FREEZE_NR FC Byte 0x08 08 Immediate Freeze No Resp See the comment for FC IMMED FREEZE No response message is returned when this request is issued from a DNP3 master FC FREEZE CLEAR FC Byte 0x09 09 Freeze and Clear Upon receiving a request with this function the MicroLogix 1400 copies the current value to the frozen value then clears the current value to 0 immediately FC FREEZE CLEAR FC Byte 0x04 10 Freeze and Clear No Resp See the comment for FC FREEZE CLEAR No response message is returned when this request is issued from a DNP3 master FC COLD RESTART FC Byte 0 00 13 Cold Restart This function code forces the MicroLogix 1400 to perform a complete restart upon powering up FC_WARM_RESTART FC Byte 0 0 14 Warm Restart This function code forces the MicroLogix 1400 to perform a partial reset This applies only to the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller FC_INITIALIZE_APPL FC Byte 0x10 16 Initialize Application This function code is used to initialize the user
178. OUT 4 2 OUT8 OUT9 OUTI0 ANA ovt a DCO DC1 VDC2 OUT3 OUTS 0077 063 064 065 11 ovo VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC JL JL 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 44526 Output Terminal Block Wire Types and Sizes Wire Type Wire Size Solid wire Cu 90 C 194 F 14 22 AWG Stranded wire Wiring torque 0 791Nm 7 Cu 90 C 194 F in Ib rated 16 22 AWG Output Terminal Grouping Wiring Your Controller 49 Outputs Output Terminal Controllers Output Group Description Voltage Terminal 1766 L32BWA Group 0 Isolated relay output VAC DCO OUT 0 MB Group 1 Isolated relay output VAC DC1 OUT 1 Group 2 Isolated relay output VAC DC2 OUT 2 Group 3 Isolated relay output VAC DC3 OUT 3 Group 4 Isolated relay output VAC DC4 OUT 4 OUT 5 Group 5 Isolated relay output VAC DC5 OUT 6 OUT 7 Group 6 Isolated relay output VAC DC6 OUT 8 11 1766 L32AWA Group 0 Isolated relay output VAC DCO OUT 0 1 Isolated relay output VAC DC1 OUT 1 Group 2 Isolated relay output VAC DC2 OUT 2 Group 3 Isolated relay output VAC DC3 OUT 3 Group 4 Isolated relay output VAC DC4 OUT 4 OUT 5 Group 5 Isolated relay output VAC DC5 OUT 6 OUT 7 Group 6 Isolated relay output VAC DC6 OUT 8 11 1766 L32BXB Group 0 Isolated relay output VAC DCO OUT 0 1 Isolated relay output VAC DC1 OUT 1 Group 2 FET output VD
179. Output Object Files are configured as below Data File N17 has 10 elements L18 has 10 elements and F19 has 10 elements accordingly A total of 30 Analog Output Object index are configured Index 0 of the Analog Output Object is N17 0 Index 10 is L18 0 Index 20 is F19 0 and Index 29 is F19 9 7 Data File N17 dec 16bits Analog Output Object File Radix Decimal Symbol Columns 10 E Properties Usage Help Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 305 4 Data File 118 dec 32615 Analog Output Object File E Properties Usage Data File F19 Short Floating Point Analog Output Object File mw 2 sm sj Def Properties Usage Analog Output Command Control analog output block When the controller is in Non Executing mode the MicroLogix 1400 will not accept an Analog Output Command The MicroLogix 1400 returns a Control Status Code 7 in the response To access the objects 41 AOB the controller mode should be in Executing mode Note that Executing mode includes Run Remote Run Test Continuous Scan and Test Single Scan modes Any other modes are Non Executing modes DNP3 BCD Object The supported object group and variations are as below Numeric Static Objects g101v1 Binary Coded Decimal Integer
180. P address for each processor or you must use DHCP instead of it Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 388 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Using the Rockwell BOOTP DHCP Utility The Rockwell BOOTP DHCP servet utility is a standalone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BOOTP software with a user friendly graphical interface It is located in the Utils directory on the RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro installation CD The newest version of the utility can be downloaded from http www ab com networks ethernet bootp html The device must have BOOTP enabled factory default or DHCP enabled to use the utility To configure your device using the BOOTP utility perform the following steps 1 Run the BOOTP DHCP server utility software It will ask you to configure your network settings before using the BOOTP DHCP server tool Enter your Ethernet settings for Subnet Mask and Gateway If you are not sure about it get a help from your system administrator Just leave Primary DNS Secondary DNS and Domain Name If corresponding information is allocated to the PC where BOOTP DHCP servet utility is installed enter the same information Network Settings xj Defaults Subnet 255 255 252 0 Gateway 10 121 28 1 Primary o 0 0 0 Secondary DNS 0 0 0 OK Cancel Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface 389
181. Press OK key to set the controller to the mode indicated by the arrow If you have finished changing mode switch position press the ESC key to return to the Main Menu screen as shown in step 1 Using a User Defined LCD The MicroLogix 1400 controller allows you to use user defined LCD screens instead of the default built in screens Screen To use a user defined screen you need to create a group of appropriate instructions using the LCD instruction in your application program For more information on how to create a user defined LCD screen refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 01 By using the User Display menu item you can change from the default built in screens to a user defined screen and back on the LCD Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Using the LCD 133 User Defined LCD Screen Follow these steps to display the user defined screen implemented in your application program 1 On the Main Menu screen select User Display by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key Acvanced Set 2 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad If no user defined screen is used in your application program the screen is displayed as shown below LH AS S SOS 000000 RU Note that th
182. Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 304 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 To generate Analog Output Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure the Analog Output Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file When only one of the Analog Output Object File is configured Index number starts from 0 for the configured object 1 word is used for 1 Index of 16 bit Analog Output Object 1 double word is used for 1 Index of 32 bit Analog Output Object and 1 short float is used for 1 Index of Short Floating Point Analog Output Object If the 16 bit Analog Output Object File Number 32 bit Analog Output Object File Number and Short Floating Point Analog Output Object File Number are configured in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file the starting index number of 16 bit Analog Output Object is 0 and the starting index number of 32 bit Analog Output Object starts from the last index number of 16 bit Analog Output Object For example if 10 elements of 16 bit Analog Output Object are configured 10 elements of 32 bit Analog Output Object and 10 elements of Short Floating Point Analog Output Object are configured the index numbers will be 16 bit Analog Output Object From 0 to 9 32 bit Analog Output Object From 10 to 19 Short Floating Point Analog Output Object From 20 to 29 As an example 16 bit 32 bit and Short Floating Point Analog
183. THENTICATE FILE 29 to authenticate permission before file operation The object g70v2 is used for File Authentication with two parameters Username from the Processor Name in the Controller Properties dialog in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Password from the Master Password in the Controller Properties dialog in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro In the example below Username is DNP3 A and Password is 12345 0 GS gi den Heip E 80 Controler General Compiler Passwords Controler Communications Controller Properties Processor Status Processor eoe Files Bul 1766 MicroLogix 1400 Series A x 10 Configuration E E Channel Configur Processor DNP A E Program Files Program Checksum 897 syso Prooam Files 3 svsi DataFies 92 02 5 Diy Data Files Mernor Used 144 Instruction Words Used 335 Data Table Words Cross Reference Memory Lett 12290 Instruction Words Left 3 00 output it ineur S2 STATUS BINARY T4 TMER Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 340 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 MEUA TANTES IC xi poly Controller Properties HH 2a General Compiler Passwords Communications 4 Controller Properties j Processor Status Function Files
184. TS Off Delay x20 ms When the Control is set at Half Duplex Modem CTS RTS handshaking this feature is enabled This specifies a time delay between the end of a transmission and dropping of the RTS signal The valid range is 0 65535 Default value is 0 RTS Send Delay x20 ms When the Control is set at Half Duplex Modem CTS RTS handshaking this entry is enabled This specifies a time delay between the raising of the RTS and the initiation of a transmission The valid range is 0 65535 Default value is 0 Max Random Delay x1 ms This parameter is used with Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms for Collision Avoidance on RS 485 network For more details see Collision Avoidance on page 334 The valid range is 0 65535 Default value is 0 Channel 1 Ethernet Link Layer Configuration Parameters This section is only applicable to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers The DNP3 over IP subsystem in the MicroLogix 1400 supports Listening End Point TCP Dual End Point and Datagram End Point type Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 256 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Listening End Point type supports a single TCP connection as a Server and UDP datagram TCP Dual End Point type supports a single TCP connection as a Server a single TCP connection as a Client and UDP datagram Datagram End Point type supports UDP datagram from DNP3 Masters The default TCP and UDP port numbers are 20000 and the port numbe
185. The LCD shows this information 1 66 LEC BOOT FAN H1 BH ready The POWER and FAULT LED are solid ON and the LCD shows this information 1 66 LEC BOOT FAN H1 BH Fpga Corrupt When the LCD displays the Fpga Corrupt information the LEDs do not show the Walking pattern during the firmware upgrade process Recovering from Missing or Corrupt OS State In otder to recover from this controller state you need to restart the operating system firmware upgrade as described here 1 Ensure that the Ethernet connections are intact SNMP is enabled by default in the controller 2 If the IP Address was configured during the Preparing for firmware upgrade stage the same IP configuration is retained in the controller Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System 229 3 Start the Firmware upgrade as explained in Using ControlFLASH for Firmware Upgrade on page 215 Publication 1766 UMOOTF EN P March 2011 g 230 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Notes Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 RS 232 Communication Interface RS 485 Communication Interface DF1 Full Duplex Protocol Connecting to Networks RS 232 RS 485 Interface The following protocols are supported from the RS 232 485 combo communication channel Channel 0 and the RS 232 communication channel Channel 2 DF1 Full Duplex Half Duplex Master Slave Radio Modem
186. UMO001F EN P March 2011 Separate wiring by signal type Bundle wiring with similar electrical characteristics together Separate input wiring from output wiring Label wiring to all devices in the system Use tape shrink tubing or other dependable means for labeling purposes In addition to labeling use colored insulation to identify wiring based on signal characteristics For example you may use blue for DC wiring and red for AC wiring Wire Requirements 1 wire per terminal 2 wire per terminal Solid 90 194 F 412 to 20 AWG 16 to 20 AWG Stranded 90 194 F 14 to 20 AWG 18 to 20 AWG Wiring torque 0 56 Nm 5 0 in Ib rated Wire without Spade Lugs When wiring without spade lugs it is recommended to keep the finger safe covers in place Loosen the terminal screw and route the wires through the opening in the finger safe cover Tighten the terminal screw making sure the pressure plate secures the wire lt Finger safe cover 44527 Wire with Spade Lugs The diameter of the terminal screw head is 5 5 mm 0 220 in The input and output terminals of the MicroLogix 1400 controller are designed for a 6 35 mm 0 25 in wide spade standard for 6 screw for up to 14 AWG 4 mm metric 4 fork terminal Wiring Your Controller 43 Using Surge Suppressors When using spade lugs use a small flat blade screwdriver to pry the finger safe cover from t
187. V controller max at 240V max Relay Outputs Description Turn On Time Turn Off Time 20 A or total of per point loads whichever is less 1766 L32BXB A 10 msec maximum 1766 L32AWA A 1766 L32BWA A Load current 10 mA minimum 1 Scan time dependent MicroLogix 1400 DC Input Power Requirements for 1766 L32BXB A Unit 1766 L32BXB A Typical Power Requirements 4 8 12 Calculated Expansion 1 0 Power Load Watts Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 176 X Specifications Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 1766 L32BXB 1766 L32BXBA FET Output Maximum output current temperature dependent FET Current per Point 1 5A 30 C 86 F Current Amps 0 5 0 25 10 C 30 C 50 C 70 C 50 F 86 F 122 F 158 Temperature Description Power supply voltage 0 75A 60 C 140 F 80 176 44532 FET Total Current Current Amps 6 0A 30 C 86 F 3 0A 60 C 140 F 1 0 10 C 30 5 70 C 80 50 F 86 F 122 158 176 F 44533 General High Speed Operation Operation Output 2 3 and 4 Only 24V DC 15 10 Class 2 On state voltage drop at max load current at max surge current 1V DC 2 5V DC Not Applicable Not Applicable Current rating per point max load See graphs above 100 mA min load 1 0 mA 20 mA max leakage 1 0 mA 1 0 mA Surge current per point peak current 4
188. V AC 25 A for 8 ms 24V DC current 240V AC 40 A for 4 ms 15 A for 20 ms Power consumption 100 VA 120 VA 7 5 53W 24V DC sensor power none 24V DC at 250 mA none 400 uF max Input circuit type Digital 120V AC Digital 24V DC sink source Digital 24V DC standard and high speed Analog 0 10V DC Analog 0 0V DC sink source standard and high speed Analog 0 10V DC Output circuit type Relay Relay FET Relay life Electrical 2 x 10 operations min 2 5 A 250V AC 30V DC Enclosure type rating None open style Terminal screw torque 0 791 Nm 7 0 Ib in rated Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 172 Specifications Specifications for Inputs Description 1766 L32AWA A 1766 L32BWA A 1766 L32BXB A Inputs 0 through 11 Inputs 12 and higher 12 high speed DC inputs 8 standard DC inputs On state voltage range 79 132 VAC 4 5 24V DC 10 24V DC 4 5 26 4V DC 41096 at 10 26 4V DC 10 at 60 C 140 F 60 C 140 F 4 5 30V DC 42596 at 30 C 86 F 10 30V DC 42596 at 30 C 86 F Off state voltage range 0 20 V AC 0 1 5V DC 0 5V DC Operating frequency 47 63 Hz 0 Hz 100 kHz 0 Hz 1 kHz scan time dependent On state current Mininum 9 0 mA Q 79 V AC 7 0 mA 4 5V DC 3 0 mA Q 10V DC Nominal 12 mA Q 120 V AC 9 5 mA Q 24V DC 5 0 mA Q 24V DC Maximum 16 0 132 10 0 mA 30V DC 5 5 mA Q 30V DC Off State Le
189. a fault occurs 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000000 User Display b dvanced Set RU Using the LCD 153 2 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Set Menu screen is displayed as shown below 000000 RU TrimPot Set System Info Fault Code 3 If Fault Code is selected press the OK key If not select Fault Code using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key 4 The Fault Code screen is displayed If no fault occurred 0000h is displayed as shown below TIP For more information on a specific fault code refer to the Online Help of your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software 5 Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Set Menu screen as shown in step 2 Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 154 Using the LCD Saving Lo ading At the communication EEPROM screen you can load save user programs Communication EEPROM and data to from the Memory module Saving communication EEPROM Follow these steps to save user program and data from controller s memory to memory module 1 N A Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad
190. a value is reflected to your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software as shown below Data File N dec INTEGER D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Properties Usage Help TIP After changing the data value of a target word press the OK key to apply the changes or press the ESC key to discard the changes Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 122 Using the LCD 10 Now we will view an example of the data value of a protected property If LCD Edit Disable is set to checked enable the Protected message will be displayed and this data file cannot be edited by the LCD Data File Properties x General File 7 Type Name INTEGER Desc Elements 256 Last 7255 Attributes M Debug Skip When Deleting Unused Memory Scope Globe local To Hle LAD 2 MAING PROG Protection Constant C Static None Memory Module Download Web View Disable B 92 714 Protected 11 Try to move the cursor to the data value position by pressing the OK key Because the N7 0 word is protected you will find that the cursor even does not move to the data value position The maximum range of words you can monitor with the Integer File IMPORTANT Monitoring functionality on the LCD is the first 256 words 0 255 of the target integer file 12 If you have finished monitoring t
191. able cells Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Response DNP3 Master may issue DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Description Function Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num Codes dec hex Codes dec hex 0 211 239 Device Attribute 1 read 00 start stop 129 response 00 start stop 241 243 248 250 252 0 240 Device Attribute 1 read 00 start stop 129 response 00 start stop TOM 2 write 00 start stop 0 254 Device Attribute 1 read 00 01 start stop Non specific all 06 no range or all attributes request 0 255 Device Attributes List 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 start stop of attribute variations 06 no range or all 1 0 Binary Input Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 365 DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Description Function Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num Codes dec hex Codes dec hex 1 1 Binary Input Packed 1 read 06 range or al
192. accepted and the responses are transmitted via this connection All responses can be transmitted to the different DNP3 Master port according to the configuration of the parameters Remote UDP Port Number and Master IP Address0 If this parameter is not set to 0 the solicited responses are sent to the DNP3 Master port that is configured If this parameter is set to 0 the solicited responses are sent to the DNP3 Master port that sent the request TCP connection is not available in this configuration The parameter DNP3 over IP Enable is configured in the Channel 1 tab and other parameters are configured in the Chan 1 DNP3 tab Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 257 DNP3 over IP Enable The valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked Power cycle is required for changes to take effect When the selection is Disabled Unchecked DNP3 service over Ethernet is disabled after power cycle When the selection is Enabled Checked DNP3 service over Ethernet is enabled after power cycle Enable Master Address Validation The valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests from any DNP3 Master When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests
193. agnostic File Number This table shows the 80 words of the data file for the troubleshooting Word Offset Description Category 0 Counter for Commands Received TCP Server Link Layer Diagnostics for DNP3 1 Counter for Commands Received with Error 2 Counter for Replies Sent 3 Reserved 4 Reserved 5 Reserved 6 Error Count in sessions 7 Error Code in sessions 8 Incoming Message Connections 9 Maximum Connections Allowed 10 Counter for Commands Transmitted 11 Reserved 12 Counter for Replies Received 13 Reserved 14 Reserved 15 Reserved 16 Reserved 17 Reserved 18 Reserved 19 Reserved Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 354 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Word Offset Description 20 Counter for Commands Received 21 Counter for Commands Received with Error 22 Counter for Replies Sent 23 Reserved 24 Reserved 25 Reserved 26 Error Count in sessions 27 Error Code in sessions 28 Number of Sockets in use 29 Maximum Sockets Allowed 30 Reserved 31 Reserved 32 Counter for Replies Received 33 Reserved 34 Reserved 35 Reserved 36 Reserved 37 Reserved 38 Reserved 39 Reserved Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Category UDP Datagram Link Layer Diagnostics for DNP3 UDP Micrologix 1400 Category Client Word
194. akage Current 2 5 max 0 1 mA max 1 5 mA max Nominal Impedance 12 kQ at 50 Hz 2 0 kQ 5 5 kQ 10 at 60 Hz Inrush Current max at 120V AC 30A Analog Inputs Description Voltage input range 1766 L32AWA A L32BWA A L32BXB A 0 10 0V DC 1 LSB Type of data 12 bit unsigned integer Input coding 0 10 0V DC 1 LSB Voltage input impedance Input resolution 0 4095 2199 12 bit Non linearity 30 596 of full scale Overall accurarcy 20 65 C 4 149 F 1 0 of full scale Update tim Voltage input overvoltage protection 100 20 16 67 4 ms selectable 10 5 V DC Field wiring to logic isolation Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Non isolated with internal logic Analog Outputs Description Number of inputs 1766 L32AWA A L32BWA A L32BXB A 2 single ended Specifications 173 Voltage output range 0 10 V DC 1 LSB Type of data 12 bit unsigned integer Step response 2 5 ms Q 9596 Load range Voltage output gt 1 KQ Output coding 0 10V DC 0 4095 Output resolution 12 bit Analog output setting time 3 ms max Overall Accuracy 20 60 C 4 140 F 1 0 of full scale Electrical isolation Non isolated with internal logic Cable length 30 m 98 ft shielded cable Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 174 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Specificat
195. alog Number dialog box To clear this error 1 Click the OK button to go to the Catalog Number dialog box 2 Select the correct catalog number in the dialog box and proceed with the update 3 Restart the firmware upgrade procedure as described in the section Using ControIFLASH for Firmware Upgrade page 215 Target Module Not in Proper State for Programming 9 Target module not in proper state for programming OK This error message is displayed when the target module is not in a proper state for programming To clear this error 1 Put the controller in the PROGRAM mode 2 Restart the firmware upgrade procedure as described in the section Using ControIFLASH for Firmware Upgrade on page 215 If the error occurs again cycle power and restart the firmware upgrade process Failed to Receive Initial TFTP Request from Target 9 Faled to recotve miia TFTP request from target Modulo vill need to be reset If this problem persists t may moan that a router gateray between the PC and target is not passing the TFTP request trough Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System 227 ControlfLASH EN Update Failed reset module This error message is displayed when the initial TFTP request is not received To clear this error 1 Connect the controller s Ethernet port directly to the computer s Ethernet port using a crossover cable or disable or uninstall any
196. am Any emergency stop switch should turn off all machine power by turning off the master control relay Observe all applicable local codes concerning the placement and labeling of emergency stop switches Install emergency stop switches and the master control relay in your system Make certain that relay contacts have a sufficient rating for your application Emergency stop switches must be easy to reach In the following illustration input and output circuits are shown with MCR protection However in most applications only output circuits require MCR protection The following illustrations show the Master Control Relay wired in a grounded system TIP In most applications input circuits do not require MCR protection however if you need to remove power from all field devices you must include MCR contacts in series with input power wiring Installing Your Controller 27 Schematic Using IEC Symbols L1 12 230 lt Disconnect Fuse MCR 230V AC 1 0 T Circuits Isolation Operation of either of these contacts will ee Vaser Cn ay MCA xi 115v d uA Cat 700 PK400A1 or 230V AC Emergency Stop Stop Start Suppressor Fuse Push Button Qvertravel Cat No 700 N24 m Limit Switch m 1 l A MCR uppr e MCR e 115V AC or 1 230V AC e e
197. an be either true or false General term for digital circuits and programmed instructions to perform required decision making and computational functions Master Control Relay MCR A mandatory hard wired relay that can be de energized by any series connected emergency stop switch Whenever the MCR is de enetgized its contacts open to de energize all application I O devices mnemonic A simple and easy to remember term that is used to represent a complex lengthy set of information modem Modulator demodulator Equipment that connects data terminal equipment to a communication line modes Selected methods of operation Example run test or program 405 negative logic The use of binary logic in such a way that 0 represents the voltage level normally associated with logic 1 for example 0 5V 1 OV Positive is more conventional for example 1 5V 0 OV network A series of stations nodes connected by some type of communication medium A network may be made up of a single link or multiple links nominal input current The current at nominal input voltage normally closed Contacts on a relay or switch that are closed when the relay is de energized or the switch is deactivated they are open when the relay is energized or the switch is activated In ladder programming a symbol that allows logic continuity flow if the referenced input is logic 0 when evaluated normally open Contacts
198. ancel Help Descriptor Element Configuration Index 2 Paint Address 1 Point Address Point Address Type Standard DNP3 Point Point Addre Point NONE Poi gt Point Index 0 Poi Data Type Code NONE Point Address 2 Point Address Point Address Type Standard DNP3 Point z Point Addre Data Length bytes 0 NONE Point Index 0 Poi Ancillary Value 222222222222222222222222222222 Point Address 3 Point Address Point Address Type Standard DNP3 Point Point Addre Point NONE Po PointIndex 0 Paint Address 4 Paint Addres Point Add Ti i i i Point Addre DEEL configuration for oin ius ue Data File relevant Prototype 0 File Number Index 4 File Element 6 File Sub Element Point Address 5 Point Address Point Address Type Standard DNP3 Point z Point Addre Point M Po Cancel Point Index 0 Poi Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 318 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Object Flags for Binary Input Object Quality Flags The object flag is composed of an 8 bit string for some DNP3 objects The tables below show Flag Descriptions for each object The ONLINE RESTART COMM_LOST REMOTE_FORCED and LOCAL_FORCED flags are common to all object group types that contain flags There are some rules for the Object flag set or c
199. and Down keys on the LCD keypad If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000000 User Display b dvanced Set Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 74 Communication Connections 2 QW A Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Settings Menu screen is displayed O00000 bKeyIn DCDHM Cfg ENET Cfg RU Select DCOMM Cfg using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key 000006 DCOHH Cfg ENET Cfg RU The DCOMM Configuration screen is displayed In this example the current status is Disable The DCOMM status indicator which is the fourth of the six indicators at the top left of the LED display is displayed as an empty rectangle It means that the communication configuration is set to a uset defined communication mode at present Communication Connections 75 5 Use the up arrow to change the indicator position so that it is pointing to Enable Press the OK key to change to the default communication mode RU Cfg bEnable Disable The DCOMM Mode Change Notification screen is displayed It indicates that the communication configuration is changed to the default communication mode The DCOMM status indicator is displayed in solid rectangle to D
200. and how to protect it from the environment where it will be installed When the communication cable is installed you need to know how many devices are to be connected during installation and how many devices will be added in the future The following sections help you understand and plan the network Number of Devices and Length of Communication Cable The maximum length of the communication cable is 1219 m 4000 ft This is the total cable distance from the first node to the last node in a segment Howevet two segments can be used to extend the DH 485 network to 2438 m 8000 ft For additional information on connections using the refer to the Advanced Interface Converter AIC User Manual publication 1761 6 4 Planning Cable Routes Follow these guidelines to help protect the communication cable from electrical interference Keep the communication cable at least 1 52 m 5 ft from any electric motors transformers rectifiers generators arc welders induction furnaces or sources of microwave radiation e If you must run the cable across power feed lines run the cable at right angles to the lines e If you do not run the cable through a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit keep the communication cable at least 0 15 m 6 in from AC power lines of less than 20 A 0 30 m 1 ft from lines greater than 20 A but only up to 100K VA and 0 60 m 2 ft from lines of 100 K VA or more e If you run the cable throug
201. ange Object g22v1 none 12 Frozen 16 bit Counter Change Object g23v2 v6 13 Frozen 32 bit Counter Change Object g23v1 v5 14 16 bit Analog Input Static Object g30v4 v2 15 32 bit Analog Input Static Object g30v3 vi 16 Short Floating Point Analog Input Static Object g30v5 none 17 16 bit Analog Input Change Object g32v2 v4 18 32 bit Analog Input Change Object g32v1 v3 19 Short Floating Point Analog Input Change Object g32v5 v7 20 16 bit Analog Output Static Object g40v2 none 21 32 bit Analog Output Static Object g40v1 none 22 Short Floating Point Analog Output Static Object g40v3 none 23 Reserved 24 Reserved 25 Reserved 26 Small BCD Object g101v1 none 2 Reserved 28 Reserved 29 Reserved 30 Reserved 31 Reserved 271 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 272 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Disable EtherNet IP Incoming Connections If you have a critical application and do not want to allow any Ethernet IP Incoming Connections use the parameter Disable Ethernet IP Incoming Connections When this parameter is checked disabled in the Channel 1 Ethernet configuration the MicroLogix 1400 does not allow any incoming Ethernet IP connections In doing so you cannot use RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro over Ethernet port to monitor or change the configuration user program Channel Configuration E E X General Channel 0 Channel 1 Chan 1 DNP3 Channel 2 DNP3 Slave Driver J
202. arch 2011 EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 8 Zone A amp B EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Clause 11 EN 61000 6 4 EMC Part 6 4 Genetic Standards Emission Standard for Industrial Environments EN 61000 6 2 EMC Part 6 2 Genetic Standards Immunity for Industrial Environments This product is intended for use in an industrial environment Low Voltage Directive This product is tested to meet Council Directive 2006 95 ECLow Voltage by applying the safety requirements of EN 61131 2 Programmable Controllers Part 2 Equipment Requirements and Tests For specific information required by EN 61131 2 see the appropriate sections in this publication as well as the following Allen Bradley publications Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for Noise Immunity publication 1770 4 1 Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5 4 Automation Systems Catalog publication B115 Most applications require installation in an industrial enclosure Pollution Degree 2 to reduce the effects of electrical interference Over Voltage Category IIO and environmental exposure Locate your controller as far as possible from power lines load lines and other sources of electrical noise such as hard contact switches relays and AC motor drives For more information on proper grounding guidelines see the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1
203. ation port Each controller supports 32 discrete I O points 20 digital inputs 12 discrete outputs and 6 analog I O points 4 analog inputs and 2 analog outputs 1766 L32BWAA AWAA and BXBA only The hardware features of the controller are shown below IN oam 6000000 L WM Hr 0090000 i 44514 44515 13 12 11 10 9 8 Hardware Features Description Comm port 2 9 pin D Shell RS 232C connector Memory module refer to MicroLogix 1400 Memory Module Installation Instructions publication 1766 INO10A for instructions installing the memory module User 24V for 1766 BWA and 1766 BWAA only Input terminal block LCD Display Keypad ESC OK Up Down Left Right Battery compartment 1762 expansion bus connector Battery connector Output terminal block LCD Display Publication 1766 0 March 2011 14 Hardware Overview Hardware Features Description Indicator LED panel Comm port 1 RJ45 connector Comm port 0 8 pin mini DIN RS 232C RS 485 connector Controller Input and Output Description Catalog Number 1766 L32BWA Description 1766 L32AWA Input Power 100
204. ation 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 The parameter Channel for Unsolicited Response in the DNP3 Slave Configuration tab indicates that the Unsolicited Response is reported via Channel 0 only In this example Initial Unsolicited Response is sent on startup and all events of class 1 2 and 3 are reported Since Hold Times are configured to 5 seconds generated events will be reported after 5 seconds Channel Configuration General Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel2 DNP3 Slave Data Link Layer Channel for Unsolicited Response Chan 0 r Application Layer Enable Unsolicited On Start Up Iv Send Initial Unsolicited On Start Up Enable Unsolicited For Class1 sented Enable Unsolicited For Class2 Enable aen Enable Unsolicited For Class3 E Enable Tim d Response Size Time Synchronization Interval x1 mins 0 Confirmation Timeout x1 ms 10000 Number of Retries 0 Number of Classi Events 1000 Hold Time after Class Events x1 Number of Class2 Events 1000 Hold Time after Class2 Events x1 3 Number of Class3 Events 1000 Hold Time after Class3 Events x1 3 h Select Timeout x1 10 DNP3 Object Data File Number Binary Input ss DNP3 Object Config File Number Binary Input m Binary Output Umm Counter 16bits 0 Counter 32bits Jo Frozen Counter 16bits fo Frozen Counter 32bits Analog Input
205. ative decimal value 1300 First press OK to move the cursor to the data value position Then the last digit of 0000000000 will be flashing which means the cursor is at the data value position Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 126 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Using the LCD 6 N o Press the Left key twice Then the cursor will position at the third digit Press the Up key three times to change the third digit to 3 B II HEHUTE 9 8 BHBBBBH3BH UnProtected Press the Left key once Then press the Up key once The second digit will change to 1 Note that 1 is still flashing which means the cursor is still at the data value position Press the Left key once Then press the Down key once The sign digit will change to as shown below Note that is still flashing which means the cursor is still at the data value position B I I REMOTE 9 8 BBBBBHT UnProtected Press OK to apply the changes The new value 1300 is applied Note that the target word which is to the right of L9 is flashing The cursor is moved automatically to the target word position B E 9 8 1 UnProtected Using LCD 127 10 You can identify this change of data value is reflected to your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software Data File 19 dec 0 0 0 0 Radix Decima
206. attached to the controller or another I O module by means of a flat ribbon cable after mounting as shown below 44975 Use the pull loop on the connector to disconnect modules Do not pull TIP on the ribbon cable TIP Up to seven expansion modules can be connected to a controller Remove power before removing or inserting 1 0 module When you ATTENTION remove or insert a module with power applied an electrical arc may occur An electrical arc can cause personal injury or property damage by e sending an erroneous signal to your systems field devices causing the controller to fault e causing an explosion in a hazardous environment Electrical arcing causes excessive wear to contacts on both the module and its mating connector Worn contacts may create electrical resistance reducing product reliability EXPLOSION HAZARD In Class Division 2 applications the bus connector must be fully seated and the bus connector cover must be snapped in place In Class Division 2 applications all modules must be mounted in direct contact with each other as shown on page 38 If DIN rail mounting is used an end stop must be installed ahead of the controller and after the last 1762 1 0 module Installing Your Controller 39 Notes Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 40 Installing Your Controller Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Chapter 3 Wir
207. ay or Solid 3 State DC Outputs Dut 4 5 4004 Diode A surge suppressor 24V DC common can also be used Suitable surge suppression methods for inductive AC load devices include a varistor an RC network or an Allen Bradley surge suppressor all shown below These components must be appropriately rated to suppress the switching transient characteristic of the particular inductive device See Recommended Surge Suppressors on page 44 for recommended suppressors Surge Suppression tor Inductive AC Load Devices Output Device Output Device Output Device Surge Suppressor Varistor RC Network Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Recommended Surge Suppressors Use the Allen Bradley surge suppressors shown in the following table for use with relays contactors and starters Recommended Surge Suppressors Device CoilVoltage Suppressor Catalog _ Number Bulletin 509 Motor Starter 120V AC 599 K04 Bulletin 509 Motor Starter 240V AC 599 K AAI Bulletin 100 Contactor 120V AC 199 5 1 2 Bulletin 100 Contactor 240V AC 199 FSMA2U Bulletin 709 Motor Starter 120V AC 1401 10 2 Bulletin 700 RM Relays AC coil None Required Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 12V DC 199 F5MAS Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 12V DC Grounding the Controller Wiring Your Controller 45 Recommended Surge Suppressors Device Coil Voltage Supp
208. azardous Location Class Division 2 Groups A B C D UL 1604 C UL under CSA C22 2 No 213 ANSI ISA 12 12 01 For all other modules Hazardous Location Class Division 2 Groups A B C D UL 1604 C UL under CSA C22 2 No 213 for all modules Radiated and conducted emissions EN50081 2 Class A Electrical EMC The module has passed testing at the following levels ESD immunity For 1762 1032T 1762 2 1762 0V32T modules IEC61000 4 2 4 kV contact 8 kV air 4 kV indirect For all other modules IEC1000 4 2 4 kV contact 8 kV air 4 kV indirect Radiated RF immunity For 1762 1032T 1762 0B32T and 1762 0V32T modules IEC61000 4 3 10V m 80 2700 MHz 8096 amplitude modulation For all other modules IEC1000 4 3 10 V m 80 1000 MHz 80 amplitude modulation 900 MHz keyed carrier for all modules EFT B immunity For 1762 10327 1762 2 and 1762 0V32T modules IEC61000 4 4 2 kV 5 kHz on signal ports For all other modules IEC1000 4 4 2 kV 5 kHz Surge transient immunity For 1762 1032T 1762 2 and 1762 0V32T modules IEC61000 4 5 2 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode For all other modules IEC1000 4 5 2 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode Conducted RF immunity For 1762 1032T 1762 0B32T and 1762 0V32T modules IEC61000 4 6 10V 0 15 80 MHz For all other modules IEC1000 4 6 10V 0 15 80 MHz 1 For module specific operating temperature range refer to
209. bit integer double integer or float file specified in the TUF element IMPORTANT Use your programming software to ensure that the bit file you specify in the TUF element as well as the appropriate number of elements exist in the MicroLogix 1400 user program The data protection for a file depends on the LCD edit disable setting When LCD Edit Disable is set 1 Checked in file properties the corresponding data file is considered read only by and the Protected message is displayed When LCD Edit Disable is clear 0 Unchecked the UnProtected message is displayed and the corresponding data file is editable from the LCD keypad IMPORTANT Although you cannot change protected data from the LCD keypad the control program or other communication devices do have access to this data The Protection bit LCD Edit Disable only provides write protection from the LCD keypad This does not provide any overwrite protection from ladder logic HMI or programming software It is the user s responsibility to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten TIP The LCD always starts at bit 0 of a data file It cannot start at any other address within the file Monitoring a Bit File For explanations in this section we assume the following in the application program Using the LCD 113 A bit file B3 which is 256 elements long 256 words 4096 bits is defined with the preset data as shown in the screen capture below
210. can A part of the controller s operating cycle Communication with other devices such as software running on a personal computet takes place controller device such as a programmable controller used to monitor input devices and control output devices controller overhead An internal portion of the operating cycle used for housekeeping and set up purposes Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 402 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 control profile The means by which a controller determines which outputs turn on under what conditions counter 1 An electro mechanical relay type device that counts the occurrence of some event May be pulses developed from operations such as switch closures or interruptions of light beams 2 In controllers a software counter eliminates the need for hardware counters The software counter can be given a preset count value to count up down whenever the counted event occurs CPU Central Processing Unit The decision making and data storage section of a programmable controller data table The part of processor memory that contains I O values and files where data is monitored manipulated and changed for control purposes DIN rail Manufactured according to Deutsche Industrie Normenausshus DIN standards a metal railing designed to ease installation and mounting of your controller download Data is transferred from a programming or storage device to a
211. ce or reset the device such as disconnecting the ethernet cable and reconnecting the cable There is also the possibility that two Ethernet IP device can detect a conflict simultaneously If this occurs remove the device with the incorrect IP address or correct its conflict To get the second device out of conflict mode cycle power to the module or disconnect its Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 384 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Configuring the Ethernet Channel on the MicroLogix 1400 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 ethernet cable and reconnect the cable The MicroLogix 1400 will check every 2 minutes for a duplicate IP address on the network There are three ways to configure the MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet channel 1 viaa BOOTP or DHCP request at controller powerup manually setting the configuration parameters using RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Programming Software via LCD display see Configuring the Ethernet Port on page 143 and Configuring Ethernet Protocol Setup on page 146 The configuration parameters shown on the following page and the configuration procedures follow Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface 385 Configuration Parameters Parameter Description Default Status Hardware The MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet hardware address Ethernet read only Address hardware address IP Address The MicroLogix 1400 internet address
212. ch 2 is Current Switch positions are shown below dicun Location Cho Chi Voltage 0 E Default Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 64 Wiring Your Controller Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 1762 IF20F2 Output Type Selection The output type selection current or voltage is made by wiring to the appropriate terminals lout or Vout and by the type range selection bits in the Configuration Data File Refer to MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RMO001 Analog outputs may fluctuate for less than a second when power is ATTENTION applied removed This characteristic is to most analog outputs While the majority of loads will not recognize this short signal it is recommended that preventive measures be taken to ensure that connected equipment is not affected 1762 IF20F2 Wiring The following illustration shows the 1762 IF2OF2 analog expansion I O terminal block 1762 IF20F2 Terminal Block Layout Wiring Your Controller 65 Single ended Sensor Transmitter Types 2 Wire Transmitter Transmitter Module Transmitter Signal ransmitter Signal 1 All power supplies rated N E C Class 2 1762 IF4 Input Type Selection Select the input type current or voltage using the switches located on the module s citcuit board and the input type range selection bits in t
213. ch position can be set to either PROG or RUN when the controller is powered up This allows the controller operation which is different from the previous mode that is any program under RUN before can be stopped ot any new program can be run when the controller is powered up How to forcibly set Mode Switch to RUN when the controller is poweted up Press OK key for 5 seconds when the controller is powered up The following LCD screen appears if it s successfully done Using the LCD 131 RU How to forcibly set Mode Switch to PROG when the controller is powered up Press ESC key for 5 seconds when the controller is powered up The following LCD screen appears if it s successfully done Note that I O output status may be changed for some programs While the controller is powered on follow these steps to change the position of the Mode Switch 1 On the Main Menu screen select Mode Switch by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad 000000 AU 10 Status Monitor ing bHode Switch Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 132 Using the LCD 2 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Mode Switch screen is displayed as shown below 000000 I O Status Monitoring bHode Switch The arrow indicates current Mode Switch position HU 3 When the Up or Down key is pressed the mode indicated by the arrow starts to blink if the mode is different from the current mode of controller
214. col RS 485 uses devices that are capable of co existing on a common data circuit thus allowing data to be easily shared between devices The DH 485 network offers interconnection of 32 devices multi master peer to peer capability token passing access control the ability to add or remove nodes without disrupting the network maximum network segment of 1 219 m 4 000 ft The DH 485 protocol supports two classes of devices initiators and responders All initiators on the network get a chance to initiate message transfers To determine which initiator has the right to transmit a token passing algorithm is used Control of message transfers on the DH 485 network is performed by rotating the token along the nodes on the network A node holding the token can send a message onto the network Each node is allowed a fixed number of transmissions based on the Token Hold Factor each time it receives the token After a node sends a message it passes the token to the next device The allowable range of node addresses is 1 31 There must be at least one initiator on the network such as a MicroLogix controller or an SLC 5 02 or later processor DH 485 Configuration Parameters When MicroLogix communications are configured for DH 485 the following parameters can be changed DF1 Full Duplex Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Baud Rate 9600 19 2K Node Address 1 31 decimal Token Hold Factor 1 4 See
215. contact US Department of Transportation Research and Special Programs Administration 400 Seventh Street S W Washington D C 20590 Although the Environmental Protection Agency at this time has no regulations specific to lithium batteries the material contained may be considered toxic reactive or corrosive The person disposing of the material is responsible for any hazard created in doing so State and local regulations may exist regarding the disposal of these materials For a lithium battery product safety data sheet contact the manufacturer Sanyo Energy Corporation Tadarand U S Battery Division 2001 Sanyo Avenue 2 Seaview Blvd San Diego CA 92173 Port Washington NY 11050 619 661 4801 516 621 4980 Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 202 Replacement Parts Notes Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 C Troubleshooting Your System This chapter describes how to troubleshoot your controller Topics include understanding the controller status indicators controller error recovery model analog expansion I O diagnostics and troubleshooting calling Rockwell Automation for assistance Understanding the The MicroLogix 1400 provides three groups of status indicators Controller Status Indicators the status LEDs on the top of the controller the status indicators on the LCD the I O status indicators on the LCD Together they provide a mechanism to determine the curren
216. couples S and 0 4 C 0 72 F Thermocouple C 0 2 C 0 36 F Thermocouple B 0 7 C 1 26 F 50 mV 6 uV 100 mV 6 uV 1 Repeatability is the ability of the input module to register the same reading in successive measurements for the same input signal 2 Repeatability at any other temperature in the 0 60 C 32 140 F range is the same as long as the temperature is stable Input With Autocalibration Enabled Without Autocalibration Accuracy 3 for 10 Hz 50 Hz and 60 Maximum Temperature Dritt 4 Hz Filters max at 25 77 F at 0 60 at 0 60 C 32 140 F Ambient 32 140 F Ambient Ambient Thermocouple J 210 1200 C 346 2192 F 0 6 C 1 1 F 0 9 C 1 7 F 0 0218 C C 0 0218 F F Thermocouple 200 1300 C 328 2372 F 1 C 1 8 F 1 5 C 2 7 F 0 0367 C C 0 0367 F F Thermocouple 210 200 C 346 328 F 1 2 C 2 2 F 1 8 C 3 3 F 0 0424 C C 0 0424 F F Thermocouple T 230 400 C 382 752 F 1 C 1 8 F 1 5 C 2 7 F 0 0349 C C 0 0349 F F Thermocouple T 270 230 C 454 382 F 35 4 C 9 8 F 7 0 C 12 6 F 0 3500 C 0 3500 F F Thermocouple 230 1370 C 382 2498 F 1 C 1 8 F 1 5 C 62 7 F 0 4995 C C 0
217. ction Name MicroLogix Description Type Code 1400 Support Confirmation 0 0x00 FC_CONFIRM Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses sends Request 1 0x01 FC_READ Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 2 0x02 FC WRITE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 3 0x03 FC SELECT Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 4 0x04 FC OPERATE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 5 0x05 FC DIRECT OPERATE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 6 0x06 FC DIRECT OPERATE NR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 7 0x07 FC IMMED FREEZE Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 8 0x08 FC IMMED FREEZE NR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 9 0 09 FC_FREEZE_CLEAR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 10 0x0A FC FREEZE CLEAR NR Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 11 OxOB FC FREEZE AT TIME No Request 12 0x0C FC FREEZE AT TIME NR No Request 13 0x0D FC COLD RESTART Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses MicroLogix 1400 should not be in the executing mode and any program and files should not be in open state Request 14 0xOE FC WARM RESTART No Request 15 0xOF FC INITIALIZE DATA No Obsolete Request 16 0x10 FC INITIALIZE APPL Yes MicroLogix 1400 parses Clears fault and changes the controller mode to Remote Program See Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page 342 Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 362 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Function Codes for MicroLogix 1400 Series A Controllers
218. ction set in use Refer to your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software user documentation for more information on programming your MicroLogix 1400 controller Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 12 Related Documentation The following documents contain additional information concerning Rockwell Automation products obtain a copy contact your local Rockwell Automation office or distributor Resource MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual 1766 001 MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Installation Instructions 1766 IN001 Description Information on the MicroLogix 1400 Controllers instruction set Information on mounting and wiring the MicroLogix 1400 Controllers including a mounting template for easy installation Advanced Interface Converter AIC User Manual 1761 UM004 A description on how to install and connect an AIC This manual also contains information on network wiring DeviceNet Interface User Manual 1761 UM005 Information on how to install configure and commission a DNI DF1 Protocol and Command Set Reference Manual 1770 6 5 16 Information on DF1 open protocol Modbus Protocol Specifications Available from www modbus org Information about the Modbus protocol Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Specifications Available from www dnp org Allen Bradley Programmable Controller Grounding and Wiring Guidelines 1770 4 1 Ap
219. ctive earth ground terminal which provides a low impedance path between electrical circuits and earth for safety purposes and provides noise immunity improvement This connection must be made for safety purposes on AC powered controllers This D symbol denotes a functional earth ground terminal which provides a low impedance path between electrical circuits and earth for non safety purposes such as noise immunity improvement Terminal Block Layouts When you connect or disconnect the Removable Terminal Block RTB with field side power applied an electrical arc can occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that power is removed or the area is nonhazardous before proceeding Wiring Your Controller 47 When used ina Class Division 2 hazardous location this equipment must be mounted in a suitable enclosure All wiring must be in accordance with Class Division 2 wiring methods of Article 501 the National Electrical Code and or in accordance with Section 8 1J2 of the Canadian Electrical Code and in accordance with the authority having jurisdiction 1766 L32BWA L32BWAA of Input Terminal Block COM3 5 7 9 0 IV2 GS SOOO COM 0 1 4 ING COM 2 INQ IN11 IN12 IN14 IN16 IN18 COM 1 1V3 ANA VAC VAC 1 VAC L2 N OUTO OUT OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 DC5 OUT7 OUT8 OUTI0 359506009000 00 ANA
220. d DNP3 Paint Point NONE Point Index o r Point Address 8 Point Address Type Standard DNF Point Type NONE Point Index 0 Point Address 4 Point Address Type Standard DNP3 Paint x Point Type NONE Point Index o r Point Address 3 Point Address Type Standard DNP Point Type NONE Point Index o Point Address 5 Point Address Type Standard DNP3 Paint Point NONE Point Index o Point Address 10 Point Address Type Standard DNP Point Type NONE Point Index o Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 317 For instance if Prototype 0 includes a Namespace at Index 2 and Name at Index 3 then the first DAEL in the Prototype 0 is at Index 4 The Prototype DAEL at Index 4 matches Point Address 4 in the element configuration Because of this Point Address 4 in the element configuration of the Descriptor should be configured propertly Number of Prototype Elements BO Prototype Element Configuration Index Descriptor C DataType Code Max Data Length Ancillary Value Lengt Ancillary Value b p 020020 cece 2 NSPC NONE 0 16 Application Name 3 NAME NONE 0 10 Fault Name 4 UINT 2 27 Fault Code in System Status 5 NONE NONE 0 0 6 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 8 ONE 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 C
221. d Fer Class3 LIS lipo pe Vrbs Max Responce Size nae Time Synchicrizalion Interea e mins 0 Corfrmetion Timeout 1 ma poa Number of Retiiee Humber of Clase Events fia Held Time afte Classi Events s Number Class2 Events fi 0 Hold Time after Class2 Events x1 Number o Class3 Events I0 Time after Class3 Events s 5 Sele Timeout x1 fia DMP3 Obect Data File Number ONFA Object Corfig Fie Binary Inout Binery Input Binary Outat Binay Output Courter 16615 Counter 15bits Courter 32bils Counter 32kits Analog Input 16615 Frozen Counter 1655 Analog Input 32615 Frozen Counter 3251 Analog Inpul S hot Floating Analog Output T6biis Analog Output 32bits Analog Input 18 Analg Input bits Andog Short Floating Analog 5 hot Floating Double B t Input Doubt Bit Inat Small BCO Smal 8CD Canoa Apo Heb If you want to communicate with DNP3 protocol using Channel 0 port both Channel 0 and DNP3 Slave configurations should be set If you want to communicate with DNP3 protocol using Channel 2 port Channel 2 and DNP3 Slave configurations should be set If you want to communicate with DNP3 protocol using both Channel 0 port and Channel 2 port Channel 0 Channel 2 and DNP3 Slave configurations should be set In this case the channel which is directed in DNP3 Slave configuration supports full functionality But the
222. d as shown below This file has 10 elements and 160 Binary Output points Index 0 of the Binary Output Object is B11 0 0 Index 1 is B11 0 1 and Index 159 is B11 9 15 Data File 811 bin Binary Output Object File a a a O O O O O D O O O O O O DO O om coc Db om ec a E em H O 0 A gt gt a eG GOG G cC 2 2 2 B17 0 0 Padi D ner Columns 1677 Desc p Properties Usage Help As an example a Binary Output Config File shown below has 10 elements Each bit can be configured for Online information if the corresponding point is active or not 0 offline 1 online of the Binary Output points B31 0 0 is for Index 0 B31 0 1 is for Index 1 and B31 9 15 is for Index 159 In the example below all bits are cleared and all of the points are in offline state Table 1 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 291 If this bit is set the Online bit in the status flag of each Binary Output points is set when you read Binary Output Status objects F
223. d for Class Time Sync Interval Number of Eventsfi0 10 0 Enable Time Sync On Start Up Only Hold Time after Events 1 IE E DNP3 Object File Numbers Default Variation 3 Data Files Config Files Config File Number p Class Flag OL T D BinayInput ho 30 o PEE Numbers of Files Prototypes fo fo Descriptors fo jc Secure Authentication Enable Secure Authentication Enable Aggressive Mode Critical FCs File Number Expected Session Key Channe Interval 1 e Groups 2 w SSiN Key Change Count zu Reply Timeout x100ms Maximum Error Count p 0 HMAC Algorithm 7 Small BCD 40 User Info Contig File Number o T D Threshold Deadband OL OnLine OffLine Diagnostic File Number 0 Binary Output 11 31 Counter 18bits 2 32 Counter 32bits 3 p Frozen Counter 34 Frozen Counter 32bits 35 Analog Input 16bits 14 Analog Input 32bits s Analog Input Short Floating fie 5 Analog Output 16bits 17 Analog Output 32bits s Analog Output Short Floating Double Bit Input 20 Cancel Apply Each of the data files for DNP3 Object will have a file number in the user memory as shown below You can configure the Data file number for each DNP3 Object in the DNP3 Slave tab of the DNP3 Slave Appl
224. d insulation Relay Output Group to Relay Output Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second Group and FET Output Group Isolation 265V AC Working Voltage basic insulation 150V Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Expansion 1 0 Specifications General Specifications Specification Dimensions Digital 1 0 Modules Value 90 mm height x 87 mm depth x 40 4 mm width height including mounting tabs is 110 mm 3 54 in height x 3 43 in depth x 1 59 in width height including mounting tabs is 4 33 in Temperature storage 40 85 C 40 185 F Temperature operating Operating humidity 20 65 4 149 F 5 95 non condensing Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 180 Specifications General Specifications Specification Value Operating altitude 2000 m 6561 ft Vibration Operating 10 500 Hz 5 g 0 030 in max peak to peak 2 hours per axis Relay Operation 1 5 g Shock Operating 30G panel mounted 3 pulses per axis Relay Operation 7 g Non Operating 50 g panel mounted 3 pulses per axis 40G DIN Rail mounted Agency Certification C UL certified under CSA C22 2 No 142 UL 508 listed CE compliant for all applicable directives C Tick marked for all applicable acts Hazardous environment class For 1762 10327 1762 2 and 1762 OV32T modules H
225. de rather than the AC line power This avoids the additional delay of power supply turn off The DC power supply should be powered directly from the fused secondary of the transformer Power to the DC input and output circuits should be connected through a set of master control relay contacts Periodic Tests of Master Control Relay Circuit Any part can fail including the switches in a master control relay circuit The failure of one of these switches would most likely cause an open circuit which would be a safe power off failure However if one of these switches shorts out it no longer provides any safety protection These switches should be tested periodically to assure they will stop machine motion when needed The following explains power considerations for the micro controllers Isolation Transformers You may want to use an isolation transformer in the AC line to the controller This type of transformer provides isolation from your power distribution system to reduce the electrical noise that enters the controller and is often used as a step down transformer to reduce line voltage Any transformer used with the controller must have a sufficient power rating for its load The power rating is expressed in volt amperes VA Power Supply Inrush During power up the MicroLogix 1400 power supply allows a brief inrush current to charge internal capacitors Many power lines and control transformers can supply inrush current for a brief t
226. del returns Catalog returns Catalog value Number and OS Number and OS Series of the Series of the controller controller Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 1766 L32BWA SER 1766 L32BWA SER Supported ranges 1766 L32xxxa SER y where xxxa is BWA AWA BXB BWAA AWAA or BXBA and y is A F For example 1766 L32BWA SER A 1766 L32AWA SER B 1766 L32BXB SER or 1766 L32BWAA SER Object Group 0 Variations for Attribute Set 0 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 325 Variation Read Attribute Length in Max Description Value Series A Value Series B ANrite Data Bytes Length in Type Series A Bytes Series B 251 Reserved for future assignment 252 Read Only VSTR 13 19 Device manufacturer s This variation This variation name returns the returns the Company name Company name Allen Bradley Rockwell Automation for DNP3 253 Read Only Reserved for future assignment 254 Read Only Non specific all attributes This variable returns all of the variations request in this group except this variation 259 Read Only List of attribute variations This variation returns the R W property Event Reporting for each variation From 90 211 to g0v253 0 for Read Only 1 for Read or Write This section covers how to generate DNP3 events from DNP3 Data Objects and how to report the generated events by polled respo
227. dress Detection is disabled checked the MicroLogix 1400 does not 0 disable read write Duplicate IP send any packets to the network to detect Duplicate IP on the same network Address Detection Configuration Using RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Programming Software Configuration Via BOOTP Refer to the online documentation provided with your programming BOOTP bootstrap protocol is a low level protocol that TCP IP nodes use to obtain start up information By default the MicroLogix 1400 broadcasts BOOTP requests at powerup The BOOTP Valid parameter remains clear until a BOOTP reply has been received BOOTP lets you dynamically assign IP Addresses to processors on the Ethernet Link Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface 387 To use BOOTP a BOOTP Server must exist on the local Ethernet subnet The server is a computer that has BOOTP Server software installed and reads a text file containing network information for individual nodes on the network The host system s BOOTP configuration file must be updated to service requests from MicroLogix 1400 controllers The following parameters must be configured Configuration Parameters Parameter Description IP Address A unique IP Address for the MicroLogix 1400 controller Subnet Mask Specifies the net and local subnet mask as per the standard on subnetting RFC 950 Internet Standard Subnetting Procedure
228. dress when the Enable Master Address Validation is Enabled Checked send Unsolicited Response when Unsolicited Response functionality is enabled An Unsolicited Response is sent out to the DNP3 Master having this address The valid range is 0 to 65519 Default value is 0 Master Node1 Master Node2 Master Node3 Master Node4 This value is used for validation of the Master node address when the Enable Master Address Validation is Enabled Checked This value is only valid when the Enable Master Address Validation is Enabled Checked The valid range is 0 to 65519 Default value is 0 Master IP Address This value is used to validate Master IP address when the Enable Access Control is Enabled Checked send Unsolicited Response when Unsolicited Response functionality is enabled An Unsolicited Response is sent out to the DNP3 Master having this address The valid value is an IP address Default value is 0 0 0 0 Master IP Address1 Master Address2 Master IP Address3 Master IP Address4 This value is used for validation of the Master IP address when the Enable Access Control is Enabled Checked This value is only valid when the Enable Access Control is Enabled Checked The valid value is an IP address Default value is 0 0 0 0 Remote TCP Port Number This value is used to configure Master TCP Port Number for Unsolicited Response The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 20000 Remote UDP Port Nu
229. e 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file exists Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 320 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Object Flags for Counter Bit Offset Name Description 1 RESTART 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode un 2 COMM LOST is or was Executing mode and the configuration file 3 REMOTE_FORCED May be 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file 4 LOCAL FORCED Da 5 ROLLOVER 6 DISCONTINUITY 7 reserved Object Flags for Analog Input Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not exist May be 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file exists 1 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode M 2 COMM LOST d is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file 3 REMOTE FORCED May be 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file 4 LOCAL FORCED SES 5 OVER RANGE 6 REFERENCE ERR 7 reserved Object Flags for Analog Output Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode 1 RESTART Always 0 Not used 2 COMM LOST Always 0 Not used 3 REMOTE FORCED Always 0 Not used 4
230. e 7 in response To access objects 12 CROB the controller should be in Executing mode Note that Executing mode includes Run Remote Run Test Continuous Scan and Test Single Scan modes Any others are Non Executing modes DNP3 Double Bit Binary Input Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read an object with Any variation Double bit Binary Input Static Objects g5v0 Double bit Binary Input All Variations e g3v1 Double bit Binary Input Packed format default g5v2 Double bit Binary Input With flags Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 293 Double bit Binary Input Event Objects g4v0 Double bit Binary Input Event All Variations g4v1 Double bit Binary Input Event Without time g4v2 Double bit Binary Input Event With absolute time g4v3 Double bit Binary Input Event With relative time default Related Object File Number Double Bit Binary Input Object File Number Related Configuration File Number Double Bit Binary Input Config File Number To generate a Double Bit Binary Input Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure Double Bit Binary Input Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file When the Double Bit Binary Input Object File is configured the Index number starts f
231. e MicroLogix 1400 clears the fault before changing the mode to Remote Program Start User Program If MicroLogix 1400 receives the function code FC START APPL 17 with the object Application Identifier 290 1 it changes its mode to Remote Run If the controller is in a fault mode it sends the command with the function code FC INITIALIZE APPL 16 before the command with the function code FC START APPL 17 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 344 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Diagnostics Communication Status File Words Stop User Program If MicroLogix 1400 receives the function code FC_STOP_APPL 18 with the object Application Identifier g90v1 it changes its mode to Remote Program If the controller is in a fault mode it sends the command with the function code FC_INITIALIZE_APPL 16 before sending the command with the function code FC_STOP_APPL 18 Errors in a DNP3 Slave subsystem are logged in the Communication Status File There are 71 words for the troubleshooting This section shows the 71 words of the communication status file for each Channel 0 or Channel 2 port Words Offset File Element File Element Description Description for Description for Channel 0 Channel 2 0 CS0 0 CS2 0 General Status Category Block ID 1 CS0 1 52 1 Length 8 bytes 4 words including format code 2 CS0 2 CS2 2 Format Code Always 0 3 CS0 3 CS2 3 Communications
232. e U DISP indicator on the top of the LCD is displayed in solid rectangle It means the LCD is in User Defined LCD mode Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 134 Using the LCD If a user defined screen is used in your application program the LCD screen 15 displayed as shown below accotding to the specific instructions used in yout program 9 8 5 Hold down the ESC key more than 3 seconds to return to the Main Menu screen as shown below 000000 PISO Status Monitor ing Mode Switch Configuring Advanced With the Advanced Set menu which is a sub menu under the main menu of Se t tings the LCD you can use the following features changing Key In mode using communications toggle functionality configuring Ethernet Network Configuration using trim pots viewing system information viewing fault code saving loading Communication EEPROM changing LCD contrast and backlight Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Changing Key In Mode Using the LCD 135 You can access to the Advanced Set Menu screen as shown below by selecting Advanced Set on the Main Menu screen DCOHH Cfg EHET Cfg Key In Modes There are two Key In modes Continuous and Discrete TIP The Key In mode has an effect only when you change the data value of a trim pot on a Trim Pot screen either Trim Pot 0 or Trim Pot 1 screen For more information on how to change the data value of a trim pot see Changing
233. e communication options Chapter 2 Agency Certifications Compliance to European Union Directives Installing Your Controller This chapter shows you how to install your controller The only tools you require are a flat or Phillips head screwdriver and drill Topics include agency certifications compliance to European Union Directives installation considerations safety considerations power considerations preventing excessive heat master control relay installing a memory module using the battery controller mounting dimensions controller and expansion I O spacing mounting the controller mounting 1762 expansion I O connecting 1762 expansion I O UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for use in Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations Groups A B C D CE marked for all applicable directives C Tick marked for all applicable acts C UL Listed Industrial Control Equipment for use in Canada This product has the CE mark and is approved for installation within the European Union and EEA regions It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives Directive This product is tested to meet Council Directive 2004 108 EC Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC and the following standards in whole or in part documented in a technical construction file Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 20 Installing Your Controller Installation Considerations Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P M
234. e controller mode use the function codes FC INITIALIZE APPL 16 FC START APPL 17 and FC STOP APPL 18 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 343 If the qualifier code is 5Bh the Application Identifier Object should be used The Application Identifier is a string which cannot exceed 10 bytes The string of Application Identifier is taken from the name in the Properties of the ladder file 2 in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro In this example the Application Identifier is DNP3 TASK EGEUEBESCUENIET Sy Project P nd T P Program File Properties xc Controller General i Controller Properties Processor Status 5 Function Files JUO Configuration PE Channel Configuration B Program Files Nane 7 svso svs1 Doc Raf LAD 2 DNP3 TASK E 1 Data Files Cross Reterence Description 00 OUTPUT File Number 2 E n input 1 s2 status RET B3 BINARY Atttibutes Debus TER Allow Online Edits View Disable 1 lt 5 COUNTER ium x sem ose e If the qualifier code is 06h the MicroLogix 1400 controller does not check the string of the Application Identifier Initialize User Program If MicroLogix 1400 receives the function code FC_INITIALIZE_APPL 16 with the object Application Identifier g90v1 it changes mode to Remote Program If the controller is in a fault mode th
235. e defined in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers The bit TE is used to generate an event by setting it regardless of the change of state This bit can be used to generate the timed events Once this bit is set by the ladder logic or communications the MicroLogix 1400 clears it automatically after generating an event at the end of scan The bit DCE is used to suppress the events by the change of state For example if you want to trigger an event for an analog point every 15 minutes you should set the TE bit every 15 minutes by the ladder logic But in this case you may not want the state change events to be generated Then set the bit DCE You can get the timed events every 15 minutes Related Configuration File Number 16 bit Counter Config File Number 32 bit Counter Config File Number 16 bit Frozen Counter Config File Number 32 bit Frozen Counter Config File Number 16 bit Analog Input Config File Number 32 bit Analog Input Config File Number Short Floating Point Analog Input Config File Number Bit Offset 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Element 0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r DCE TE r r C1 C0 Element 1 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r DCE r r C1 C0 Element 2 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r DCE r r C1 CO Element 3 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r DCE r r C1 C0 Element 4 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r DCE TE r r C1 C0 E
236. e packet support 240 replacement battery 197 disposing 201 handling 199 installing 197 storing 199 transporting 199 replacement kits 197 replacement parts 197 reporting event by polled response 331 reporting event by unsolicited response 332 reserved bit 407 restore 407 retentive data 407 RS 232 407 RS 232 communication interface 231 RS 485 communication interface 231 rules for downloading a user program 340 rules for file authentication 339 rules for initializing a user program 342 rules for uploading a user program 341 rules for uploading communication status files 342 run mode 407 rung 407 safety circuits 22 safety considerations 21 disconnecting main power 22 hazardous location 21 master control relay circuit periodic tests 23 periodic tests of master control relay circuit 23 safety circuits 22 save 407 saving communication EEPROM 154 scan time 407 sinking 408 sinking and sourcing wiring diagrams 50 sinking wiring diagram 1762 24BWA 50 sourcing 408 sourcing wiring diagram 1762 24BWA 51 52 51 specifications 171 specifications for outputs in non hazardous locations 175 specifications for outputs in hazardous locations 174 starting and stopping user programs mode change via DNP3 network 342 status 408 status indicators 203 supported communication protocols 71 surge suppressors for contactor 44 recommended 44 using 43 Index 413 system configuration DF1 Full Duplex examples 232 241 system l
237. e returned to the Welcome to ControlFLASH dialog box Welcome to ControlFLASH Welcome to ControFLASH the firmware update tool ContioFLASH needs the following information from you before it can begn updating a device Control 1 The Catalog Number of the taiget device 2 The Network Corfigutation parameters optional The Network Path to the target device A The Firmware Revision lor this update 19 You can continue to upgrade additional controllers by clicking the Next button or exit the program by clicking the Cancel button If you click cancel you asked to verify that you want to end the update session ControlFLASH J Are you sure you want to end this ControlFLASH session The following are error messages you can receive ControlFLASH Error g ges y Messages Invalid Catalog Number Target Module Not in Proper State for Programming Failed to Receive Initial TFTP Request from Target Communication error during TFTP transfer Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 226 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Invalid Catalog Number ControlHLASH Invalid Catalog Number The catalog number of the selected device does not match the catalog number selected in the Catalog Number dialog Press F1 For more information This error message is displayed if the ControlFLASH tool is unable to match the processor to the catalog number that was selected in the Cat
238. ed Solicited Response Function Code Counter 66 50 66 52 66 Transmitted Unsolicited Response Function Code Counter 67 50 67 52 67 Number of events to be reported 68 CS0 68 52 68 Transport Function Layer Error Codes 0 NO_ERROR No error found in the Transport Layer 1 DISCARD_NOT_FIRST_SEG The received packet was discarded since it was not a first segment 2 DISCARD_DUPLICATED_AND_MORE_SEG The received packet was discarded since it had the same sequence number as previous more segments are expected 3 DISCARD_DUPLICATED_AND_FINAL_SEG The received packet was discarded since it had the same sequence number as previous final segment received 4 DISCARD_OUT_OF_ORDER_SEG The received packet was discarded since the sequence number was out of order 69 50 69 52 69 Transport Layer Error Count 70 50 70 52 70 End Of List Category ID 0 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 350 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 The elements can be seen in the Function Files for each Channel PwMx sri 150 CSU 1 cs2 105 alel 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n 52 0 0521 C522 52 3 C524 CS2 5 52 6 52 7 CS2 8 52 9 52 10 52 11 52 12 52 13 052 14 52 15 52 16 52 17 52 18 05213 52 20 52 21 52 22 52 23 CS2 24 soocoeocoecoocoecocococococes Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 201
239. ee format command 70 3 File Control file 27 delete file 5B free format command 70 4 File Control file 26 close file 5B free format 129 response 5B free format command status 70 5 File Control file 1 read file 5B free format transport 70 5 File Control file 2 write file 5B free format transport 70 6 File Control file 129 response 5B free format transport status 70 7 File Control file 129 response 5B free format descriptor 80 1 Internal Indications 1 read file 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop Packed format 2 write file 00 start stop index 7 90 1 Application Identifier 16 init appl 5B free format 17 start appl 06 no range or all 18 stop appl 101 1 Binary Coded Decimal 1 read file 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop Integers small 130 unsol resp 17 28 index Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 370 Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Description Function Codes dec Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Request DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse hex Qualifier Codes Function Codes dec Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue hex Qualifier Codes Binary Coded Decimal Integers medium No Object function code only 13 cold restart
240. ent out with the function code FC UNCONFIRMED USER DATA 4 When the selection is Enabled Checked Primary Frames from the MicroLogix 1400 are sent out with the function code FC CONFIRMED USER DATA 3 In this case the MicroLogix 1400 waits for the confirmation and may retry the Frame if it did not receive the confirmation from DNP3 Master within the time Confirmation Timeout x1 ms Send LL Confirmation Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the optional Secondary Frame is not sent out with the function code FC 1 or FC NOT SUPPORTED 15 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 255 When the selection is Enabled Checked the optional Secondary Frame is sent out with the function code _ 1 or FC NOT SUPPORTED 15 Confirmation Timeout x20 ms When Request LL Confirmation is enabled the MicroLogix 1400 waits to receive a confirmation frame until this timeout has expired The valid range is 1 65535 Default value is 1 Message Retries When Confirmation Timeout x1 ms has expired and this parameter was non zero value the MicroLogix 1400 tries to send retry packets The valid range is 0 255 Default value is 0 Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms The MicroLogix 1400 waits for the specified time before sending the packet The valid range is 0 65535 Default value is 0 R
241. er Invalid File Type specified 8 BAD FILE NUMBER The error was caused by invalid configuration in DNP3 Slave Application Layer Invalid File Number specified 9 BAD DNP3 ADDRESS The error was caused by invalid configuration in DNP3 Slave Application Layer Invalid File Number specified 10 TABLE WRITE PROTECTED The specified DNP3 object data file has been locked to be written 11 TABLE ACCESS DENIED The specified DNP3 object data file has been locked to be read or written 12 TABLE OWNERSHIP ERROR The specified DNP3 object data file has been locked to be read or written If an error code is within 6 to 12 related file number and element number are shown in word 64 and 65 61 Application Layer Error Count 62 Function Code that caused the last error 63 Last Transmitted IIN in the response 64 Data file number of last error request 65 Data element number of last error request 66 Received Confirm Function Code Counter 67 Received Read Function Code Counter 68 Received Write Function Code Counter 69 Received Function Code Counter other than Confirm Read and Write Function Codes 70 Transmitted Solicited Response Function Code Counter 71 Transmitted Unsolicited Response Function Code Counter 72 Number of events to be reported Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Category DNP3 Slave Application Layer Diagnostics for DNP3 Slave Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 357
242. ere controllers are installed and operating it is impossible to ensure that all environmental noise will be removed by input filters To help reduce the effects of environmental noise install the MicroLogix 1400 system in a properly rated for example NEMA enclosure Make sure that the MicroLogix 1400 system is properly grounded A system may malfunction due to a change in the operating environment after a period of time We recommend periodically checking system operation particularly when new machinery or other noise sources are installed near the MicroLogix 1400 system Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Wiring Your Controller 53 Wiring Your Analog Channels Analog input circuits can monitor voltage signals and convert them to serial digital data Sensor 2 V Voltage Sensor 0 V Voltage Input Terminal Block 1 1 8 1 10 COM 3 1 13 115 117 1 19 1 0 OOOO O COM 2 1 9 111 1 12 114 116 18 IV1 ANA 1 2 1 3 Sensor 1 V Voltage Sensor 3 V Voltage 44529 The controller does not provide loop power for analog inputs Use a power supply that matches the transmitter specifications as shown The analog output can support a voltage function as shown in the following illustration Analog Output Voltage Load COM 0 8 0 10 ANA Ovi 66006 gt 3 064 0 5 0 6 066 0 9 0 11 C VAC VAC
243. ers Root level can only be a directory marker The directory marker is for Series A or for Series B Directory level can only contain directories File level can only contain files Note that the directory marker is different in the MicroLogix 1400 Series A and Series B controllers The directory marker is for Series A and V for Series controllers In this document is used to explain File Object feature Generating IMG files using RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Typically RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro stores the ladder program as RSLogix Files RSS However to download a ladder program using a File Object via DNP3 network you must save your ladder program in the RSLogix IMG Files format Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 338 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 After you write your ladder program select Save As from the File menu of RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Select the save type as RSLogix IMG Files IMG Save Program BE Path D DNP3S Save in DNP3S ek Ee File name ML14004_DNP3S Save as type m Cancel Export file types Export database Loge CAPS Export options Save data base as external files File PLC Information Processor Name Station 09 Processor Bul 1766 MicroLogix 1400 Series A Revision Note Version o Afte
244. es 158 Chapter 6 Real Time Clock Operation op pps ur Ier epa s 161 Operation at Power up and Entering a Run or Test Mode 161 Writing Data to the Real Time 1 161 Battery 162 Memory Module 162 User Program User Data Datalog and Recipe Back up 163 m 163 Data Pile Download Protection 163 Memory Module Write 164 Removal Insertion Under 164 Memory Module Information File 164 Program Lata 164 Program Data 1 165 Chapter 7 Directions and Cautions for MicroLogix 1400 Online Editino User testa A Seay wha elena AR ahs ta rig 167 A Download is Required Before Starting Online Editing 167 Types OF Online Editing at sca dun oak aoe ento Vi ever e 168 Edit Functions in Runtime Online Editing 169 Edit Functions in Program Online Editing 169 Appendix A Specifications fort Inputs ea 172 Specifications for Outputs in Hazardous Locations Class 1 Division 2 Groups A 174 Replacement Parts Troubleshooting Your System Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating Sy
245. es Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure Documentation Feedback Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document complete this form publication RA DU002 available at http www rockwellautomation com literature Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret 5 Kar Plaza Is Merkezi E Blok Kat 6 34752 erenk y stanbul Tel 90 216 5698400 www rockwellautomation com Power Control and Information Solutions Headquarters Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation NV Pegasus Park De Kleetlaan 12a 1831 Diegem Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation Level 14 Core Cyberport 3 100 Cyberport Road Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 Supersedes Publication 1766 0 May 2010 Copyright 2011 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in the U S A
246. es on page 117 Mode Switch Allows you to change the mode switch selection Using the Mode Switch on page 129 User Display Displays the user defined LCD screen Using a User Defined LCD Screen on page 132 Advanced Set Allows you to configure or view the following e Change the key in mode for value entry for a trim pot e Use the communications toggle functionality e View and change the Ethernet network configuration e Change the data value of trim pots e View system information such as OS series and firmware version e User communication EEPROM functionality e Change LCD contrast and backlight option e Changing Key In Mode on page 135 e Using Communications Toggle Functionality on page 137 e Viewing Ethernet Status on page 137 e Using Trim Pots on page 148 e Status on page 109 e Saving Loading Communication EEPROM on page 154 e LCD setup on page 156 LCD Default Screen 1 0 Status Screen Ga ac at Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 lt Nos SS 000000 I BBOQOOOOOO00000 OOOO RU OO 6143456769812 456735 a rip iiim This is the default screen of the display allowing you to monitor controller and I O Status For more information on the I O Status screen see I O Status on page 109 Using the LCD 107 Operating Buttons Ka Button Function Cursor Move cursor Buttons Select menu item Choose file numbers values etc OK Next menu level
247. esp 5B free format Status 120 6 Authentication Session Key 32 Auth Request 5B free format Change 120 7 Authentication Error 33 Auth Request 5B free format 131 Auth resp 5B free format no ack 120 7 Authentication Error 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 5B free format 120 9 Authentication HMAC Any requests 5B free format 129 response 5B free format 120 9 Authentication HMAC 130 unsol resp 5B free format No Object function code only 13 cold restart No Object function code only 14 warm restart No Object function code only 23 delay meas No Object function code only Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 24 record current time Appendix G Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface This appendix describes MicroLogix 1400 controllers and Ethernet communication describes MicroLogix 1400 performance considerations describes Ethernet network connections and media explains how the MicroLogix 1400 establishes node connections lists Ethernet configuration parameters and procedures describes configuration for subnet masks and gateways MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet is a local area network that provides communication between various devices at 10 to 100 Mbps The physical communication media Controllers and Ethernet options for the MicroLogix 1400 are Communication ane twisted
248. essage Packets 14 CS0 14 CS2 14 Message Packets Retried 15 CS0 15 CS2 15 NAK Packets Received 16 50 16 52 16 Link Layer Error Count 17 50 17 52 17 Link Layer Error Codes 0 ERR_NO_ERROR 1 ERR_NO_RX_BUFFER 2 ERR_TOO_SHORT 3 ERR_TOO_LONG 4 ERR_UART_ERROR 5 ERR_BAD_CRC 6 ERR CTS TIMEOUT 7 ERR CTS DROP MID PKT 8 ERR UNKNOWN CHAR 18 50 18 52 18 Reserved Always 0 19 CS0 19 52 19 Reserved Always 0 20 50 20 52 20 Reserved Always 0 21 50 21 52 21 Reserved Always 0 22 50 22 52 22 Reserved Always 0 23 50 23 52 23 Data Link Layer Active Node Table 24 CS0 24 CS2 24 Length 25 CS0 25 CS2 25 Format Code 26 50 26 52 26 Number of Nodes 27 50 27 52 27 Reserved Always 0 28 CS0 28 CS2 28 Reserved Always 0 29 CS0 29 CS2 29 Reserved Always 0 30 CS0 30 CS2 30 Reserved Always 0 31 CS0 31 CS2 31 Reserved Always 0 32 CS0 32 CS2 32 Reserved Always 0 33 CS0 33 CS2 33 Reserved Always 0 34 CS0 34 CS2 34 Reserved Always 0 35 CS0 35 52 35 Reserved Always 0 36 CS0 36 CS2 36 Reserved Always 0 37 CS0 37 CS2 37 Reserved Always 0 38 CS0 38 CS2 38 Reserved Always 0 39 CS0 39 CS2 39 Reserved Always 0 40 50 40 52 40 Reserved Always 0 41 50 41 52 41 Reserved Always 0 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 348 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Communication Status File Words Words Offset 42 File Element Description for Channel 0 CS0 42 File Element
249. etwork diagrams on the next pages provide examples of how to connect MicroLogix 1400 controllers to the RS 485 network You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to your RS 485 network directly without using an external optical isolator such as Advanced Interface Converter AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as shown in the illustrations below because Channel 0 is isolated within the controller TIP Use a 1763 NC01 Series A or later 8 mini DIN to 6 pin RS 485 connector cable or equivalent to connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to a RS 485 network MicroLogix 1400 controllers support various protocols on the RS 485 network including DH 485 DF1 Half Duplex Master Slave Modbus RTU Master Slave ASCII and DNP3 Slave protocols In this section DH 485 protocol is used as an example Any physical connection should be the same as other protocols Communication Connections 83 DH 485 Configuration Parameters When MicroLogix communications are configured for DH 485 the following parameters can be changed DH 485 Configuration Parameters Parameter Options Baud Rate 9600 19 2 KBps Node Address 1 31 decimal Token Hold Factor 1 4 See Software Considerations on page 239 for tips on setting the parameters listed above Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 84 Communication Connections DH 485 Network with a Micro
250. eypad The I O Status screen is displayed as shown below 000000 RU I BBQOQOOOOOO000000 0100000 9123456789012 456739 a rbp p pe 3 If you have finished viewing I O status press the ESC key to return to the Main Menu screen as shown in step 1 The LCD allows you to view and change the data values of 256 bits words ot double integers in a user defined file You can access to this functionality via the Monitoring screen of the LCD To monitor the bit file on the LCD you have to specify its file number in the Target User Defined File Number TUF element of the LCD Function File and download your application program to the controller The TUF element can only be changed by a program download Target User Defined File Number TUF Feature Address Data Format Type User Program Access Target User Defined File LCD 0 TUF Word int Control Read Only Number The value stored in the TUF element identifies the bit file with which the LCD will interface Valid bit files are B3 and B10 through B255 When the LCD reads a valid bit file number it can access up to 256 bits 0 to 255 on the LCD screen The protection bit LCD edit disable in the data file properties Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 112 Using the LCD Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 of target bit file are used to define the read only or read write privileges for its file The file type that the LCD interfaces with is
251. f operation Both module hardware and channel configuration error conditions are reported to the controller Channel over range or under range conditions are reported in the module input data table Module hardware errors are reported in the controller s I O status file Refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RMO001 for mote information When a fault condition is detected the analog outputs are reset to zeto Power up Diagnostics At module power up a series of internal diagnostic tests are performed Module Status LED State Table If module Indicated Corrective action status LED is condition Proper Operation No action required Off Module Fault Cycle power If condition persists replace the module Call your local distributor or Allen Bradley for assistance Module Error Table Troubleshooting Your System 209 Critical and Non Critical Errors Non ctitical module errors are recoverable Channel errors over range under range errors ate non critical Non critical error conditions are indicated in the module input data table Non critical configuration errors are indicated by the extended error code See Extended Error Codes for 1762 IF2OF2 on page 211 Critical module errors are conditions that prevent normal or recoverable operation of the system When these types of errors occur the system leaves the run mode of operation Critical m
252. face 243 Typical 3 Node Network PanelView 550 PanelView Bae LU M MicroLogix 1400 RJ45 port 1761 CBL ASO9 or 1761 CBL AS03 1747 0P3 ar 1761 CBL AMOO 1761 CBL ACOO EE 7 44599 1 This 3 node network is expandable Modbus is a Half Duplex master slave communications protocol The Modbus network master reads and writes coils and registers Modbus protocol allows a single master to communicate with a maximum of 247 slave devices MicroLogix 1400 controllers support Modbus RTU Master and Modbus RTU Slave protocol For more information on configuring your MicroLogix 1400 controller for Modbus protocol refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RM001 For more information about the Modbus protocol see the Modbus Protocol Specifications available from http www modbus org ASCII provides connection to other ASCII devices such as bar code readers weigh scales serial printers and other intelligent devices You can use ASCII by configuring the RS 232 485 port channel 0 and the RS 232 port Channel 2 for the ASCII driver Refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publica
253. for data index 0 to 15 For Double Bit Binary Input Element _0 for data index 0 to 7 For Binary Input and Binary Output type data you can configure Online information of the object flag in the Configuration file If this bit is set the Online bit bit 0 in the object flag for each point is set when you read Status type objects You can set this information using ladder logic Related Configuration File Binary Input Online Config File Number In Series B Binary Output Online Config File Number Bit Offset 15 14 113 112 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Element 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Element 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Element 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Element 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Element 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Element 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 offline 1 online For Binary Output Element_0 for data index 0 to 15 For other Input type data you can configure Class information and the object flag information in the Configuration file The lower 2 bits in the elements of the Configuration files are the configuration of Class information to the relevant objects The upper byte of the configuration file of these objects is used to configure the object flag Other bits are reserved Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 284 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Two new bits ar
254. g half duplex modem RTS CTS handshaking no handshaking 485 network Error Detection CRC BCC EOT Suppression enabled disabled When EOT Suppression is enabled the slave does not respond when polled if no message is queued This saves modem transmission power and time when there is no message to transmit Duplicate Packet Message Detect enabled disabled Detects and eliminates duplicate responses to a message Duplicate packets may be sent under noisy communication conditions if the sender s Message Retries are not set to 0 Poll Timeout x20 ms 0 65 535 can be set in 20 ms increments Poll Timeout only applies when a slave device initiates a MSG instruction It is the amount of time that the slave device waits for a poll from the master device If the slave device does not receive a poll within the Poll Timeout a MSG instruction error is generated and the ladder program needs to requeue the MSG instruction If you are using a MSG instruction it is recommended that a Poll Timeout value of zero not be used Poll Timeout is disabled when set to zero RTS Off Delay x20 ms 0 65 535 be set in 20 ms increments Specifies the delay time between when the last serial character is sent to the modem and when RTS is deactivated Gives the modem extra time to transmit the last character of a packet RTS Send Delay x20 ms 0 65 535 can be set in 20 ms increments Specifies the time delay betwee
255. g the AIC Use the 24V DC user power supply built into the MicroLogix 1000 1200 or 1500 controller The AIC is powered through a hard wired connection using a communication cable 1761 CBL HM02 or equivalent connected to port 2 Usean external DC power supply with the following specifications Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 96 Communication Connections operating voltage 24V DC 15 20 output current 150 mA minimum rated NEC Class 2 Make a hard wired connection from the external supply to the screw terminals on the bottom of the AIC ATTENTION If you use an external power supply it must be 24V DC 15 20 Permanent damage results if miswired with the wrong power source Connecting to DeviceNet You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 as a slave to a DeviceNet network using the DeviceNet Interface DNI catalog number 1761 NET DNI For additional information on using the DNI refer to the DeviceNet Interface User Manual publication 1761 UM005 The following figure shows the external wiring connections of the DNI DeviceNet Node Port 1 C ES Replacement connector part 1761 RPL RTOO ED Use this write on TX RX area to mark the DeviceNet node address RS 232 Port 2 Cable Selection Guide Lie a 1761 CBL HM02 761 CBL AMOO 44601 Series C
256. ge Voltage Voltage 0 10 5V dc NA NA ranges 0 10 5V dc 10 5 10 5 dc Current 0 21 mA Current 0 21 mA Current 21 421 mA Resolution 12 bits unipolar 15 bits bipolar 12 bits unipolar Input filter and 15 bits plus sign configuration dependent Repeatability 40 129 4 40 129 4 40 129 4 0 1 9C 0 18 F for See Table 193 Ni and NiFe 0 2 C 0 36 F 0 2 C 0 36 F for other RTD inputs 0 04 ohm for 150 ohm resistances 0 2 ohm for other resistances Input and output 30V ac 30V DC rated working voltage 30V ac 30V DC rated 30V ac 30V DC 30V ac 30V DC group to system N E C Class 2 required working voltage working voltage working voltage isolation IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation IEC Class 2 type test 500V AC or qualification test type test 500V AC or 707V DC for 1 minute reinforced 707V DC for 1 720V DC for 1 insulation minute minute type test 500V AC or 707V DC for 1 minute Vendor 1 0 code 1 1 1 1 1 Product type code 10 10 10 10 10 Product code 75 67 66 65 64 1 full scale range 2 3 4 The over or under range Repeatability is the abili Only applicable to Series 1 0 modeles flag comes on when the normal operating range over under is exceeded The module continues to convert the ana y of the module to register the same reading in successive measurements for the same signal Rated working voltage is the maximum cont
257. ge or all Any Variation 07 08 limited qty Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Description Function Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num Codes dec hex Codes dec hex 23 1 Frozen Counter Event 1 read 06 range or all 129 response 17 28 index 32 bit with flag 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 23 2 Frozen Counter Event 1 read 06 range or all 129 response 17 28 index 16 bit with flag 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 23 5 Frozen Counter Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 32 bit with flag and 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp time 23 6 Frozen Counter Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 16 bit with flag and 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp time 30 0 Analog Input Any 1 read 06 no range or all Variation 30 1 Analog Input 32 bit 1 read 06 range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop with flag 30 2 Analog Input 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop with flag 30 3 Analog Inpu
258. ger provide adequate DC power to the system This is referred to as a power supply shutdown The processor then performs an orderly shutdown of the controller Input States on Power Down The power supply hold up time as described above is generally longer than the turn on and turn off times of the inputs Because of this the input state change from On to Off that occurs when power is removed may be recorded by the processor before the power supply shuts down the system Understanding this concept is important The user program should be written to take this effect into account Other Types of Line Conditions Occasionally the power source to the system can be temporarily interrupted It is also possible that the voltage level may drop substantially below the normal line voltage range for a period of time Both of these conditions are considered to be a loss of power for the system Installing Your Controller 25 Preventing Excessive Heat Master Control Relay For most applications normal convective cooling keeps the controller within the specified operating range Ensure that the specified temperature range is maintained Proper spacing of components within an enclosure is usually sufficient for heat dissipation In some applications a substantial amount of heat is produced by other equipment inside or outside the enclosure In this case place blower fans inside the enclosure to assist in air circulation and to reduce
259. h using a user defined LCD screen changing key in mode using communications toggle functionality configuring Ethernet port configuration using trim pots viewing system information viewing fault code using communication EEPROM configuring LCD Setup The LCD and keypad are shown below s iii 44580 LCD and Keypad Feature Description 10 LCD 5 LCD Screen Keypad ESC OK Up Down Left and Right Buttons Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 102 Using the LCD Operating Principles Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 MicroLogix 1400 LCD Menu Structure Tree Startup Screen User Defined gt integer Long Integer Float REMOTE RUN S Using the LCD 103 Startup Screen The Startup screen is displayed whenever the controller is powered up LCD Default Startup Screen MicroLogix 1400 You can customize this Startup screen in your application program by defining a ASCII data file that contains the bitmap format image to display on the Startup screen and specifying the CBL element of the LCD Function File to the address of this ASCII file The screen shown below is an example of a c
260. h a contiguous metallic wireway or conduit keep the communication cable at least 0 08 m 3 in from AC power lines of less than 20 A 0 15 m 6 in from lines greater than 20 A but only up to 100 K VA and 0 30 m 1 ft from lines of 100 VA or more Running the communication cable through conduit provides extra protection from physical damage and electrical Connecting to Networks RS 232 RS 485 Interface 239 interference If you route the cable through conduit follow these additional recommendations Use ferromagnetic conduit near critical sources of electrical interference You can use aluminum conduit in non critical areas Use plastic connectors to couple between aluminum and ferromagnetic conduit Make an electrical connection around the plastic connector use pipe clamps and the heavy gauge wire wite braid to hold both sections at the same potential Ground the entire length of conduit by attaching it to the building earth ground Do not let the conduit touch the plug on the cable Arrange the cables loosely within the conduit The conduit should contain only serial communication cables Install the conduit so that it meets all applicable codes and environmental specifications For more information on planning cable routes see Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 Software Considerations Software considerations include the configuration of
261. he Configuration Data File Refer to MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 001 You can access the switches through the ventilation slots on the top of the module Ch0 Chi Ch2 Ch3 FA Switch Location A Voltage OFF ON 25 5 i i 5 1 2 1 2 Y Current ON Default Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 66 Wiring Your Controller 1762 IF4 Terminal Block Layout TIP Grounding the cable shield at the module end only usually provides sufficient noise immunity However for best cable shield performance earth ground the shield at both ends using a 0 01 pF capacitor at one end to block AC power ground currents if necessary Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Wiring Your Controller 67 Sensor Transmitter Types 2 Wire Transmitter Transmitter Transmitter Supply X Signal Transmitter Supply Signal 0 All power supplies rated N E C Class 2 1762 OF4 Output Type Selection The output type selection current or voltage is made by wiring to the appropriate terminals lout or Vout and by the type range selection bits in the Configuration Data File 1762 OF4 Terminal Block Layout V out 0 V out 1 V out 2 V out 3 Commons connected internally Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 68 Wiring Your Controller 1762 OF4 Wiring Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Wiring Your Con
262. he control program or other communication devices do have access to this data The Protection bit LCD Edit Disable only provides write protection from the LCD keypad This does not provide any overwrite protection from ladder logic HMI or programming software It is the user s responsibility to ensure that data is not inadvertently overwritten For explanations in this section we assume the following in the application program A bit file L9 which is 256 elements long 256 words is defined with the preset data as shown in the screen capture below Data File L9 dec E xl Radix Decimal z Symbol gt Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 124 Using the LCD Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 LCD Edit Disable is set to unchecked disable Data File Properties General File 9 Type L Nam Desc 3 Elements 256 Last 9255 Attributes Debug Skip When Deleting Unused Memory Scope Global Local File La 2 MAIN PROG Protection Constant Static None Memory Module Download Web View Disable LCD Edit Disable The TUF element of the LCD Function File is set to 9 to specify the integer file L9 as the target file to monitor on the LCD as shown in the screen capture below The controller mode is set to REMOTE RUN Function Files HSC PTOX PWMX STI JE RTC LCD cso 4 E
263. he 150 words of the data file for the troubleshooting The 50 words are used to log the counters for each channel Word offset 0 to 49 is for Channel 0 word offset 50 to 99 is for Channel 1 and word offset 100 to 149 is for Channel 2 Words 6 to 49 56 to 99 and 106 to 149 are the event counter for Challenger State Machine which is stated in the DNP3 Specification Supplement to Volume 2 Secure Authentication Version 2 00 Word Offset Current State Description CHO CH1 CH2 0 50 100 Security Idle Wait for Reply Authentication Error Counter 1 51 101 Security Idle Wait for Reply Reserved 2 52 102 Security Idle Wait for Reply Reserved 3 53 103 Security Idle Wait for Reply Reserved 4 54 104 Security Idle Wait for Reply Reserved 5 55 105 Security Idle Wait for Reply Reserved 6 56 106 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Unsolicited Non Critical ASDU 7 57 107 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Non Critical ASDU 8 58 108 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Critical ASDU Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 360 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Word Offset Current State Description CHO CH1 CH2 9 59 109 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Critical ASDU 10 60 110 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Valid Reply 11 61 111 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Invalid Re
264. he Rockwell Utility 388 branch 401 buttons 107 cable pinout MicroLogix controller channel 0 to modem cable 78 88 cables planning routes for DH485 connections 238 selection guide for the AIC 91 96 calling for assistance 212 CE mark 19 20 changing communication configuration 73 changing mode switch position 130 collision avoidance 334 common mode rejection ratio specification 192 common techniques used in this manual 12 communication DeviceNet 96 97 Ethernet 97 communication connections 71 communication options 17 communication protocols ASCII 243 DF1 Full Duplex 231 232 235 243 Ethernet 377 Modbus 243 supported 71 communication scan 401 communications toggle push button using 72 component descriptions 14 1762 expansion 1 0 15 communication cables 16 memory module 14 real time clock 14 configuration errors 210 configure processor with DHCP server 390 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 410 Index configuring Ethernet network 137 IP address 139 configuring the Ethernet channel 384 connecting expansion 1 0 38 connecting the system AIC 88 94 DeviceNet network 96 97 76 82 connecting to DF1 Half Duplex network 80 connecting to networks via Ethernet interface 377 connecting to networks via RS 232 RS 485 interface 231 connections to the Ethernet network 379 contactors bulletin 100 surge suppressors for 44 control profile 402 ControlFLASH error messages 225 firmware upgrade 215 missing or corrupt
265. he battery an electrical arc can WARNING occur This could cause an explosion in hazardous location installations Be sure that the area is nonhazardous before proceeding For Safety information on the handling of lithium batteries including handling and disposal of leaking batteries see Guidelines for Handling Lithium Batteries publication AG 5 4 IMPORTANT When the controller s Battery Low indicator is set displayed as a solid rectangle with the battery wire connector connected you should install a new battery immediately Installing Your Controller 31 Connecting the Battery Wire Connector Follow the procedure below to connect the battery wire connector to the battery connector 1 Insert the replaceable battery wire connector into the controller s battery connector 2 Secure the battery connector wires so that it does not block the 1762 expansion bus connector as shown below Battery compartment Battery 3 99O0009O EIS LZ 1762 1 0 expansion bus connector rum Battery wire connector Battery connector Batte
266. he integer file N7 press the ESC key to return to the Main Menu screen as shown in step 2 Monitoring Double Integer files The LCD allows you to view and change the data value of a double integer file You can access to this functionality via the Monitoring screen of the LCD Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Using the LCD 123 To monitor a double integer file on the LCD you have to specify its file number in the Target User Defined File Number TUF element of the LCD Function File and download your application program to the controller The TUF element can only be changed by a program download The value stored in the TUF element identifies the double integer file with which the LCD will interface Valid double integer files are L9 and L10 through L255 When the LCD reads a valid double integer file number it can access up to 256 words 0 to 255 on the LCD screen The protection bit LCD edit disable in the data file properties of target integer file are used to define the read only or read write privileges for its file Valid file type include Bit Integer Double integer or Float as specified in the TUF element The data protection for its file depends on the setting for LCD Edit Disable If LCD Edit Disable is set to 1 in file properties the corresponding data file is considered read only by the LCD and the Protected message is displayed IMPORTANT Although you cannot change protected data from the LCD keypad t
267. he ladder program relay An electrically operated device that mechanically switches electrical circuits relay logic A representation of the program or other logic in a form normally used for telays restore To download transfer a program from a personal computer to a controller reserved bit A status file location that the user should not read or write to retentive data Information associated with data files timers counters inputs and outputs in a program that is preserved through power cycles RS 232 An standard that specifies electrical mechanical and functional characteristics for serial binary communication circuits A single ended serial communication interface run mode This is an executing mode during which the controller scans or executes the ladder program monitors input devices energizes output devices and acts on enabled I O forces rung Ladder logic is comprised of a set of rungs A rung contains input and output instructions During Run mode the inputs on a rung are evaluated to be true false If a path of true logic exists the outputs are made true If all paths are false the outputs are made false save To upload transfer a program stored in memory from a controller to a personal computer OR to save a program to a computer hard disk scan time The time required for the controller to execute the instructions in the program The scan time may vary depending on the inst
268. he terminal blocks as shown below Then loosen the terminal screw Finger safe cover Because of the potentially high current surges that occur when switching inductive load devices such as motor starters and solenoids the use of some type of surge suppression to protect and extend the operating life of the controllers output contacts is required Switching inductive loads without surge suppression can significantly reduce the life expectancy of relay contacts By adding a suppression device directly across the coil of an inductive device you prolong the life of the output or relay contacts You also reduce the effects of voltage transients and electrical noise from radiating into adjacent systems The following diagram shows an output with a suppression device We recommend that you locate the suppression device as close as possible to the load device DC L1 Suppression VAC DC Device AC or DC Outputs DC COM or L2 If the outputs are DC we recommend that you use an 1N4004 diode for surge suppression as shown below For inductive DC load devices a diode is suitable A 1N4004 diode is acceptable for most applications A surge Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 44 Wiring Your Controller suppressor can also be used See for recommended suppressors As shown below these surge suppression circuits connect directly across the load device 24V DC VAC DC Dut 0 1 2 Rel
269. hen the controller is or was in Executing mode In Series B controllers 0 when the controller is or was in Non Execting mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not exist May be 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file exists 1 RESTART Always 0 Not used 2 COMM_LOST Always 0 Not used 3 REMOTE_FORCED Always 0 Not used 4 LOCAL_FORCED Always 0 Not used 5 CHATTER_FILTER Always 0 Not used 6 STATE Reflects point state of Double Bit Binary Input point Double bit LSB 7 STATE Reflects point state of Double Bit Binary Input point Double bit MSB Object Flags for Binary Output Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not exist May be 1 when the controller is in Executing mode and the configuration file exists 1 RESTART Always 0 Not used 2 COMM_LOST Always 0 Not used 3 REMOTE_FORCED Always 0 Not used 4 LOCAL_FORCED Always 0 Not used 5 reserved Always 0 Not used 6 reserved Always 0 Not used 7 STATE Reflects point state of Binary Output point Object Flags for Counter Bit Offset 0 Name ONLINE Description 0 when the controller is or was in Non Executing mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not exist May b
270. hentication subsystem The value of this parameter is N file only Valid range is 0 7 9 to 255 Default value is 0 See the table for the contents of the data file in the section Diagnostics Default Variation Contig File Number This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers This file number is used to define default variations in a response to a Class 0 poll request Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 270 X Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 The value of this parameter is N file only Valid range is 0 7 9 to 255 Default value is 0 In RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software when this parameter is configured properly you can see a DNP3 Default Variation Config File tree in Channel Configuration Eg Project Help Controller 1 Controller Properties T Processor Status TS Function Files RI IO Configuration he Channel Configuration be Channel Status E DNP3 Default Variation Config File 3 Program Files 50 SYS1 Lap2 DNP3 Default ariation Config File Object Name jinary Input Static Object Binary Input Change Object Binary Output Static Object Double Bit Binary Input Static Object Double Bit Binary Input Change Object 16bits Counter Static Object 32bits Counter Static Object Frozen 16bits Counter Static Object Frozen 32bits Counter Static Object 16bits Counter Change Object 32bits Counter Change Object Frozen 16bit
271. hers as well as the condition of your equipment is of primary importance We recommend reviewing the following safety considerations Hazardous Location Considerations This equipment is suitable for use in Class I Division 2 Groups A B C D or non hazardous locations only The following WARNING statement applies to use in hazardous locations WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD e Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class Division 2 e Do not replace components or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off e Do not connect or disconnect components unless power has been switched off e This product must be installed in an enclosure All cables connected to the product must remain in the enclosure or be protected by conduit or other means e All wiring must comply with N E C article 501 4 b Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 22 Installing Your Controller Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Use only the following communication cables in Class I Division 2 hazardous locations Environment Classification Communication Cables Class Division 2 Hazardous 1761 CBL ACO0 Series C or later Enaronment 1761 CBL AMOO Series C or later 1761 CBL APOO Series C or later 1761 CBL PMO0 2 Series C or later 1761 CBL HM02 Series C or later 2707 NC9 Series C or later 1763 NCO1 Series A or later 1747 CP3 Series Disconnecting Main Power Exp
272. hese packages authorized in this exemption including those in which they were received The Code of Federal Regulations 49 CFR 173 22a relates to the use of packaging authorized under exemptions In part it requires that you must maintain a copy of the exemption at each facility where the packaging is being used in connection with shipment under the exemption Shipment of depleted batteries for disposal may be subject to specific regulation of the countries involved or to regulations endorsed by those countries such as the IATA Articles Regulations of the International Air Transport Association Geneva Switzerland IMPORTANT Regulations for transportation of lithium batteries are periodically revised Refer to http www dot gov for the latest shipping information Replacement Parts 201 Disposal Do not incinerate or dispose of lithium batteries in general trash ATTENTION collection Explosion or violent rupture is possible Batteries should be collected for disposal in a manner to prevent against short circuiting compacting or destruction of case integrity and hermetic seal For disposal batteries must be packaged and shipped in accordance with transportation regulations to a proper disposal site The U S Department of Transportation authorizes shipment of Lithium batteries for disposal by motor vehicle only in regulation 173 1015 of CFR 49 effective January 5 1983 For additional information
273. ication Layer Configuration File types for this object file can be Binary Integer Long or Float data files The file numbers for each DNP3 Object cannot be in conflict with each other Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 281 DNP3 Data Files Relationship between DNP3 object database and MicroLogix data files DNP Objects Micrologix Data Files Object Name Related Maximum File name for Data File Type File Maximum Groups Configurable Number Configurable Index Elements Binary Input Object 1 2 4096 Binary Input Object File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 Double Bit Binary 3 4 2048 Double Bit Binary Input Object File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 Input Object Binary Output Object 10 12 4096 Binary Input Object File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 Counter Object 20 22 256 16 bit Counter Object File Only N file 7 9 to 255 256 32 bit Counter Object File Only L file 9 to 255 Frozen Counter Object 21 23 reflection of reflection of 16 bit Counter Object File erra reflection of 32 bit Counter Object File Was configured Analog Input Object 30 32 256 16 bit Analog Input Object File Only N file 7 9 to 255 256 32 bit Analog Input Object File Only L file 9 to 255 Short Floating Point Analog Input Only F file 8 9 to 255 Object File Analog Output Object 40 41 256 16 bit Analog Output Object File Only N file 256 32 bit Anal
274. icroLogix Data Files and Configuration Files MicroLogix Data Files Configuration Files File Type File Number Maximum Configurable Elements Binary Input File Binary Input Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 Binary Input Online Config File In Series B Double Bit Binary Input File Double Bit Binary Input Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 Double Bit Binary Input Online Config File In Series B Binary Output File Binary Output Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 16 bit Counter File 16 bit Counter Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 16 bit Counter Threshold Config File In Series B Only N file 7 910 255 32 bit Counter File 32 bit Counter Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 32 bit Counter Threshold Config File In Series B Only L file 9 to 255 Frozen 16 bit Counter File Frozen 16 bit Counter Config File Only B file 9 to 255 256 Frozen 32 bit Counter File Frozen 32 bit Counter Config File Only B file 9 to 255 256 16 bit Analog Input File 16 bit Analog Input Config File Only B file 9 to 255 256 16 bit Analog Input Deadband Config File In Only N file 7 9 to 255 Series B 32 bit Analog Input File 32 bit Analog Input Config File Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 32 bit Analog Input Deadband Config File In Only L file 9 to 255 Series B Short Floating Point Analog Short Floating Point Analog Input Config File Only B file 9 to 255 256 input Fila Short Floating Point Ana
275. ified by one of Verified by one of Verified by one of backplane isolation the following the following the following the following the following dielectric tests dielectric tests dielectric tests dielectric tests dielectric tests 1517 acfor1sor 1200 1 1200Vacfor1sor 1200Vacfor2sor 1200V ac for 1 s or 2145V dc for 1 s 1697V dc for 1s 1697V dc for 1s 1697V dc for 2 s 1697V dc for 1s 132V ac working 75V dc working 75V dc working 75V dc working 75V dc working voltage IEC Class 2 voltage Class 2 voltage IEC Class 2 voltage IEC Class2 voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced reinforced reinforced reinforced reinforced insulation insulation insulation insulation insulation Vendor 1 0 code 1 Product type code 7 Product code 114 96 97 99 98 1 Sinking Sourcing Inputs Sourcing sinking describes the current flow between the 1 0 module and the field device Sourcing 1 0 circuits supply source current to sinking field devices Sinking 1 0 ci sinking field devices Field devices connected to the positive side V of the field supply are sourcing field devices 2 3 Output Specifications Only applicable to Series 1 0 modules Refer to Publication 1762 IN10 MicroLogix 1762 1016 DC Input Module Installation Instructions for the derating chart cuits are driven by a current sourcing field device Field devices connected to the negative side DC Common of the field power supply are
276. ified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second 265V AC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Input Group to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1100V AC for 1 second or 1697V DC for 1 second 75V DC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Output Group to Backplane Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second 265 Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Output Group to Output Group Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second Isolation 265V AC Working Voltage basic insulation 150V Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Working Voltage for 1766 L16BXB A Description Recommendation Input Group to Backplane Isolation Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1100V AC for 1 second or 1697V DC for 1 second a 75V DC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation FET Output Group to Backplane Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1100V AC for 1 second or 1697V DC for 1 second isolation 75V DC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Relay Output Group to Backplane Verified by one of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second 265 AC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforce
277. ile B31 bin Binary Output Config File E a D O AOA 28 c O O 060000070 2 2 8 FS O O O O O O O D oca 8 AO A 8 4 oe op gt ocu o O O O O o _ a a o o o 0000005 Oa O a a co 931 0 0 Radix Binary M Symbol Columns fi 5 Desc 5 Properties Usag Help Binary Command Control relay output block CROB The MicroLogix 1400 has three control models for Binary Output Control They are Activation model Complementary latch model and Complementary two output model For the Complementary two output model two bits are required to control this model in the Binary output object The point index is different than in the Activation or Complementary latch model The point index varies as shown in the table below The maximum number of Binary Output index for Complementary two output model is 2048 Binary Output Activation model or Complementary two output Database Index Complementary latch model model 0 BO Index 0 BO Close Index 0 1 BO Index 1 BO Trip Index 0
278. ime If the power source cannot supply this inrush current the source voltage may sag momentarily Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 24 Installing Your Controller Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 The only effect of limited inrush current and voltage sag on the MicroLogix 1400 is that the power supply capacitors charge more slowly However the effect of a voltage sag on other equipment should be considered For example a deep voltage sag may reset a computer connected to the same power source The following considerations determine whether the power source must be required to supply high inrush current The power up sequence of devices in a system The amount of the power source voltage sag if the inrush current cannot be supplied The effect of voltage sag on other equipment in the system If the entire system is powered up at the same time a brief sag in the power source voltage typically will not affect any equipment Loss of Power Source The power supply is designed to withstand brief power losses without affecting the operation of the system The time the system is operational during power loss is called program scan hold up time after loss of power The duration of the power supply hold up time depends on the type and state of the I O but is typically between 10 milliseconds and 3 seconds When the duration of power loss reaches this limit the power supply signals the processor that it can no lon
279. in network byte order The internet address must 0 undefined read write be specified to connect to the TCP IP network Subnet Mask The MicroLogix 1400 subnet mask in network byte order The Subnet Mask is used to 0 undefined read write interpret IP addresses when the internet is divided into subnets A Subnet Mask of all zeros indicates that no subnet mask has been configured In this case the controller assumes a Subnet Mask of 255 255 255 0 Gateway The address of a gateway in network byte order that provides connection to another IP 0 undefined read write Address network A Gateway Address of all zeros indicates that no gateway has been configured In this case the controller assumes a Gateway Address of aaa bbb ccc 001 where aaa bbb ccc are the first three octets of the configured IP Address Default The default domain name can have the following formats NULL read write Domain Name a b c a b or a where a b c must start with a letter end with a letter or digit and undefined have as interior characters only letters digits or hyphens Maximum length is 63 characters Primary Name This is the IP address of the computer acting as the local Ethernet network Primary 0 undefined read write Server Domain Name System DNS server Secondary This is the IP address of the computer acting as the local Ethernet network Secondary 0 undefined read write Name Server Domain Name System DNS server BOOTP Enable
280. ines E LCU m Customized Boot Logo ASCII File SCD Start with Customized Display 0 Data Input Timeout of LCD 0 LDN LCD Instruction Job Done ERR LCD Display Operation Error Bit L ERN LCD Module Operation Error Num L JOG Jog data date L TMIN Trimpot Low Value L Trimpot High Value L Trimpot 0 Data Trimpot 1 Data TMIN TMAX L WND Instruction Display Window OK OK key in Customized Display LCD 0 CBL Integer 9 Follow these steps to view and change the data values of the double integer file L9 Using the LCD 125 On the Main Menu screen select Monitoring by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad I O Status Honitor ing Hode Switch Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The File Number prompt is displayed B I II REMOTE File Num 989 Data Tvpe L Press OK to edi If Integer is selected as shown in step 2 press the OK key If not selected press the Down key to select it and then press the OK key The current data value ON of the L9 0 word is displayed Note that the target word 0 which is at the right L9 is flashing which means the cursor is at the target word position B IE HEHOTE 9 8 BHBBHBHBBH UnProtected We will change the data value of the L9 0 word to the neg
281. information field Configuration Errors 010 Module specific error codes are indicated in the extended error field These error codes correspond to options that you can change directly For example the input range or input filter selection Extended Error Information Field Check the extended error information field when a non zero value is present in the module error field See Extended Error Codes for 1762 IF2OF2 on page 211 TIP If no errors are present in the module error field the extended error information field is set to zero Hardware Errors General or module specific hardware errors are indicated by module error code 2 Configuration Errors If you set the fields in the configuration file to invalid or unsupported values the module ignores the invalid configuration generates a non critical error and keeps operating with the previous configuration The table below lists the configuration error codes defined for the module Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Troubleshooting Your System 211 Error Codes Extended Error Codes for 1762 IF20F2 Error Type Hex Module Extended Error Error Description Equivalent Error Code Information Code Binary Binary No Error X000 000 0 0000 0000 No error General Common X200 001 0 0000 0000 General hardware error no additional information Hardware Error 001 0 0000 0001 Power up reset state Hardware Specific X210 001 0 0001 0000 Re
282. ing Receive operation 8 ERR_SOCKET_UNLISTEN Socket error during Unlisten operation 9 ERR_SOCKET_UNBIND Socket error during Unbind operation 10 ERR_SOCKET_UNACCEPT Socket error during Unaccept operation 11 ERR_SOCKET_DISCONNECT Socket error during Disconnect operation 12 ERR_SOCKET_DELETE Socket error during Delete operation 3 14 Reserved 15 ERR_QUE_FULL Firmware use only 16 ERR_BUFFER_ALLOC Firmware use only Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 358 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Value DEC Mnemonic Description 17 ERR_PACKET_ALLOC Firmware use only 18 ERR_PACKET_RELEASE Firmware use only 19 29 Reserved 30 ERR_CONN_REJECTED Incoming Connection is rejected by the IP address validation 31 ERR_INVALID_HEADER_CRC Received packet header has invalid CRC 32 ERR INVALID HEADER Received packet header has invalid packet format 33 ERR INVALID PACKET CRC Received packet has invalid CRC 34 ERR BAD PACKET RECEIVED Received packet is unknown 35 ERR PACKET REJECTED Received packet is rejected 36 ERR CONNECTION BROKEN The connection has been broken for some reason 37 49 Reserved 50 ERR INVALID IP ADDRESS Target IP Address is invalid 51 ERR INVALID PORT Target Port Number is invalid 52 Reserved For the elements of the DNP3 Slave Application Layer diagnostic counter element offset 60 to 74 the counter values available with the structured d
283. ing Requirements Wiring Your Controller This chapter describes how to wire your controller and expansion I O Topics include wire requirements using surge suppressors grounding the controller wiring diagrams sinking and sourcing wiring diagrams controller I O wiring wiring your analog channels expansion I O wiring Wiring Recommendation ATTENTION Before you install and wire any device disconnect power to the controller system Calculate the maximum possible current in each power and common ATTENTION bibe wire Observe all electrical codes dictating the maximum current allowable for each wire size Current above the maximum ratings may cause wiring to overheat which can cause damage United States Only If the controller is installed within a potentially hazardous environment all wiring must comply with the requirements stated in the National Electrical Code 501 10 b Allow for at least 50 mm 2 in between I O wiring ducts or terminal strips and the controller Route incoming power to the controller by a path separate from the device wiring Where paths must cross their intersection should be perpendicular TIP Do not run signal or communications wiring and power wiring in the same conduit Wires with different signal characteristics should be routed by separate paths Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 42 Wiring Your Controller Publication 1766
284. inuous voltage that can be applied at the terminals with respect to earth ground og input up to the maximum Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 190 Specifications Input Specifications Specification Number of inputs 1762 IF20F2 2 differential unipolar 1762 IF4 4 differential bipolar 1762 IR4 4 1762 IT4 4 input channels plus 1 CJC sensor Update time typical 2 5ms 130 250 290 450 Input filter and NA 530 ms selectable cofiguration dependent A D converter type Successive Successive Delta Sigma Delta Sigma approximation approximation Common mode voltage 27V 27V NA 10V range Common mode 55dBat50and60Hz gt 55 9 50 60 7 110dBat 50 Hz with 10 5110 dB at 50 Hz with 10 rejection or 50 Hz filter or 50 Hz filter gt 110 dB at 60 Hz with 10 gt 110 dB at 60 Hz with 10 or 60 Hz filter or 60 Hz filter Non linearity in percent 0 129 4 0 12 0 05 NA full scale Typical overall accuracy 0 55 full scale at 0 32 full scale at 0 5 C F for Pt 385 NA 20 65 C 20 65 C 4 0 3 full scale at 25 0 24 full scale at 25 C Input impedance Voltage Terminal 200 KQ Voltage Terminal 200 KO gt 10 MQ gt 10 Current Terminal 250 Q Current Terminal 275 Q Current input protection 32 mA 32 mA NA NA Voltage input protection 30V 30V NA NA Channel diagnostics Over or under range
285. ions Specifications for Outputs in Hazardous Locations Class 1 Division 2 Groups A B C D Relay and FET Outputs Description 1766 L32AWA A 1766 L32BXB A 1766 L32BWA A Maximum controlled load 1440 VA 1080 VA Maximum Continuous Current Current per channel and group 2 5 A per channel 2 5 A per channel common 8A max channel 8 11 common Current per at 150V 28 A or total of per point controller max loads whichever is less at 240V 20 A or total of per point max loads whichever is less Relay Outputs 1766 L32AWA A 1766 L32BWA A 1766 L32BXB A Description Turn On Time Turn Off Time 10 msec maximum Load current 10 mA minimum 1 Scan time dependent Maximum Volts Amperes Amperes Volt Amperes Make Break Break 2AVAC 5 075A 25 1800 180VA 120V AC 15 0 1 5 25A 1800 VA 180 VA 250V DC 0 11A 1 0A 28 125V DC 0 22 1 0 28 VA Input Power Required at 24V DC Watts x Specifications 175 Specifications for Outputs in Non Hazardous Locations only Relay and FET Outputs Description 1766 L32AWA A 1766 L32BXB A 1766 L32BWA A Maximum controlled load 1440 VA 1080 VA Maximum Continuous Current Current per channel and group 2 5 A per channel 2 5 A per channel common 8A max channel 8 11 common 28 A or total of per point loads whichever is less Current per at 150
286. ipment Use the System Loading Worksheet on page 397 to calculate your controller configuration Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 g 396 System Loading and Heat Dissipation System Loading Example Calculations Current Loading Calculating the Current for Expansion 1 0 Catalog Number n A B nxA nxB Number of Device Current Requirements Calculated Current Modules max at 5V DC mA at 24V DC mA at5V DC mA at 24V DC mA 1762 1 8 2 50 0 100 0 1762 1 4 40 50 1762 IF20F2 40 105 1762 108 50 0 i 1762 1016 70 2 0 1762 10327 170 0 1762 1984 40 50 1762 14 40 50 1762 0A8 115 0 1762 0B8 115 0 1762 0B16 175 0 1762 0B32T 175 0 1762 0F4 40 165 1762 0V32T 175 0 1762 0W8 2 80 90 160 180 1762 0W16 140 2 1802 1762 OX6l 110 110 1762 1080 6 110 80 Total Modules 7 maximum 4 Subtotal 260 180 1 Refer to your expansion 1 0 Installation Instructions for Current Requirements not listed in this table 2 Only applicable to Series 1 0 modules Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 System Loading and Heat Dissipation 397 Validating the System The example systems shown in the tables below are verified to be acceptable configurations The systems are valid because Calculated Current Values lt Maximum Allowable Current Values Calculated System Loading lt Maximum Allowable System Loading Validating Systems using 1766
287. is displayed as shown below 000006 KeyIn Hode Cfg Cfg IF ENET is selected press the OK key Otherwise select ENET Cfg using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key The Ethernet Configuration screen is displayed Press the OK key on the LCD Status menu 000000 ENET Cfg Status IP Address Using the LCD 139 5 When an IP address is not yet assigned to your controller only the MAC address that is assigned to your controller represented as XXXXXXXXXXXX below is displayed A MAC address is a 12 digit hexadecimal number Your controller ships with a unique MAC address assigned in the factory You can identify the MAC address of your controller by opening the expansion module cover on your controller 000006 ENET Mode bootp HAC ahaa 6 When IP address is assigned to your controller both the MAC and IP addresses of your controller are displayed as shown below In this example the MAC address is represented as XXXXXXXXXXXX The IP address is represented as XXX XXX xxx xxx where each xxx is a decimal number between 0 255 000000 ENET Mode bootp H L KAA 7 Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Set Menu screen as shown in step 2 Configuring the IP Address The IP Address screen of the LCD displays Ethernet network configura
288. isplay in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro software as below 3 Channel Status loi x Channel 0 Channel 1 ft 3 Channel 2 DNP3 Slave Application Layer Application Layer Error Code Received Confirm FC Counter 0 Application Layer Error Count Received Read FC Counter FClastemorz Received Write FC Counter 0 Last Trans IIN in response I Received Etc FC Counter I Data file Num last error request Trans Solicited Res FC Counter Data element Num last error request Cmn Trans Unsolicited Res FC Counter Transport Layer Error Code 0 Number of events to be reported 0 Transport Layer Error Count 0 FC Function Code Res Response Trans Transmitted Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 359 If the data file is not configured in the parameter Diagnostic File Number of the Chan 1 DNP3 configuration the Channel 1 Ext dialog box will be shown as below Z channel Status io Channel 0 Channel 1 XE Channel 2 No Diagnostic File Defined for this channel Diagnostics for Secure Authentication This feature is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Counters in DNP3 Slave Secure Authentication subsystem are logged in the Data File The data file is configured in the parameter Diagnostic File Number in Secure Authentication The following table shows t
289. itor via the LCD Most of the steps outlined in this section are similar to those found in Monitoring Double Integer files on page 122 Howevet you will not be able to edit floating point files from the LCD Protected The Protected message is displayed on the LCD for floating point files TIP MicroLogix 1400 Series A controllers display an Unprotected message but you will not be able to edit the corresponding data file Monitor System Status Files In this section this assumption regarding the application program is made The TUF element of the LCD Function File is set to 2 This specifies the system status file S2 as the target file to monitor via the LCD Using the LCD 129 The format string on the third line is displayed as decimal hexadecimal or binary for each word element depending on what each elements means For more information see the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 01 Using the Mode Switch The MicroLogix 1400 provides the controller mode switch on the LCD The possible positions of the mode switch are PROGRAM REMOTE and RUN You can change mode switch position using the Mode Switch screen on the LCD as shown below In this example the mode switch position is set to REMOTE 000006 Program Remote Run All the built in LCD screens except the Boot Message screen display current mode switch position at their t
290. k Protocol DNP3 DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue 373 Group Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num dec hex Codes dec hex 23 5 Frozen Counter Event 32 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index with flag and time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 23 6 Frozen Counter Event 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index with flag and time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 30 0 Analog Input Any Variation 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 30 1 Analog Input 32 bit with 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 06 no range or all 30 2 Analog Input 16 bit with 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 06 no range or all 30 3 Analog Input 32 bit without 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 06 no range or all 30 4 Analog Input 16 bit without 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 06 no range or all 30 5 Analog Input Single prec 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop flt pt with flag 06 no range or all 32 0 Analog Input Event Any 1 read 06 no range or all
291. l 129 response 00 01 start stop format 1 2 Binary Input With 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop flags 2 0 Binary Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all Any Variation 07 08 limited qty 2 1 Binary Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Without time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 2 2 Binary Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index With absolute time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 2 3 Binary Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index With relative time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 3 0 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all Any Variation 3 1 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop Packed format 3 2 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop With flags 4 0 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all Event Any Variation 07 08 limited qty 4 1 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Event Without time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 4 2 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Event With absolute 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp time 4 3 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 1
292. l Relay on page 25 for information on MCR wiring in output circuits 1766 L32BWA 1766 L32AWA 1766 L32BXB 1766 L32BWAA 1766 L32AWAA 1766 L32BXBA Wiring Diagrams In the following diagrams lower case alphabetic subscripts are appended to common terminal connections to indicate that different power sources may be used for different isolated groups if desired 1766 L32AWA L32AWAA Input Wiring Diagram COMO INO INi IN2 IN3 COM 1 INA INS ING INZ COM 2 INS INQ IN10 IN11 1766 L32AWAA only COM COM 3 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 IN17 IN18 IN19 ANA 1 0 1 1 1 2 1V3 1 NOT USED terminals are not intended for use as connection points Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Wiring Your Controller 51 1766 L32BWA L32BWAA Sinking Input Wiring Diagram 0 DCb 0 24V DC Sensor po PeF DCa DCb DCc DC OUT ev DC DC COMO INO IN1 IN2 143 COM 1 INA IN5 ING 147 2 IN8 INQ IN10 IN11 DCd DCd DC COM COM3 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 IN17 IN18 IN19 ANA IVO 4 1 1 1 2 1 3 1766 L32BWA L32BWAA Sourcing Input Wiring Diagram 24V DC DCa DCb DCc Sensor Power C DC DCa DCb DCc DC OUT T 24V DC DC DC COMO INO IN1 IN2 INS COM 1 IN4 INS ING IN7 COM 2 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 1766 L32BWAA only DC COM COM3 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 IN16 IN17 IN18 IN19 ANA 1 0 IV1 IV2 4 IV3 1766 L32BXB L32BXBA Sinking Input Wiring Diagram DCa
293. l z Columns 5 After changing the data value of a target double word press the OK key to apply the changes or press the ESC key to discard the changes 11 we will view an example of the data value of a protected property If LCD Edit Disable is set to checked enable the Protected message will be displayed and this data file cannot be edited by the LCD Data File Properties E xj General File 9 Type L Name Desc Elements 256 Last S335 Attributes Debug Skip When Deleting Unused Memory Scope Global C Local File LAD 2 MAIN_PROG Protection Constant C Static None Memory Module Download Web View Disable BHBBBH138H Protected Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 128 Using the LCD Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 12 Try to move the cursor to the data value position by pressing the OK key Because this double integer file is protected you will find that the cursor even does not move to the data value position 13 If you have finished monitoring the double integer file L9 press the ESC key to return to the File Number question screen as shown in step 2 Monitor Floating point Files In this section this assumption regarding the application program is made The TUF element of the LCD Function File is set to 8 This specifies the floating point file F8 as the target file to mon
294. ld be able to see the data in ASCII data files Make sure that the second element file size in the first ASCII data file is 0x0440 1088 bytes in hexadecimal value After a power cycle you should be able to see the customized boot logo on your LCD display For more information on how to create and use a customized Startup screen refer to the LCD Function File described in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 001 After the default Startup screen or your customized Startup screen is displayed for 3 seconds either the default screen the I O Status screen is displayed by default or a user defined screen is displayed if your application uses a custom default screen Using the LCD 105 Main Menu and Default Screen The Main menu consists of five menu items I O Status Monitoring Mode Switch User Display and Advanced Set LCD Main Menu 000000 PISO Status Monitoring Mode Switch RU 000000 bUser Display Acvanced Set RU Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 106 Using the LCD Main Menu Items Menu Item Description For details refer to 1 0 Status Displays the I O Status screen which shows the 1 0 status 1 0 Status page 109 of the embedded digital 1 0 Monitoring Allows you to view and change the data value of a bit and an Monitor User Defined Target Files on page 111 integer file Monitoring Integer Fil
295. ld only be used to power input devices e For 1766 L32BXB and 1766 L32BXBA controllers the VDC NEUT or common terminal of the power supply is also connected to chassis ground internally This product is intended to be mounted to a well grounded mounting surface such as a metal panel Refer to the Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines publication 1770 4 1 for additional information Additional grounding connections from the mounting tab or DIN rail if used are not required unless the mounting surface cannot be grounded TIP Use all four mounting positions for panel mounting installation Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 46 X Wiring Your Controller Wiring Diagrams Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 QO 44519 Grounding stamping ATTENTION Remove the protective debris strip before applying power to the controller Failure to remove the strip may cause the controller to overheat The following illustrations show the wiring diagrams for the MicroLogix 1400 controllers Controllers with DC inputs can be wired as either sinking or sourcing inputs Sinking and sourcing does not apply to AC inputs Refer to Sinking and Sourcing Wiring Diagrams on page 3 50 The controller terminal block layouts are shown below The shading on the labels indicates how the terminals are grouped TIP This symbol denotes a prote
296. lear for each bit by the controller The rules below are also applied to Event data When the controller is in Non Executing mode the object flag is always all 0 When the controller is in Executing mode and there is no configuration file only the Online flag in the object flag is set When the controller is in Executing mode and there is a configuration file the flags in the object flag are set according to the upper byte of the configuration files Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE In Series A controllers 0 when the controller is or was in Non Execting mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode In Series B controllers 0 when the controller is or was in Non Execting mode 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file does not exist May be 1 when the controller is or was in Executing mode and the configuration file exists 1 RESTART Always 0 Not used 2 COMM_LOST Always 0 Not used 3 REMOTE_FORCED Always 0 Not used 4 LOCAL_FORCED Always 0 Not used 5 CHATTER_FILTER Always 0 Not used 6 reserved Always 0 Not used 7 STATE Reflects point state of Binary Input point Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Object Flags for Double Binary Input Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 319 Bit Offset Name Description 0 ONLINE In Series A controllers 0 when the controller is or was in Non Execting mode 1 w
297. led Unchecked Unsolicited Response is disabled for Class 1 events To prevent overflowing of the event buffer DNP3 Master should poll for Class 1 events When the selection is Enabled Checked Unsolicited Response is enabled for Class 1 events Enable Unsolicited For Class2 Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked Unsolicited Response is disabled for Class 2 events prevent overflowing of the event buffer DNP3 Master should poll for Class 2 events When the selection is Enabled Checked Unsolicited Response is enabled for Class 2 events Enable Unsolicited For Class3 Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked Unsolicited Response is disabled for Class 3 events prevent overflowing of the event buffer DNP3 Master should poll for Class 3 events Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 261 When the selection is Enabled Checked Unsolicited Response is enabled for Class 3 events Send Initial Unsolicited Null Response On Start Up Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 does not send Unsolicited NULL Response with RESTART bit on startup When the selectio
298. lement 5 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r DCE r C1 C0 r reserved C1 C0 Class level 0 to 3 TE Trigger Event for the point In Series B DCE Disable Change of state Event for the point In Series B For other Inputs Element _0 for data index 0 F7 F0 Object Flags FLAG7 FLAG6 FLAG5 LOCAL_FORCED REMOTE_FORCED COMM_LOST RESTART ONLINE Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 For Counter type data you can configure Threshold information in the Configuration file Each element can be configured to the threshold value for each point counter event is generated if the absolute value of the difference between the present value of a counter point and the value that was most recently queued as an event for that point exceeds the threshold value that was configured in this file Related Configuration File Numbers 16 bit Counter Threshold Config File Number In Series B Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 285 32 bit Counter Threshold Config File Number In Series Word Offet Description Element 0 Threshold for point 0 Element 1 Threshold for point 1 Element 2 Threshold for point 2 Element 3 Threshold for point 3 Element 4 Threshold for point 4 Element 5 Threshold for point 5 For Analog Input type data you can configure Deadband information in the Configuration file Each element can be configured to the deadband value for each point An analog input event is generated if
299. ler The controller can be mounted to EN50022 35x7 5 or EN50022 35x15 DIN rails DIN rail mounting dimensions are shown below 44518 Dimension Height A 90 mm 3 5 in B 27 5 mm 1 08 in C 27 5 mm 1 08 in Follow this procedure to install your controller on the DIN rail 1 Mount your DIN rail Make sure that the placement of the controller on the DIN rail meets the recommended spacing requirements see Controller and Expansion I O Spacing on page 32 Refer to the mounting template inside the back cover of this document 2 Close the DIN latch if it is open 3 Hook the top slot over the DIN rail 4 While pressing the controller down against the top of the rail snap the bottom of the controller into position 5 Leave the protective debris shield attached until you are finished wiring the controller and any other devices To remove your controller from the DIN rail 1 Place a flat blade screwdriver in the DIN rail latch at the bottom of the controller 2 Holding the controller pry downward on the latch until the latch locks in the open position Installing Your Controller 35 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the second DIN rail latch 4 Unhook the top of the DIN rail slot from the rail aT y CU open closed o Jo
300. ler but are similar Mapping is required between DNP3 data files and MicroLogix 1400 data files Overview DNP3 Data objects that are implemented in the MicroLogix 1400 controller are listed below DNP3 Binary Input Object DNP3 Double Bit Binary Input Object DNP3 Binary Output Object DNP3 Counter Object DNP3 Frozen Counter Object D D D NP3 Analog Input Object NP3 Analog Output Object NP3 BCD Object DNP3 Data Set Object Series B controllers only Some of objects are divided into several Object files to map data files in the MicroLogix 1400 controller Counter Object 16bit and 32bit Counter Object File Analog Input Object 16bit and 32bit Analog Input Object File and Short Floating Point Analog Input Object File Analog Output Object 16bit and 32bit Analog Output Object File and Short Floating Point Analog Output Object File Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 279 For the MicroLogix 1400 Series A controllers Generel CharrelO Channel 1 Channel2 DNP3 Slave Data Link Layer Channel for Unsolciled Response chano M Acrlication Laver Eneble Unsolicited On Stait Up Sendlritial U nsoicited On Start Up Eneble Unsolciled Fer Class Sere Enable Unsolciled Fer Clare aia m Ereble Unsolciled Fer Class3 Jl ronizalion Responce Size 28 _ Time Synchronization Interval fel rrins 0 Cerfimetion Timeout x1 ms 10000 Number of Ratiiee
301. les replaces the ladder program in this section For more details see DNP3 Configuration Files Reporting Event By Polled Response When a DNP3 Master sends a poll to read Class events any events logged to the event buffer will be reported in the polled response When using both Channel 0 and Channel 2 Serial ports for DNP3 communication event polling requests should be sent to one Channel at a time This avoids mis reporting of events to different DNP3 Masters on different Channels For example Master A and Master B are connected to Channel 0 and Channel 2 respectively and 5000 events are logged in the event buffer Master A sends an event polling request and only 50 events can be fit in an application layer fragment The first 50 events are sent to Master A and the next 50 events may be sent to Master B instead Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 332 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Reporting Event By Unsolicited Response To initiate and send Unsolicited Responses to a DNP3 Master the parameters below should be configured correctly For more details see DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration Parameters on page 260 Master 4 0 Channel for Unsolicited Response Enable Unsolicited On Start Up Enable Unsolicited For Class1 Enable Unsolicited For Class2 Enable Unsolicited For Class3 Send Initial Unsolicited On Start Up Number of Class1 Events
302. lines that are typically leased from the local phone company The dedicated lines may be in a point to point topology supporting Full Duplex communications between two modems in a multi drop topology supporting Half Duplex communications between three or more modems DH 485 Communication Protocol Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface 235 radio modems Radio modems may be implemented in a point to point topology supporting either Half Duplex or Full Duplex communications or in a multi drop topology supporting Half Duplex communications between three or more modems MicroLogix 1400 also supports DF1 Radio Modem protocol line drivers Line drivers also called short haul modems do not actually modulate the serial data but rather condition the electrical signals to operate reliably over long transmission distances up to several miles Line drivers are available in Pull Duplex and Half Duplex models Allen Bradley s AIC Advanced Interface Converter is a Half Duplex line driver that converts an RS 232 electrical signal into an RS 485 electrical signal increasing the signal transmission distance from 50 to 4000 feet 8000 feet when bridged For point to point Full Duplex modem connections that do not require any modem handshaking signals to operate use DF1 Full Duplex protocol with no handshaking For point to point Full Duplex modem connections that require RTS CTS handshaking use DF1 Full Duplex protocol with
303. litter Programming the MicroLogix 1400 controller is done using RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Revision 8 10 00 or later for Series A controllers and 8 30 00 or later for Series B controllers Communication cables for programming are available separately from the controller and software The MicroLogix 1400 controllers provide three communications ports an isolated combination RS 232 485 communication port Channel 0 an Ethernet port Channel 1 and a non isolated RS 232 communication port Channel 2 The Channel 0 and Channel 2 ports on the MicroLogix 1400 can be connected to the following operator interfaces personal computers etc using DF1 Full Duplex point to point a DH 485 network a DF1 Radio Modem network a DF1 half duplex network as an Master or Slave a Modbus network as RTU Master or RTU Slave an ASCII network a DeviceNet network as a slave or peer using a DeviceNet Interface catalog number 1761 NET DNI an Ethernet network using the Ethernet Interface module catalog number 1761 NET ENI or 1761 NET ENIW a DNP3 network as a Slave When connecting to RS 485 network using DH 485 DF1 Half Duplex Master Slave Modbus RTU Master Slave or DNP3 Slave protocols the MicroLogix 1400 can be connected directly via Channel 0 without an Advanced Interface Converter catalog number 1761 NET AIC The Channel 0 combo port provides both RS 232 and RS 485 isolated connections The approptiate
304. llers FC AUTHENTICATION REQUEST FC Byte 0x21 33 Authentication Request No Resp Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 271 This function code is used by the master to send authentication messages when no return response is required This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers FC RESPONSE FC Byte 0x81 129 Response All responses except for Unsolicited Response messages use this function code FC UNSOLICITED RESPONSE FC Byte 0x82 130 Unsolicited Response Unsolicited Responses always use this function code regardless of which DNP3 objects are included FC_AUTHENTICATION_RESPONSE FC Byte 0x83 131 Authentication Response This function code is used to issue authentication messages to the master This applies only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Internal Indications Internal Indication bits are set under the following conditions of the MicroLogix 1400 controllers IIN1 0 ALL STATIONS This bit is set when an all stations message is received IIN1 1 CLASS 1 EVENTS This bit is set when Class 1 event data is available IIN1 2 CLASS 2 EVENTS This bit is set when Class 2 event data is available IIN1 3 CLASS 3 EVENTS This bit is set when Class 3 event data is available IIN1 4 NEED TIME This bit is set when Time synchronization is required IIN1 5 LOCAL CONTROL This bit is set when the controller is in Non Executing mode II
305. llow the procedure below to ensure proper replaceable battery installation 1 Insert a battery into the battery pocket with wires facing up 2 Insert the battery wire connector into the battery connector 3 Secure the battery connector wires around the 1762 expansion bus connector as shown below Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 198 Replacement Parts Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Battery compartment Battery 1762 1 0 expansion CA bus connector XQ B gt Battery wire connector Battery connector Battery wires D f 44522 Replacement Parts 199 Battery Handling Follow the procedure below to ensure proper battery operation and reduce personnel hazards Use only for the intended operation Do not ship or dispose of cells except according to recommended procedures Do not ship on passenger aircraft ATTENTION e Do not charge the batteries An explosion could result or the cells could overheat causing burns e Do not open puncture crush or otherwise mutilate the batteries A possibility of an explosion exists and or toxic corrosive and flammable liquids would be exposed e Do not incinerate or expose the batteries to high temperatures Do not attempt to solder batteries An explosion could result e Do not short positive and negative terminals together Excessive heat can build up and cause severe
306. log Input Deadband Only F file 8 9 to 255 Config File In Series B 16 bit Analog Output File 16 bit Analog Output Config File In Series B Only B file 3 910 255 256 32 bit Analog Output File 32 bit Analog Output Config File In Series B Only B file 3 910 255 256 Short Floating Point Analog Short Floating Point Analog Output Config File In Only B file 3 9 to 255 256 Output File Series B Small BCD File Small BCD Class Config File Only B file 3 910 255 256 For Binary Input Double Bit Binary Input and Small BCD type data you can configure Class information in the Configuration file The lower 2 bits in the elements of the Configuration files are the configuration of Class information to the relative objects Other bits are reserved Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Related Configuration Files Binary Input Config File Number Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 283 Double Bit Binary Input Config File Number Bit Offset 15 14 113 112 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Element 0 r r r r r r r r r C1 CO Element 1 r r r r r r r r C1 CO Element 2 r r r r r r r C1 CO Element 3 r r r r r r r r r C1 CO Element 4 r r r r r r r r r C1 CO Element 5 r r r r r r r C1 CO reserved C1 C0 Class level 0 to 3 For Binary Input Element 0
307. losion Hazard Do not replace components connect equipment or disconnect equipment unless power has been switched off The main power disconnect switch should be located where operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it In addition to disconnecting electrical power all other sources of power pneumatic and hydraulic should be de energized before working on a machine or process controlled by a controller Safety Circuits WARNING Explosion Hazard Do not connect or disconnect connectors while circuit is live Circuits installed on the machine for safety reasons like overtravel limit switches stop push buttons and interlocks should always be hard wired directly to the master control relay These devices must be wired in series so that when any one device opens the master control relay is de energized thereby removing power to the machine Never alter these circuits to defeat their function Serious injury or machine damage could result Installing Your Controller 23 Power Considerations Power Distribution There are some points about power distribution that you should know e The master control relay must be able to inhibit all machine motion by removing power to the machine I O devices when the relay is de energized It is recommended that the controller remain powered even when the master control relay is de energized e If you are using a DC power supply interrupt the load si
308. m 343 Stop s b ht Dee EY 344 ae isc vs e e ro A 344 Diagnostics for Ethernet Channel Channel 1 352 Diagnostics for Secure 359 Function Odes ae E 361 Implementation Table ON PORRO n A 364 Appendix G MicroLogix 1400 Controllers and Ethernet Communication 3TT MicroLogix 1400 Performance Considerations 378 MicroLogix 1400 and PC Connections to the Ethernet aov 379 Ethernet Network 379 Connecting an Ethernet switch on the Ethernet Network 379 cusa Ub Ha 380 Ethernet Connections 25 voee LR Pctri teat end 382 Duplicate IP address 383 Configuring Ethernet Channel on the MicroLogix 1400 384 Configuration Using RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro Programming DORADO niin dies hate PE ERR fidus du og 386 Configuration Via BOOT Ps Ae wee today 386 Using the Rockwell BOOTP DHCP 388 Using a DHCP Server To Configure Your 390 Using Subnet Masks and 390 Manually Configuring Channel 1 for Controllers on 391 MicroLogix 1400 Embedded Web Server 392 Appendix System Loading Calculations
309. mA at24V DC mA 1762 1 8 50 0 1762 1 4 40 50 1762 IF20F2 40 105 1762 108 50 0 1762 1016 70 0 1762 1032T 170 0 1762 IR4 40 50 1762 14 40 50 1762 0 8 115 0 1762 0B8 115 0 1762 0B16 175 0 1762 0B32T 175 0 1762 0F4 40 165 1762 0V32T 175 0 1762 0W8 80 90 1762 0W16 140 2 180 2 1762 0 6 10 110 1762 1080 6 10 80 Total Modules 7 maximum Subtotal 1 Refer to your expansion 1 0 Installation Instructions for Current Requirements not listed in this table 2 Only applicable to Series B 1 0 modules Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 System Loading and Heat Dissipation 399 Validating Systems using 1766 L32AWA or 1766 L32BXB Maximum Allowable Values Calculated Values Current Current Subtotal from Table 1225 mA at 5V DC 1155 mA at 24V DC mA at 5V DC mA at 24V DC System Loading System Loading mA x 5 mA x 24V mW mW mW 33 845 W W Validating Systems using 1766 L32BWA Maximum Allowable Values Calculated Values Current for Devices Connected to the 24 DC Sensor Sum of all sensor currents Supply 250 mA at 24V DC mA at 24V DC Current for MicroLogix Accessories and Expansion 1 0 Current Subtotal from Table 1225 mA at 5V DC 1155 mA at 24V DC mA at 5 V DC mA at 24V DC System Loading System Loading mA x 24V mA x 5V mA x 24V mW mW mW mW 39 845 W W Calculating Heat Use the following table when you need to determine the hea
310. mary Name Server Secondary Name Server Protocol Control BOOTP Enable DHCP Enable Msg Connection Timeout x 1m5 15000 SNMP ServerEnable SMTP Client Enable Msg Reply Timeout x 1mS 2000 HTTP Server Enable Inactivity Timeout Min 30 Auto Negotiate Port Setting 10 100 Mbps Full Duplex Half Duplex X Contact Location Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 392 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface This field Specifies Configure by doing the following Subnet Mask The controller s subnet mask Enter an address of the following form Gateway Address See the table below to configure the subnet mask and gateway address fields for each controller via your programming software The subnet mask is used to interpret IP a b c d Where a b c d are between 0 255 decimal addresses when the internet is divided into subnets If your network is not divided into subnets then leave the subnet mask field at the default If you change the default and need to reset it type 0 0 0 0 The IP address of the gateway that Enter an address of the following form provides a connection to another IP network a b c d Where a b c d are between 0 255 decimal This field is required when you The default address is No Gateway communicate with other devices not local subnet MicroLogix 1400 Embedded MicroLogix 1400 controllers include not o
311. mation circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you identify a hazard avoid a hazard and recognize the consequence SHOCK HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment such as a drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present BURN HAZARD Labels may be on or inside the equipment such as a drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures AN LA EX A Rockwell Automation Allen Bradley SLC 5 02 SLC 5 03 PLC 5 MicroLogix SLC 500 RSLogix RSLinx RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro and TechConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies Summary
312. mber for Initial Unsolicited This value is used to configure Master UDP Port Number for Initial Unsolicited Response if the parameter End Point Type is selected as Datagram Only Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 259 The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 20000 Remote UDP Port Number This value is used to configure Master UDP Port Number if the parameter End Point Type is selected as Datagram Only The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 20000 Keep Alive Interval x1 s This parameter specifies a time interval for TCP Keep Alive mechanism If the timer times out the MicroLogix 1400 transmits a keep alive message The keep alive message is a DNP Data Link Layer status request FC REQUEST LINK STATUS If a response is not received to the keep alive message the MicroLogix 1400 deems the TCP connection broken and closes the TCP connection The valid range is 1 to 65535 Default value is 10 Slave Node Address This value is a node address of this DNP3 Slave The valid range is 0 to 65519 Default value is 1 Local TCP Port Number This value is used to configure Local TCP Port Number which is used for TCP socket listening The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 20000 Local UDP Port Number This value is used to configure Local UDP Port Number which is used for UDP socket listening The valid range is 0 to 65535 Default value is 20000 Diagnostic File Number The diagnos
313. mum number of events which is generated and logged into the event buffer for Class 1 events In this case value 0 will disable to generate the event If the MicroLogix 1400 is configured to generate Unsolicited Response and the number of queued Class 1 events is reached to this value Unsolicited Response is initiated The valid range is 0 to 6016 Default value is 10 Hold Time after Class1 Events x1 s This parameter is only for Unsolicited Response The MicroLogix 1400 holds the events during Hold Time after Class1 Events x1 s before initiating an Unsolicited Response The valid range is 0 65535 Default value is 5 The value of 0 indicates that responses are not delayed due to this parameter Note that parameters Number of Class1 Events and Hold Time after Class1 Events x1 s are used together so that if either one of the criteria are met an Unsolicited Response is transmitted Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 263 Number of Class2 Events If the MicroLogix 1400 is configured not to initiate Unsolicited Response this parameter used to limit the maximum number of events which is generated and logged into the event buffer for Class 2 events In this case value 0 will disable to generate the event If the MicroLogix 1400 is configured to generate Unsolicited Response and the number of queued Class 2 events is reached to this value Unsolicited Response is initiated The valid range is 0 to 6016
314. n for your controller 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000000 User Display b dvanced Set 2 Then press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Set Menu screen is displayed as shown below 000000 TrimPot Set bSystem Info Fault Code 3 If System Info is selected press the OK key If not select System Info using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 152 Using the LCD Viewing Fault Code Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 4 The System Information screen is displayed You can identify the catalog number operating system firmware revision number and boot firmware revision number of your controller LIEIETETEIL Cat 1 66 LEC 05 FRN 1 BI FHN 1 8 5 Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Set Menu screen as shown in step 3 RU The Fault Code screen of the LCD displays the fault code when a fault occurs When a fault occurs the Fault Code screen is not displayed automatically Only the FAULT LED on the controller flashes in red light Therefore you need to navigate into the Fault Code screen to identify the fault code on the LCD Follow these steps to view the fault code when
315. n is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 sends Unsolicited NULL Response with RESTART IIN bit on startup Enable Confirmation Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 sends Response packets with CON bit set in its header under the following conditions only When the response has Event data When the response is multi fragment response When the Unsolicited Response is sent When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 always sends Response packets with the CON bit set in its header which causes the DNP3 Master to send replies confirming that it received each Response packet without error Enable Time Synchronization On Start Up Only Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked This parameter used with Time Synchronization Interval x1 mins When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 sets IIN1 4 bit on power up and every interval configured in Time Synchronization Interval x1 mins When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 only sets the NEED TIME Internal Indication bit IIN1 4 upon startup Time Synchronization Interval x1 mins This parameter used with Enable Time Synchronization On Start Up Only Only valid when Enable Time Synchronization On Start Up Only is Disabled
316. n setting RTS until checking for the CTS response For use with modems that are not ready to respond with CTS immediately upon receipt of RTS Message Retries 0 255 Specifies the number of times a slave device attempts to resend a message packet when it does not receive an ACK from the master device For use in noisy environments where message packets may become corrupted in transmission Pre Transmit Delay x1 ms 0 65 535 can be set in 1 ms increments e When the Control Line is set to no handshaking this is the delay time before transmission Required for 1761 NET AIC physical Half Duplex networks The 1761 NET AIC needs delay time to change from transmit to receive mode e When the Control Line is set to DF Half Duplex Modem this is the minimum time delay between receiving the last character of a packet and the RTS assertion Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Communication Connections 81 DF1 Half Duplex Master Slave Network Use the following diagram for DF1 Half Duplex Master Slave protocol without hardware handshaking SLC 5 03 D A 9 MicroLogix 1400 processor 558 FR ERI B Us Master E ILI PB p 1761 CBL AMOO or 1761
317. nd the bit can be accessed by Nx 2 4 where x is the relevant Data Set Descriptor Config file number Disable Change of State Event Setting this parameter suppresses the events generated by any Event Occurrence Condition Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 312 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Event Occurrence Condition The conditions of Data Set Event for each Data Set Descriptor can be configured by Data Set Event Occurrence Condition 0 1 2 3 in the DNP3 Data Set Descriptors Object File When one of the values that pointing to the Event Occurrence Condition 0 1 2 3 are changed or the criteria are met the MicroLogix 1400 generates a Data Set Event retrievable using the object g88v1 This table shows the supported conditions for Point Addressing Double click each case element to edit it Event Occurrence Condition 1 x Case ID 0 Point Address Type Standard DNP3Point Point Type NONE Point Index o Cancel Point Addressing under Event Occurrence Conditions Valid selections are shown below Point Address Type Point Type Point Index Event Occurence Condition Standard DNP3 Point NONE No point type is 0 No Event is generated associated BI Binary input 0 to 4095 When the Point Type and Point Index are IDs 00206 um e CI Counter 0 to 511 Al Analog input 0 to 767 BCD BCD point 0 to 255 Reserved for others Reserved for others No Event i
318. nd Hold Time after Class3 Events x1 s are used together so that if either one of the criteria are met an Unsolicited Response is transmitted Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 264 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Select Timeout x1 s The valid range is 1 65535 Default value is 10 This parameter is used for controlling CROB Control Relay Output Block and AOB Analog Output Block After receiving the request with the function code FC_SELECT 3 DNP3 Master should send the request with the function code FC_OPERATE within this configured time DNP3 Object Data File Number The DNP3 Object Data File Numbers define the mapping of the listed DNP3 objects to MicroLogix 1400 data table files The number of elements defined for each of those data table files also defines the number of corresponding DNP3 objects See DNP3 Objects and MicroLogix 1400 Data Files on page 278 for more details DNP3 Object Config File Number The DNP3 Object Config File Numbers define the mapping of the listed DNP3 object properties class number online offline status object quality flags deadbands and or thresholds to MicroLogix 1400 data table files See DNP3 Objects and MicroLogix 1400 Data Files on page 278 for more details DNP3 Secure Authentication This section is applicable only to MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers The MicroLogix 1400 implements the DNP3 Secure A
319. nector on the memory module with the connector pins on the controller 44535 44536 4 Use a screwdriver as in step 1 to remove the memory module in the future Using the Battery The MicroLogix 1400 controller is equipped with a replaceable battery catalog number 1747 BA The Battery Low indicator on the LCD display of the controller shows the status of the replaceable battery When the battery is low the indicator is set displayed as a solid rectangle This means that Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 30 Installing Your Controller Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 either the battery wire connector is disconnected or the battery may fail within 2 weeks if it is connected IMPORTANT The MicroLogix 1400 controller ships with the battery wire connector connected Ensure that the battery wire connector 15 inserted into the connector port if your application needs battery power For example when using a real time clock RTC Replacing the battery when the controller is powered down will lose all user application memory Replace the battery when the controller is powered on Refer to the SLC 500 Lithium Battery Installation Instructions publication 1747 IN515 for more information on installation handling usage storage and disposal of the battery See RTC Battery Operation on page 162 for more information on the use of the battery in relation with RTC When you connect or disconnect t
320. needs the following information from you before it can i begin updating a device Control Catalog Number of the target device 2 The Network Configuration parameters optional 3 The Network Path to the target device 4 The Firmware Revision for this update 2 Click the Next button 3 Select the appropriate catalog number from the Catalog Number dialog box and click the Next button Catalog Number Enter the catalog number of the target device 1766LEC Control Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System 217 The AB_SNMP DLL Enter IP Address dialog box is displayed AB_SNMP DLL Enter IP Address Enter the IP address of the target module name or dot notation 10 116 38 20 Device Identification Ces _ 4 Type in the IP address for the processor IMPORTANT Use the IP address that was configured earlier or use an available IP address assigned to by your network administrator 5 Click the Get Info button If the IP address was previously configured and the necessary information about the controller is obtained go to step 9 6 The AB SNMP Server dialog box is displayed indicating that this IP address has not been configured into the processor AB SNMP BOOTP Server Could not find the host on the network This machine will now attempt to act as aBOOTP server for this IP address
321. nfigured communications Channel 0 empty rectangle on solid rectangle Default communications Channel 0 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Status Indicators the LCD Troubleshooting Your System 205 Indicator Color Indicates BAT LO off Battery level is acceptable empty rectangle on Battery low solid rectangle U DISP off Default display mode empty rectangle on solid rectangle Customized display mode 1 When using a MicroLogix 1400 controller the DCOMM LED applies only to Channel 0 1 0 Status Indicators on the LCD 1 0 Status Indicators on the LCD 1 0 LED screen on the LCD 000000 I BBOQOOOOOO0000 01020000 9123456789012 4567389 0 0000000090 2 1 0 Status Indicators on the LCD RU Input status indicators 20 Output status indicators 12 Indicator Color Indicates INPUTS off Input is not energized empty rectangle on Input is energized terminal status solid rectangle OUTPUTS off Output is not energized empty rectangle on solid rectangle Output is engerized logic status 1 To view the status of inputs and outputs on menu See 1 0 Status on page 5 109 for mo Normal Operation the LCD you need to enter the 1 0 LED mode screen using the LCD information The POWER and RUN LEDs are on If a force condition is active the FORCE LED turns on and remains on until all forces are removed
322. nly the embedded web server which allows viewing of module information TCP IP configuration and Web Server Capability diagnostic information but the capabilities that also allow viewing of the data file via Ethernet using a standard web browser For more information on MicroLogix 1400 embedded web server capability refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Embedded Web Server User Manual publication 1766 UM002 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface 393 Notes Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 394 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Appendix H System Loading and Heat Dissipation TIP A maximum of seven 1762 1 0 modules in any combination can be connected to a MicroLogix 1400 controller You can use this appendix to determine the power supply load and heat dissipation for your system System Loading The MicroLogix 1400 controller is designed to support up to any seven 1762 expansion I O modules Calculations When you connect MicroLogix accessories and expansion I O an electrical load is placed on the controller power supply This section shows how to calculate the load of your control system The following example is provided to illustrate system loading calculation The system calculation procedure accounts for the amount of 5V DC and 24V DC current consumed by controller expansion I O and user supplied equ
323. nnections Dedicated to 16 Incoming EtherNet IP Connections 16 Series B only Incoming Modbus TCP Connections 16 Outgoing EtherNet IP Connections 16 Series B only OutgoingModbus TCP Connections 1 Connections established by an INTERCHANGE client RSLinx client and peers are all included when counting the number of connections IMPORTANT For outgoing connections no more that one connection per destination node is established If multiple MSG instructions use the same destination node they share the same connection The MicroLogix 1400 firmware supports duplicate IP address detection In Series B duplicate IP address detection can be disabled in the Channel 1 configuration in order to eliminate this source of broadcast traffic for low bandwidth applications When you change the IP address or connect one of the MicroLogix to an EtherNet IP network the MicroLogix 1400 controller checks to make sure that the IP address assigned to this device does not match the address of any other network device The MicroLogix 1400 will check every 2 minutes for a duplicate IP address on the network If the MicroLogix 1400 determines that there is a conflict another device on the network with a matching IP address the following message gets posted on the LCD display RU IP CONFLI CT To correct this conflict use the instructions in this chapter to change the IP address of the Ethernet IP device Then cycle power to the devi
324. nnels You can also program the module to calibrate every five minutes Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 192 Specifications Input Specifications 1762 IR4 Specification Maximum overload at input terminals 1762 IR4 35V DC continuous Cable impedance max 25 Q Operating with gt 25 will reduce accuracy Channel to channel isolation 10V de 1 Accuracy is dependent upon the Analog Digital converter filter rate selection excitation current selection data format and input noise 2 Open circuit detection time is equal to channel update time Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Input Specifications 1762 IT4 Specification Heat dissipation Value 1 5 Total Watts The Watts per point plus the minimum Watts with all points energized Response speed per channel Rated working voltage Input filter and configuration dependent 30V ac 30V dc Normal mode rejection ratio 85 dB minimum at 50 Hz with 10 Hz or 50 Hz filter 85 dB minimum at 60 Hz with 10 Hz or 60 Hz filter Cable impedance max 25 for specified accuracy Open circuit detection time 7 ms 1 515 Calibration The module performs autocalibration upon power up and whenever a channel is enabled You can also program the module to calibrate every five minutes CJC accuracy 1 3 C 2 34 F Maximum overload at input terminals 35V DC continuous Input channel
325. not include the affects of errors or drift in the cold junction compensation circuit 3 Accuracy is dependent upon the analog digital converter output rate selection data format and input noise 4 Temperature drift with autocalibration is slightly better than without autocalibration Output Specifications Specification Number of outputs TIP For more detailed 1762 IT4 accuracy information see publication 1762 UM002 1762 IF20F2 2 single ended unipolar 1762 0F4 4 single ended unipolar Update time typical 4 5 ms D A converter type Resistor string R 2R Ladder Voltage Switching Resistive load on current output Load range on voltage output 0 500 Q includes wire resistance gt 1KQ 0 500 Q includes wire resistance gt 1KQ Reactive load current output 0 1 mH 0 1 mH Reactive load voltage output lt 1 lt 1 Typical overall accuracy 1 17 full scale at 20 65 2 0 5 full scale at 25 1 17 full scale at 20 65 2 0 5 full scale at 25 Output ripple range 0 500 Hz referred to output range Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 10 196 10 196 Output Specifications Specifications 195 Specification 1762 IF20F2 1762 0F4 Non linearity in percent full scale lt 0 59 2 lt 0 59 2 Open and short circuit protection Continuous Continuous Output protection 32 MA 3
326. nother device DTE Data Terminal Equipment Equipment that is attached to a network to send or receive data or both embedded I O Embedded I O is the controller s on board I O EMI Electromagnetic interference encoder 1 A rotary device that transmits position information 2 A device that transmits a fixed number of pulses for each revolution executing mode Any run or test mode expansion I O Expansion I O is I O that is connected to the controller via a bus or cable MicroLogix 1400 controllers use Bulletin 1762 expansion I O 403 false The status of an instruction that does not provide a continuous logical path on a ladder rung FIFO First In First Out The order that data is entered into and retrieved from a file file A collection of information organized into one group full duplex A bidirectional mode of communication where data may be transmitted and received simultaneously contrast with half duplex half duplex A communication link in which data transmission is limited to one direction at a time hard disk A storage atea in a personal computer that may be used to save processor files and reports for future use high byte Bits 8 to 15 of a word input device A device such as a push button or a switch that supplies signals to the input circuits of the controller inrush current The temporary surge current produced when a device or circuit is initially energized
327. ns with 00 00 BC 3 The controller should be in Program mode before you start the firmware upgrade access the Mode Switch from the LCD See Using the Mode Switch on page 129 for information about controller modes and how to use the Mode Switch See Viewing Ethernet Status on page 137 to find how to browse for the controller s IP address ATTENTION Do not interrupt the flash procedure once you have begun to download the firmware If the flash procedure is interrupted the controller will be in a Missing or Corrupt OS state on the next power N Up To recover the controller from a missing corrupt OS state see Missing or Corrupt OS state on page 228 1 Launch the ControlFLASH application under Programs Flash Programming Tools If the Ethernet connection IP configuration has not been established attach an Ethernet cable to the controller from your computer ot a hub and ensure that the Ethernet connection is intact throughout the upgrade process IMPORTANT If you are connecting to the controller through a hub you can use a standard Ethernet patch cable If you are connecting to the controller directly from your computer you need to use an Ethernet crossover cable Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 216 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System The Welcome to ControIFLASH dialog box is displayed Welcome to ControlFLASH Welcome to ControlFLASH the firmware update tool ControlFLASH
328. nse 17 28 index time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 2 2 Binary Input Event With 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index absolute time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Implementation Table for Series controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 371 DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num dec hex Codes dec hex 2 3 Binary Input Event With 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index relative time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 3 0 Double bit Binary Input Any 1 read 00 01 start stop Variation 06 no range or all 3 1 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop Packed format 06 no range or all 3 2 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop With flags 06 no range or all 4 0 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all Event Any Variation 07 08 limited qty 4 1 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Event Without time 07 08 limited qty 130 un
329. nse or unsolicited response Generating Events The MicroLogix 1400 has a separate buffer area that you can use to log DNP3 events internally The maximum number of the Events that can be logged is 6016 regardless of the Event data type With Series B controllers a Data Set event can consume multiple numbers of the event buffers If the number of the generated events reaches this value the MicroLogix 1400 sets IIN2 3 EVENT BUFFER OVERFLOW Further events are not logged until the logged events are reported to DNP3 Master and the buffer is available The elements CS0 67 CS2 67 in the Communication status file show how many events are logged to the event buffer The logged events are not removed until they are reported to DNP3 Master successfully Logged event can also be cleared when one of the following events occur New OS firmware upgrade Power cycle to the controller Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 326 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 New user program download The example below shows how to generate events for a Binary Input Object and 16 bit Analog Input Object In the DNP3 Slave configuration Binary Input Object Data File Number was configured to 10 and its Configuration File Number was configured to 30 16 bit Analog Input Object Data File Number was configured to 14 and its Configuration File Number was configured to 36 General Channel Chanrct1 Chonnel
330. nstruction 403 instruction set 403 Index 411 isolated link coupler installing 85 isolation transformers power considerations 23 J jump 404 L ladder logic 404 LCD configuring advanced settings 134 1 0 status indicators 109 205 loading communication EEPROM 154 main menu 105 102 saving communication EEPROM 154 156 204 user defined screen 132 viewing fault code 152 151 least significant bit LSB 404 LED Light Emitting Diode 404 LIFO Last In First Out 404 link layer configuration parameters 252 lithium battery 1747 BA disposing 201 handling 199 installing 197 manufacturer 201 storing 199 transporting 199 loading communication EEPROM 154 logic 404 low byte 404 manually configuring channel 1 for controllers on subnets 391 manuals related 12 master control relay 25 emergency stop switches 26 using ANSI CSA symbols schematic 28 27 Master Control Relay MCR 404 master control relay circuit periodic tests 23 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 412 Index memory module 14 data file protection 163 information file 164 operation 162 program and data download 164 165 163 removal installation under power 164 write protection 164 menu structure 102 menu structure tree 102 minimizing electrical noise 52 minimizing electrical noise on analog channels 54 mnemonic 404 Modbus communication protocol 243 mode switch 129 modem 404 modem cable constructing your own 78 modems using with MicroLogix con
331. nt Counter for Reply Timeout 35 85 135 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Max Invalid Replies Or Comm Failure Detected 36 86 136 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Max Invalid Replies Or Comm Failure Detected 37 87 137 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Error Message 38 88 138 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Key Change Timeout 39 89 139 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Expected Key Change Timeout 40 90 140 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Expected Key Change Timeout 41 91 141 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Key Status Request 42 92 142 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Valid Aggressive Mode Request 43 93 143 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Valid Aggressive Mode Request 44 94 144 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Invalid Aggressive Mode Request Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 20 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 361 Word Offset Current State Description CHO CH1 CH2 45 95 145 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Valid Key Change 46 96 146 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Invalid Key Change 47 97 147 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Challenge 48 98 148 Wait for Reply Reserved 49 99 149 Wait for Reply Counter for Ignored events Function Codes Function Codes for MicroLogix 1400 Series A Controllers These tables show the Application Layer Function codes implemented in MicroLogix 1400 Message Fun
332. nter 18bits Enable Secure Authentication Analog Input 16bits NN NN Critical FCs File Number Analog Input 32bits o 0 Expected Session Key 0 Ch Interval x1 Analog Input Short Floating 0 ens tenete 0 NN E Frozen Counter 32bits p Iv Enable Aggressive Mode NN o jo Expected Session Key 2000 Analog Output 16bits fo p Change Count bist ge o o Reply Timeout x100ms 20 Analog Output Short Floating fo p Masima Eror Count E HMAC Algorithm 7 suci m 0 User Info Config File Number p T D Threshold Deadband DL OnLine OffLine Diagnostic File Number Juss DNP3 Slave configuration is shared by Channel 0 Channel 1 and Channel 2 ports if Channels 0 1 and 2 are configured for DNP3 protocol Any changes in the DNP3 Slave configuration tab will affect all channels Channel 0 and Channel 2 Link Layer Configuration Parameters Driver This selection should be set to DNP3 Slave to communicate with DNP3 protocol Node Address This value is a node address of this DNP3 Slave The valid range is 0 to 65519 Default value is 1 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 253 Baud The selections can be 38 4 19200 9600 4800 2400 1200 600 and 300 Default selection is 19200 Parity The selections can be NONE EVEN and ODD Default selection is NONE S
333. nter database directly There is one buffer for Frozen Counter Object Read the Frozen Counter Object before you send another request with Freeze function codes If two consecutive Freeze function codes are received without Read operation into them for Frozen Counter Object the values of Frozen Counter Objects are overwritten by the second Freeze operation Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 298 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 If both 16 bit Counter Object File Number and 32 bit Counter Object File Number were configured in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file the 16 bit Frozen Counter Object starting index number is 0 and the 32 bit Frozen Counter Object starting index number of starts after the last index number for 16 bit Frozen Counter Object For example if 10 elements of 16 bit Counter Object were configured and 10 elements of 32 bit Counter Object were configured the index numbers will be 16 bit Frozen Counter Object From 0 to 9 32 bit Frozen Counter Object From 10 to 19 When only one of the Counter Object File was configured Index number starts from 0 for the configured object As an example a Frozen Counter Config File is shown below These files have 10 elements for each B34 0 0 and B34 0 1 can be configured for Class Level 0 1 2 or 3 for DNP3 Index 0 of the 16 bits Frozen Counter Object File B34 1 0 and B34 1 1 can be c
334. ntroller eeri 32 DIN Ral Mounting oc ado dat he och Reda oA 34 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 4 Table of Contents Wiring Your Controller Communication Connections Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Panel 35 1762 Expansion I O 36 Mounting 1762 Expansion 1 36 DIN sack etus d ORE 36 ha ase Paper a e ge 37 Connecting Expansion I O 38 Chapter 3 Wiring Requirements 41 Witing 4 41 Wire without Spade L gsos esas toro ee Ob ve eps us 42 Wire with Spade Lugs er Guia epa e e ed ERR 42 Using Surge Suppress rs abes red vul e haac So d 43 Recommended Surge Suppressors 44 Grounding the Controllets 4 ine e doe ei WR ee eh 45 Mie DI TANI esa REN RA Ee x DEAS RATA pex aux 46 Terminal Block Layouts eee 46 Sinking and Sourcing Wiring Diagrams 50 1766 L32BWA 1766 L32AWA 1766 L32BXB 1766 L32BWAA 1766 L32AWAA 1766 L32BXBA Wiring Diagrams 50 Controller T O Witing sas oec 52 Minimizing Electrical Noise 52 Witing Your Analog 53 Analog Channel Wiring 4 54
335. o change the value of the current digit Press the Left and Right keys to select a different digit as the current digit If the Key In mode is set to Continuous the changes are applied immediately after you press the Up and Down keys While if it is set to Discrete you have to press the OK key to apply the changes after you change the data value For more information on how to set the Key In mode see Changing Key In Mode on page 135 TIP The Key In mode has an effect only when you change the data value of a trim pot ona Trim Pot screen either the Trim Pot 0 or Trim Pot 1 screen 5 If you have finished changing the data value of the selected trim pot in this example press the ESC key to return to the Trim Pot Select screen as shown in step 2 Trim Pot Configuration in LCD Function File The configuration for Trim Pots in the LCD Function File including trim pot low and high values for data value range is described in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 RM001 Viewing System Information Using the LCD 151 Error Conditions Error conditions regarding the Trim Pot functionality are described in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 001 The System Information screen of the LCD allows you to identify the system information for your controller Follow these steps to view the system informatio
336. oading example calculations 396 limitations 395 worksheet 397 system loading and heat dissipation 395 T target user defined file number 111 terminal 408 terminal block layouts 1762 IF20F2 64 66 controllers 46 terminal groupings 50 throughput 408 time synchronization 335 trim pot information function file 149 trim pot operation 148 trim pots 148 changing values 149 150 error conditions 151 location 148 using 148 troubleshooting 203 true 408 TUF 111 U unsupported connections 17 76 upload 408 user defined LCD screen 132 using communications toggle functionality 72 using communications toggle push button 72 using emergency stop switches 26 using memory modules 161 using real time clock 161 using the battery 29 using trim pots 148 V viewing fault code 152 viewing system information 151 W wiring analog channels 53 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 414 Index wiring diagram 1762 IA8 56 64 65 57 58 56 62 58 59 60 59 60 61 62 50 52 51 52 51 52 terminal block layouts 46 64 66 wiring diagrams 46 wiring recommendation 41 wiring with spade lugs 42 wiring without spade lugs 42 wiring your controller 41 working voltage 178 workspace 408 write 408 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Rockwell Automation Support Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products At http www rockwellautomation com su
337. ode But the MicroLogix 1400 may generate a response with this function code when a DNP3 Master sends a request with the CON bit set in the application control header FC READ FC Byte 0x01 01 Read The READ function code is used by a DNP3 master to request data from the MicroLogix 1400 FC WRITE FC Byte 0x02 02 Write The WRITE function code is used to wtite the contents of DNP3 objects from the DNP3 master to the MicroLogix 1400 This function code is used for clearing bit IIN1 7 DEVICE_RESTART setting time in the MicroLogix 1400 and downloading user programs to the MicroLogix 1400 controller FC SELECT FC Byte 0x03 03 Select The SELECT function code is used in conjunction with the OPERATE function code as patt of select before operate method for issuing control requests This procedure is used for controlling binary output CROB or analog output AOB objects FC OPERATE FC Byte 0x04 04 Operate See the comment for FC SELECT FC Byte 0x03 on page 273 FC DIRECT OPERATE FC Byte 0x05 05 Direct Operate This direct operate function is similar to the FC OPERATE function code except that no preceding select command is required FC DIRECT OPERATE FC Byte 0x06 06 Direct Operate No Resp Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 274 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 See the comment for FC DIRECT OPERATE
338. oder 402 error recovery model 206 errors configuration 210 209 extended error information field 210 hardware 210 module error field 210 non critical 209 Ethernet advanced functions 390 messaging 378 processor performance 378 using the SLC 5 05 processors 377 Ethernet communication 377 Ethernet connections 382 Ethernet network configuration 137 Ethernet protocol setup 146 European Union Directive compliance 19 EMC Directive 19 low voltage directive 20 event generation control 330 executing mode 402 expansion 1 0 1762 IF20F2 input type selection 63 64 expansion 1 0 mounting 36 37 mounting on DIN rail 36 expansion 1 0 specifications 179 expansion 1 0 wiring 55 1762 1A8 wiring diagram 56 64 66 57 58 56 62 58 59 60 59 60 61 62 analog wiring guidelines 63 extended error information field 210 5 F false 403 FIFO First In First Out 403 file 403 file authentication rules 339 full duplex 76 403 G general considerations 20 generating DNP3 events 325 grounding the controller 45 H half duplex 81 403 hard disk 405 hardware errors 210 hardware features 15 heat dissipation calculating 399 heat protection 25 high byte 403 1 0 Inputs and Outputs 403 1 0 status indicators 109 implementation table 364 initialize user program 343 input device 403 input states on power down 24 inrush current 403 installing battery wire connector 31 ControlFLASH software 213 memory module 29 your controller 19 i
339. odule errors are indicated in Extended Error Codes for 1762 IF2OF2 page 211 Module Error Definition Table Analog module errors are expressed in two fields as four digit Hex format with the most significant digit as don t care and irrelevant The two fields are Module Error and Extended Error Information The structure of the module error data is shown below Don t Care Bits Module Error Extended Error Information 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Hex Digit 4 Hex Digit 3 Hex Digit 2 Hex Digit 1 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 210 Troubleshooting Your System Module Error Field The purpose of the module error field is to classify module errors into three distinct groups as described in the table below The type of error determines what kind of information exists in the extended error information field These types of module errors typically reported in the controller s I O status file Refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 001 for more information Module Error Types Error Type Module Error Field Value Description Bits 11 through 09 Binary No Errors 000 No error is present The extended error field holds no additional information Hardware Errors 001 General and specific hardware error codes are specified in the extended error
340. oftware RSLinx version 2 x and higher DF1 Half Duplex supports up to 255 devices address to 254 with address 255 reserved for master broadcasts As a DF1 Half Duplex slave device the MicroLogix supports broadcast reception As a DF1 Half Duplex master the MicroLogix 1400 supports both the reception and initiation of broadcast write commands via the MSG instruction The MicroLogix also supports Half Duplex modems using RTS CTS hardware handshaking Example DF1 Half Duplex Connections Rockwell Software RSLinx 2 0 or RS 232 later SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 and SLC um DF1 Half Duplex Protocol 5 05 PLC 5 MicroLogix 1400 or MicroLogix 1000 1200 1500 Modem processors configured for DF1 Half Duplex Master E MicroLogix MicroLogix 1000 Slave 1400 Slave MicroLogix MicroLogix SLC 5 04 SLC 5 03 with 1200 Slave 1500 Slave Slave 1747 KE Interface Module Slave Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 234 Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Considerations When Communicating as a DF1 Slave Multi drop Link When communication is between either your programming software and a MicroLogix Programmable Controller or between two MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers via slave to slave communication on a larger multi drop link
341. og controllers are installed and operated it is impossible to ensure that all environmental noise will be removed by the input filters Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Expansion 1 0 Wiring Wiring Your Controller 55 Several specific steps can be taken to help reduce the effects of environmental noise on analog signals install the MicroLogix 1400 system in a properly rated enclosure for example NEMA Make sure that the MicroLogix 1400 system is properly grounded use Belden cable 8761 for wiring the analog channels making sure that the drain wire and foil shield are properly earth grounded route the Belden cable separately from any AC wiring Additional noise immunity can be obtained by routing the cables in grounded conduit Grounding Your Analog Cable Use shielded communication cable Belden 8761 The Belden cable has two signal wires black and clear one drain wire and a foil shield The drain wire and foil shield must be grounded at one end of the cable Foil Shield Black Wire Insulation Drain Wire Clear Wire 44531 IMPORTANT aie ground the drain wire and foil shield at both ends of the Digital Wiring Diagrams The following illustrations show the digital expansion I O wiring diagrams Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 56 Wiring Your Controller 1762 IA8 Wiring Diagram L1 INO TNE IN
342. og Output Object File Only L file 9 to 255 Short Floating Point Analog Output Only F file 8 9 to 255 Object File BCD Object 101 256 Small BCD Object File Only N file 7 9 to 255 256 Data Set Object In 85 87 88 10 Data Set Prototypes Object File Only N file 7 9 to 255 10 BOR 06 87 88 Data Set Descriptors Object File Basically the index number of DNP objects of each type is evaluated by the firmware automatically the number of elements For example if a Binary Input object file was configured as an element the highest index number of the Binary Input object is 15 The index number can only be increased by 16 If a Double Bit Binary Input object file was configured as an element the highest index number of the Double Bit Binary Input object is 7 The index number can only be increased by 8 As another example if a 16 bit Analog Input object file was configured as an element the highest index number is 1 Except for Binary and Double Bit Binary type objects the index number can be increased by 1 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 282 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 DNP 3 Configuration Files You can set configuration files for each object These configuration files allow you to configure parameters such as Class level and Object Flag bit information for each element Only a Binary Data file type can be used for configuration file Relationship between M
343. ol DNP3 Implementation Table for Series A controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Description Function Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num Codes dec hex Codes dec hex 40 0 Analog Output Status 1 read 06 no range or all Any Variation 40 1 Analog Output Status 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 32 bit with flag 40 2 Analog Output Status 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop 16 bit with flag 40 3 Analog Output Status 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop Single prec flt pt with flag 41 1 Analog Output 32 bit 3 select 17 28 index 129 response echo of request 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 41 2 Analog Output 16 bit 3 select 17 28 index 129 response echo of request 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 41 3 Analog Output 3 select 17 28 index 129 response echo of request Single prec flt pt 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 50 1 Time and Date 1 read 07 limited qty 1 129 response 07 limited qty Absolute time qty 1 2 write 07 limited qty 1 50 3 Time and Date Absolute time at last recorded time 51 1 Time and Date
344. on Straight through cabling Pin Pin Name Cable color 1 Orange White 2 Tx Orange 3 Green White 4 No used by 10 100Base T Blue 5 No used by 10 100Base T Blue White 6 Rx Green 7 No used by 10 100Base T Brown White 8 No used by 10 100Base T Brown The standard Ethernet cable is terminated in accordance with EIA TIA 568B on both ends The crossover cable is terminated to EIA TIA 568B at one end and EIA TIA 5684 at the other exactly as shown in the two color coded plugs below The following figures show how the TIA EIA 568A and 568B are to be terminated There are four pairs of wires contained in a CAT5 U TP cable These pairs of cables are color coded white blue blue white orange orange Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface 381 white green green white brown brown they are also numbered one to four in the order shown EIAITIA p3 568 568B preferred same as P1 P2 AT amp T 2584 11 1 4 1 4 RJ 45 Jack Front View RJ 45 Jack Front View Hs aai some as i 8 ATST 258A 45 Jack Front View UTP 1 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 382 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Ethernet Connections Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 TIP The most common wiring for RJ45 cables is the straight through cable which means that pin 1 of the plug on one end
345. on a relay or switch that are open when the relay is de energized or the switch is deactivated hey are closed when the relay is energized or the switch is activated In ladder programming a symbol that allows logic continuity flow if the referenced input is logic 1 when evaluated off delay time The OFF delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a signal has been removed from the input terminal of the controller The time is determined by circuit component delays and by any filter adjustment applied offline Describes devices not under direct communication offset The steady state deviation of a controlled variable from a fixed point off state leakage current When an ideal mechanical switch is opened off state no current flows through the switch Practical semiconductor switches and the transient suppression components which are sometimes used to protect switches allow a small current to flow when the switch is in the off state This current is referred to as the off state leakage current To ensure reliable operation the off state leakage current rating of a switch should be less than the minimum operating current rating of the load that is connected to the switch Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 406 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 on delay time The ON delay time is a measure of the time required for the controller logic to recognize that a
346. onfigurable maximum number of retries If a maximum is used the protocol considers this as a link failure The time value in the embedded RTC module of the MicroLogix 1400 controller is updated by an RTC Function file every 2 seconds This resolution is insufficient to log DNP3 events in a DNP3 subsystem Another timer incremented by 1 millisecond in the DNP3 Slave subsystem serves to provide appropriate resolution These two timers are synchronized by the following conditions power up a request for time synchronization from DNP3 Master At power up the DNP3 subsystem gets the time from an RTC function file in the MicroLogix 1400 For the RTC function file to acquire the correct time the RTC module should be enabled before a power cycle to acquire the correct time from the function file In this example RTC function file the RTC module is disabled To enable it click Set Date amp Time while it is online 3 Function Files DE X HSC PTOX PwMx sti Jel ico cso es cle HYRA Year L MON Month H DAY Day L HA Hour MIN Minute SEC Second H DOW Day Df The Week DS Disabled L BL Battery is Low Day of Week DD MM Das pn n p HH SS Time 0 0 0 Disable Clock When there is a write request for time synchronization from a DNP3 Master DNP3 subsys
347. onfigured for Class Level for DNP3 Index 1 of the Counter Object File Default Class Level is 0 Any other bits are reserved So in the example below for 16 bit Frozen Counter Config File Class Level of Index 0 is 1 B34 0 0 and B34 0 1 Class Level of Index 1 is 2 B34 1 0 and B34 1 1 Class Level of Index 2 is 3 B34 2 0 and B34 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Data File BH bin LGbits Frozen Counter Config File ih 9 HC eb 0000 0 HU naa H fn a nau nnn n B Ha 1 0 00000200 1 H H H H BD I B 0n0 0000 0 Daonnpooge 0n0 0000 D HU dg H B WU H B 00000200 0000000 Du ng uu u 00000 0 0 D U dg BJ mu gJ B5 oo06808 0 0 oan D 0 D Jg Binar 2 Cours ie 7 Desc n Brcpertes Usage Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 299 For 32 bit Frozen Counter Config File Class Level of Index 10 is 1 B35 0 0 and B35 0 1 Class Level of Index 11 is 2 B35 1 0 and B35 1 1 Class Level of Index 12 is 3 B35 2 0 and B35 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 File B35 bin 32bits Frozen Counter Config File 2 210 3520 B35 1 DoD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 02 35 2 L 35 3 B3 5 4 00000000000200080 D 335 8 S o O e RS i
348. ontroIFLASH Upgrade Kit includes the operating system upgrade to be downloaded the ControlFLASH programming tool along with its support drivers and on line help Before upgrading the controller s operating system OS you must install ControlFLASH software on your personal computer prepare the controller for updating Install ControlFLASH Software Double click the ControlFLASH msi file to install the operating system upgrade If a ControlFLASH directory does not already exist one is created in your Program Files directory Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 214 Using ControlFLASH to Upgrade Your Operating System Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Prepare the Controller for Firmware Upgrade 1 Itis important that the SNMP server is enabled before the firmware upgrade begins You can check if the SNMP server is enabled by looking at the Channel Configuration page for Channel 1 in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro If the SNMP server is not enabled you can still enable it in the channel configuration page Channel Configuration Hardware Address IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway Address Defaukt Doman Name Primary Name Server Secondary Name Server Protocol Control v SNMP Server Enable v HTTP Server Enable Auto Negotiate BOOTP Enable DHCP Enable General Channel Channel 1 Channel 2 Network Link ID O0 User Provided Web Pages Staring Data File Number
349. ontroller is placed in a non executing mode program mode suspend mode fault condition Memory Module Information File The controller has Memory Module Information MMT File which provides status from the attached memory module At power up or on detection of a memory module being inserted the catalog number series revision and type are identified and written to the MMI file If a memory module is not attached zeros are written to the MMI file Refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Instruction Set Reference Manual publication 1766 001 for more information Program Data Download To download the program and data from a memory module to the controller s memory on the Comms menu in your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software point EEPROM and then click Load from EEPROM With MicroLogix 1400 you can also use the LCD and the LCD buttons on the module to transfer applications to or from the controller TIP For more information on program data download refer to your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software documentation Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules 165 Program Data Upload To upload the program and data from the controller s memory to a memory module on the Comms menu in your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software point EEPROM and then click Store to EEPROM With MicroLogix 1400 you can also use the LCD and the LCD buttons on the module to
350. op right portion as shown below In this example the mode switch position is set to RUN Current Mode Switch Position 000000 RU OOOOOO 6123456769612 456739 a rb p iiis Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 130 Using the LCD Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Controller Modes The table below shows the possible controller modes when the mode switch positions at PROGRAM REMOTE or RUN For example if the Mode Switch is at RUN and you want to test a control program with running it for a single scan you have to first change mode switch position to REMOTE before you run the control program in the remote test single scan mode with your RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro programming software Possible Controller Modes by Mode Switch Position When the Mode Switch Possible Controller Modes are Positions at PROGRAM download in progress program mode suspend mode operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction REMOTE remote download in progress remote program mode remote suspend mode operation halted by execution of the SUS instruction remote run mode remote test continuous mode remote test single scan mode RUN run mode Changing Mode Switch Position Mode Switch position can be changed at two different times using LCD keypad One is when the controller is powered up and the other is while the controller is powered Mode Swit
351. operties Usage Help Using the LCD 119 The TUF element of the LCD Function File is set to 7 to specify the integer file N7 as the target integer file to monitor on the LCD as shown in the screen capture below aax HSC PTOX PWMx sm JE RTC LCD BH 650 jei Ta Hep Customized Boot Logo ASCII File 0 ESCD Start with Customized Display L TO Data Input Timeout of LCD Instructie 0 I DN LCD Instruction Job Done ERR LCD Display Operation Error 0 LCD Module Operation Error Num 0 User Detine File Number JOG Jog data update Mode Set Trimpot Low Value Trimpot High Value H POTO Trimpot 0 Data POTI Trimpot 1 Data TMIN Instruction Display Window EOK OK key in Customized Display The controller mode is set to REMOTE RUN Follow these steps to view and change the data values of the integer file N7 1 On the Main Menu screen select Monitoring by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad 00000 REMOTE 10 Status bHonitoring Made Switch 2 Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The File Number prompt 1s displayed B UL REMOTE File Num BB 3 If Integer is selected as shown in step 2 press the OK key If not selected press the Down key to select it and then press the OK key Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 120 Using the LCD 4 The current data value ON of the N7 0 wo
352. or the Belden cable after it is wired to the terminal block This guards against breakage of the Belden cable wites Communication Connections 95 Powering the AIC MicroLogix 1000 1200 and 1500 programmable controllers support 24V DC communication power on Channel 0 When connected to the 8 pin mini DIN connector on the 1761 NET AIC 1761 NET ENI and the 1761 NET ENIW these controllers provide the power for the interface converter modules The MicroLogix 1400 does not provide 24V DC communication power through communication ports Instead these pins are used to provide RS 485 communications directly Any AIC ENI or ENIW not connected to a MicroLogix 1000 1200 or 1500 controller requires a 24V DC power supply If both the controller and external power are connected to the AIC the power selection switch determines what device powers the AIC If you use an external power supply it must be ATTENTION ATTENTION 24V DC 15 20 Permanent damage results if a higher voltage supply is used Set the DC Power Source selector switch to EXTERNAL before connecting the power supply to the AIC The following illustration shows where to connect external power for the AIC Bottom View Always connect the CHS GND chassis ground terminal to the nearest ATTENTION earth ground This connection must be made whether or not an external 24V DC supply is used Power Options Below are two options for powerin
353. ot your system Refer to the recommended pages within the model for further help Troubleshooting Your System 207 Identify the error code and description Is the error hardware related Refer to page 206 for probable cause and recommended action Are the wire connections tight Tighten wire connections Does the controller have power supplied Is the Power lear Fault Clear Fau LED on Check power Refer to page 206 for Is the RUN probable cause and LED on recommended action Correct the condition causing the fault Is an input LED accurately showing status Is the Fault LED on Return controller to RUN or any of the REM test modes Refer to page 206 for probably cause and recommended action Hefer to page 206 for probable cause and recommended action Test and verify system operation Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 208 Troubleshooting Your System Analog Expansion 1 0 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Module Operation and Channel Operation The module performs operations at two levels module level channel level Module level operations include functions such as power up configuration and communication with the controller Internal diagnostics are performed at both levels o
354. ource ID Node Address 1 Control Line no handshaking Error Detection CRC Embedded Responses auto detect Duplicate Packet Message Detect enabled ACK Timeout 50 counts NAK retries 3 retries retries 3retries Stop Bits 1 Data Bits 8 The Communications Toggle Functionality can be operated using the LCD display on the controller as shown below Use the Communications Toggle Functionality to change from the user defined communication configuration to the default communications mode and back on Channel 0 The Default Communications DCOMM indicator on the LCD display operates to show when the controller is in the Communication Connections 73 default communications mode Hold down the OK key more than 5 seconds to toggle the communication mode on the Main Menu screen RSS S8 RU I s g oooooooo0o000 009999 0123456789012 456789 The Communication Toggle Functionality only affects the communication configuration of Channel 0 TIP Changing Communication Configuration Follow the procedure below to change from the user defined communication configuration to the default communications mode and back In this example we will start from the Main Menu screen of the LCD display as shown below If necessary press ESC repeatedly until you return to the Main Menu screen 1 On the Main Menu screen select Advance Set by using the Up
355. pair 10 100Base T with media converters or hubs fiber optic broadband thick wire coaxial cable 10Base 5 thin wire coaxial cable 10Base 2 See the following page for information on Ethernet physical media Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 378 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface MicroLogix 1400 Performance Considerations Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 The MicroLogix 1400 supports Ethernet communication via the Ethernet communication channel 1 shown in the drawing below Channel 0 RS 232 485 DH485 DF1 or ASCII Channel 1 Ethernet 10 100Base T 44606 Actual performance of an MicroLogix 1400 controller varies according to size of Ethernet messages frequency of Ethernet messages network loading the implementation of and performance of your processor application program Optimal Performance Micrologix 1400 controller to Micrologix 1100 Series B OS FRN 4 controller 2 node Ethernet network Operation Words MSG per Second Words per Second SinleTypdRead 20 Single Typed Reads 20 20 400 Single Typed Reads 100 20 2000 Optimal Performance MicroLogix 1400 controller to RSLinx Operation Words MSG per Second Words per Second Single Typed Read 1 25 25 Single Typed Reads 20 25 500 Single Typed Reads 100 25 2 500 MicroLogix 1400 and Connections to the Ethe
356. plication Considerations for Solid State Controls 561 1 Information about the Distributed Network Protocol In depth information on grounding and wiring Allen Bradley programmable controllers A description of important differences between solid state programmable controller products and hard wired electromechanical devices National Electrical Code Published by the National Fire Protection Association of Boston MA An article on wire sizes and types for grounding electrical equipment Allen Bradley Publication Index SD499 A complete listing of current documentation including ordering instructions Also indicates whether the documents are available on CD ROM or in multi languages Allen Bradley Industrial Automation Glossary AG 7 1 A glossary of industrial automation terms and abbreviations Common Techniques Used in this Manual The following conventions ate used throughout this manual Bulleted lists such as this one provide information not procedural steps Numbered lists provide sequential steps or hierarchical information Italic type is used for emphasis Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Chapter 1 Hardware Overview Hardware Fe atures The Bulletin 1766 MicroLogix 1400 programmable controller contains a power supply input and output circuits a processor an isolated combination RS 232 485 communication port an Ethernet port and a non isolated RS 232 communic
357. ply 12 62 112 Security Idle Event Counter for Reply Timeout 13 63 113 Security Idle Event Counter for Max Invalid Replies Or Comm Failure Detected 14 64 114 Security Idle Event Counter for Max Invalid Replies Or Comm Failure Detected 15 65 115 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Error Message 16 66 116 Security Idle Event Counter for Key Change Timeout 17 67 117 Security Idle Event Counter for Expected Key Change Timeout 18 68 118 Security Idle Event Counter for Expected Key Change Timeout 19 69 119 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Key Status Request 20 70 120 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Valid Aggressive Mode Request 21 71 121 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Valid Aggressive Mode Request 22 72 122 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Invalid Aggressive Mode Request 23 73 123 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Valid Key Change 24 74 124 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Invalid Key Change 25 75 125 Security Idle Event Counter for Rx Challenge 26 76 126 Security Idle Reserved 27 77 127 Security Idle Counter for Ignored events 28 78 128 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Unsolicited Non Critical ASDU 29 79 129 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Non Critical ASDU 30 80 130 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Critical ASDU 31 81 131 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Critical ASDU 32 82 132 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Valid Reply 33 83 133 Wait for Reply Event Counter for Rx Invalid Reply 34 84 134 Wait for Reply Eve
358. power disconnect switch where operators and maintenance personnel have quick and easy access to it If you mount a disconnect switch inside the controller enclosure place the switch operating handle on the outside of the enclosure so that you can disconnect power without opening the enclosure Whenever any of the emergency stop switches are opened power to input and output devices should be removed Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 26 Installing Your Controller Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 When you use the master control relay to remove power from the external I O circuits power continues to be provided to the controller s power supply so that diagnostic indicators on the processor can still be observed The master control relay is not a substitute for a disconnect to the controller It is intended for any situation where the operator must quickly de energize I O devices only When inspecting or installing terminal connections replacing output fuses or working on equipment within the enclosure use the disconnect to shut off power to the rest of the system TIP Do not control the master control relay with the controller Provide the operator with the safety of a direct connection between an emergency stop switch and the master control relay Using Emergency Stop Switches When using emergency stop switches adhere to the following points Do not program emergency stop switches in the controller progr
359. powered up e When the user enters the 1 0 Status screen from other screen using the LCD menu If you are at other screen and want to view 1 0 status you have to enter the I O Status screen manually using the menu Otherwise the current screen will be displayed continuously IMPORTANT Ifa user defined LCD screen is used the 1 0 S sctatus sreen is displayed e When the user holds down the ESC key for more than 3 seconds e When time out is enabled i e the time out period is set to a positive value and the time out period is passed You can enable and disable time out and set the time out period using the TO element in the LCD Function File For more information refer to the LCD Function File described in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Heference Manual publication 1766 RM001 e f time out is disabled i e the time out period is set to zero 0 and a custom LCD screen is displayed it will be displayed continuously until the user gives an input to change to other screen For more information see Using a User Defined LCD Screen on page 132 Viewing 1 0 Status Follow these steps to view the status of inputs and outputs on the LCD Monitor User Defined Target Files Using the LCD 111 1 On the Main Menu screen select I O Status by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below 000000 RU PISO Status Hon itor ing Hode Switch 2 Then press the OK key on the LCD k
360. pport you can find technical manuals a knowledge base of FAQs technical and application notes sample code and links to software service packs and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools For an additional level of technical phone support for installation configuration and troubleshooting we offer TechConnect support programs For more information contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative or visit http www rockwellautomation com support Installation Assistance If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation review the information that is contained in this manual You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running United States or Canada 1 440 646 3434 Outside United States or Use the Worldwide Locator at http www rockwellautomation com support americas phone_en html or contact Canada your local Rockwell Automation representative New Product Satisfaction Return Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility However if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned follow these procedures United States Contact your distributor You must provide a Customer Support case number call the phone number above to obtain one to your distributor to complete the return process Outside United Stat
361. put Config File Class Level of Index 20 is 1 B38 0 0 and B38 0 1 Class Level of Index 21 is 2 B38 1 0 and B38 1 1 Class Level of Index 22 is 3 B38 2 0 and B38 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes ate 0 Data File B38 bin Short Floating Point Analog Input Confi 1 3 1 6S 00000000 1 000000 00000001 0 00000 00 1 gn 0000000020 0 000000 00000000 0 000000 000000000 000000 00000000 0 000000 00000000 0 000000 00000000 0 000000 00000000 0 Radi cse zi EE o ps Properties Usage Help DNP3 Analog Output Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read an object with Any variation Analog Output Status Objects g40v0 Analog Output Status Any Variations g40v1 Analog Output Status 32 bit with flag default g40v2 Analog Output Status 16 bit with flag default g40v3 Analog Output Status Single prec flt pt with flag default Analog Output Command Objects g41v1 Analog Output 32 bit g41v2 Analog Output 16 bit g41v3 Analog Output Single prec flt pt Related Object File Number 16 bit Analog Output Object File Number 32 bit Analog Output Object File Number Short Floating Point Analog Output Object File Number Related Configuration File Number None
362. r receiving the last application segment If the downloaded user program fails the integrity check MicroLogix 1400 clears the downloaded user program and restores the default user program In this case the configured Channel configuration is not changed from the last valid configuration A user program cannot be downloaded while the controller is in Executing mode Before downloading send a mode change request with the function code STOP_APPL 18 See Starting and Stopping User Programs Mode Change via DNP3 Network on page 342 for more details Executing modes include Run Remote Run Test Continuous Scan and Test Single Scan modes Any others are Non Executing modes Rules for Uploading a User Program A DNP3 master should send the function code OPEN_FILE 25 READ 1 and CLOSE FILE 26 for uploading user programs When a master sends the function code OPEN FILE 25 with the file command object the file name string in File command object must be in this directory and file name format EXE processorName IMG The directory and file name extension string must all be in capital letters and the string size cannot be exceed 64 bytes The file name processorName is from the Processor Name in the Controller Properties dialog in RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro The maximum file size is 384 Kbytes The MicroLogix 1400 supports uploading of user programs up to 256Kbyte in size when Recipe is not configured When Recipe is configured
363. r DC voltage applications less than 14V the make break ratings for relay contacts cannot exceed 2A Working Voltage Working Voltage for 1766 L32AWA A Description Power Supply Input to Backplane Isolation Recommend Verified by on ation e of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second 265V AC Wor ing Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Input Group to Backplane Isolation Verified by on e of the following dielectric tests 1517V AC for 1 second or 2145V DC for 1 second 132V AC Worl ing Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation Input Group to Input Group Isolation Verified by on e of the following dielectric tests 1517V AC for 1 second or 2145V DC for 1 second 132V AC Worl ing Voltage basic insulation Output Group to Backplane Isolation Output Group to Output Group Isolation Verified by on 265V AC Worl Verified by on e of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1 second ing Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced insulation e of the following dielectric tests 1836V AC for 1 second or 2596V DC for 1second 265V AC Wor insulation ing Voltage basic insulation 150V AC Working Voltage IEC Class 2 reinforced Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Specifications 179 Working Voltage for 1766 L32BWA A Description Power Supply Input to Backplane Isolation Recommendation Ver
364. r Node2 Master Node3 Master Node4 The valid range is 0 to 65519 Default value is 0 This value is used to check validation for Master node address when Enable Master Address Validation is Enabled Checked Control For Channel 0 the selections can be No Handshaking Half Duplex Modem CTS RTS handshaking and No Handshaking 485 Network Default selection is No Handshaking For Channel 2 the selections can be No Handshaking and Half Duplex Modem CTS RTS handshaking Default selection is No Handshaking When the MicroLogix 1400 is connected to DNP3 Master using RS 232 line directly you must select No Handshaking If you want to use the Modem line in a half duplex network you must select Half Duplex Modem CIS RTS handshaking If the MicroLogix 1400 is connected to an RS 485 network and 1763 NCO1 cable is used you must select No Handshaking 485 Network If you want to send an ASCII string via a serial channel which is configured to DNP3 Slave protocol use AWA and AWT instructions to control the Modem For Cabling and Connections see Communication Connections on page 71 For AWA and AWT instructions refer to the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual 1766 RMO001 Hequest LL Confirmation Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked Primary Frames from the MicroLogix 1400 are s
365. r is lost to the controller The memory module provides additional backup that can be stored separately The memory module does not increase the available memory of the controller 1766 MM1 Memory Module 44536 1762 Expansion 1 0 1762 expansion I O can be connected to the MicroLogix 1400 controller as shown below A maximum of seven 1 0 modules in any combination can be connected to a controller See Appendix H to determine how much heat a certain combination generates 1762 Expansion 1 0 1762 Expansion 1 0 1762 Expansion 1 0 Connected to MicroLogix 1400 Controller 44581 44563 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 16 Hardware Overview Communication Cables Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Expansion 1 0 Catalog Number Description Digital 1762 1 8 8 Point 120V Input Module 1762 108 8 Point Sink Source 24V DC Input Module 1762 1016 16 Point Sink Source 24V DC Input Module 1762 1032T 32 Point Sink Source 24V dc Input Module 1762 048 8 Point 120 240V AC Triac Output Module 1762 0B8 8 Point Sourcing 24V DC Output Module 1762 0B16 16 Point Sourcing 24V DC Output Module 1762 0B32T 32 Point Sourcing 24V DC Output Module 1762 0V32T 32 Point Sinking 24V DC Output Module 1762 0W8 8 Point AC DC Relay Output Module 1762 0W16 16 Point AC DC Relay Output Module 1762 0X6l 6 Point Isolated AC DC Relay Output Module 1762 1080W6 8
366. r saving the file you can see the file ML1400A_DNP3S IMG This is the file to be used for download Ele Edit View Favorites Tools Help rer 2 3 4 Search Folders E Address 5 Name Size File and Folder Tasks A m 3KB IMGFile v Q MLI400A DNP3S PRF 1KB PICS Rules File Rename this gy Move this file ma ot IMPORTANT RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro v8 1 0 00 and MicroLogix 1400 Series A controller do not support the opening of IMG files Be sure to store your ladder program in the RSLogix Files RSS format before generating RSLogix IMG Files IMG Otherwise you may lose the latest modifications to your ladder program Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 339 IMPORTANT RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro v8 30 00 and the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller support the opening of IMG files However some information is not stored into the IMG file for example rung comments Be sure to store your ladder program in the RSLogix Files RSS format before generating RSLogix IMG Files IMG Rules for File Authentication The File Authentication process is optional and unnecessary when the master password of the downloaded ladder program is not configured When the password in the ladder program is configured by RSLogix 500 RSLogix Micro the DNP3 master sends a request with the function code AU
367. r that changes exist but the changes are not executed until you test the edits Deleted and replaced modified rungs are not removed from the program and inserted rungs are not executed until you assemble or test the edits Edit Functions in Program Online Editing During a program online editing session the processor not executing ladder logic This mode is like the offline editing mode Note that if a runtime online editing session was performed prior to entering the offline editing mode edit marked rungs I R and D appear in the program If you perform a program online edit once you accept or delete the rung the edits take effect immediately and the power rail is displayed as a solid line If you edit a rung with edit zone markers the markers are removed when the rung is accepted Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 170 X Online Editing Notes Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 General Specifications Specifications Description 1766 L32AWA A 1766 L32BWA A 1766 L32BXB A Dimensions 90 x 180 x 87 mm HxWxD 3 5 x 7 08 x 3 43 in Shipping weight 0 9 kg 2 0 Ibs Number of 1 0 24 inputs 20 digital and 4 analog and 14 outputs 12 digital and 2 analog Power supply voltage Heat dissipation 100 240V 15 10 at 47 63 Hz See System Loading and Heat Dissipation on page 395 24V DC 15 10 Class 2 SELV Power supply inrush 120
368. r to peer messaging port DF1 Half Duplex Operation Half Duplex master device initiates all communication by polling each slave device The slave device may only transmit when it is polled by the master It is the master s responsibility to poll each slave on a regular and sequential basis to allow slave devices an opportunity to communicate Connecting to Networks RS 232 RS 485 Interface 233 An additional feature of the DF1 Half Duplex protocol is that it is possible for a slave device to enable a MSG write or read to from another slave When the initiating slave is polled the MSG is sent to the master The master recognizes that the message is not intended for it but for another slave so the master immediately forwards the message to the intended slave The master does this automatically you do not need to program the master to move data between slave nodes This slave to slave transfer can also be used by programming software to allow slave to slave upload and download of programs to processors including the master on the DF1 Half Duplex link MicroLogix 1400 can act as the master or as a slave on a Half Duplex network When the MicroLogix 1400 is a slave device a master device is required to run the network Several other Allen Bradley products support Half Duplex master protocol They include the SLC 5 03 and higher processors enhanced PLC 5 processors MicroLogix 1200 1500 and Rockwell S
369. rd is displayed Note that the target word 0 which is right next to N7 is flashing which means the cursor is at the target word position B II BBBBH UnProtected 5 We will change the data value of the N7 0 word to the negative decimal value 1300 First press OK to move the cursor to the data value position Then the last digit of 00000 will be flashing which means the cursor is at the data value position e Press the Left key twice Then the cursor will position at the third digit Press the Up key three times to change the third digit to 3 B UnProtected Press the Left key once Then press the Up key once The second digit will change to 1 Note that 1 is still flashing which means the cursor is still at the data value position B H1 SHH UnProtected N Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Using the LCD 121 8 Press the Left key once Then press the Down key once The sign digit will change to as shown below Note that is still flashing which means the cursor is still at the data value position 9 Press OK to apply the changes Then the new value 1300 is applied Note that the target word 0 which is right next to N7 is flashing The cursor is moved automatically to the target word position You can identify this change of dat
370. ressor Catalog Number Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 24V DC 199 FSMA9 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 24V DC Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 48V DC 199 FSMA9 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 48V DC Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 115 125V DC 199 FSMA10 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 115 125V DC Bulletin 700 Type R Relay 230 250V DC 199 FSMA11 Bulletin 700 Type RM Relay 230 250V DC Bulletin 700 Type P or PK Relay 150V max AC or DC 700 2402 Miscellaneous electromagnetic 150V max AC or DC 799 N24 devices limited to 35 sealed VA 1 Varistor Not recommended for use on relay outputs RC Type Do not use with Triac outputs In solid state control systems grounding and wire routing helps limit the effects of noise due to electromagnetic interference EMT Run the ground connection from the ground screw of the controller to the ground bus prior to connecting any devices Use AWG 14 wire For AC powered controllers this connection must be made for safety purposes ATTENTION All devices connected to the RS 232 485 communication port must be referenced to controller ground or be floating personal injury not referenced to a potential other than ground Failure to follow this procedure may result in property damage or e For 1766 L32BWA 1766 L32BWAA controllers the COM of the sensor supply is also connected to chassis ground internally The 24V DC sensor power source should not be used to power output circuits It shou
371. rk 237 Important DH 485 Network Planning Considerations 237 Example DH 485 241 Modbus Communication 1 243 PS Areka a cig lane Mc Ai et a ty sala 243 Distributed Network Protocol 3 243 Appendix F Channel Configuration for DNP3 5 245 Channel 0 and Channel 2 Link Layer Configuration 247 Channel 1 Link Layer Configuration 248 DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration 250 Channel 0 and Channel 2 Link Layer Configuration Parameters 252 Channel 1 Ethernet Link Layer Configuration Parameters 255 DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration Parameters 260 DNP3 Slave Application 202 P ticuon COdes 4 65 jie aca v y D ette d ose tubes vo does d 273 Internal Indications isis 277 DNP3 Objects and MicroLogix 1400 Data 278 DON PS Data Coo wos 281 DNP 3 Configuration Piles qu dace ue LET dee 282 DNP3 Binary Input Object 287 DNP3 Binary ou o 2 err rdc eh d eee 289 DNP3 Double Bit Binary Input 292 DNP3 Counter Object esse es OVI e cete RO SS 294 DNP3 Frozen Counter 297 DNP3 Analog Input
372. rnet Network Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface 379 Optimal Performance MicroLogix 1400 to MicroLogix 1400 controller Operation Words MSG per Second Words per Second 1 o 20 Single Typed Reads 20 20 400 Single Typed Reads 100 20 2 000 The MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet connector conforms to ISO IEC 8802 3 STD 802 3 and utilizes 10 100Base T media Connections are made directly from the MicroLogix 1400 to an Ethernet hub or switch The network setup is simple and cost effective Typical network topology is pictured below Ethernet Network Topology Ethernet Hub or Switch RJ45 connectors on both ends of cable 10 100Base T to MicroLogix 1400 to PC Ethernet Card Channel 1 IMPORTANT The MicroLogix 1400 controller contains 10 100Base T RJ45 Ethernet connector which connects to standard Ethernet hubs or switchs via 8 wire twisted pair straight through cable To access other Ethernet mediums use 10 100Base T media converters or Ethernet hubs or switchs that can be connected together via fiber thin wire or thick wire coaxial cables or any other physical media commercially available with Ethernet hubs or switchs Connecting an Ethernet switch on the Ethernet Network The MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port supports the following Ethernet settings 10 Mbps half duplex or full duplex 100 Mbps half duplex or full duplex Mode selection can be automa
373. roller _ U761 CBL APOD or f Duplex protocol to multiple controllers CI 1761 CBL PMo2 straight through 44594 1 Series C or later cables are required for Class Div 2 applications You can connect a MicroLogix 1400 controller to your modem directly without using an external optical isolator such as AIC catalog number 1761 NET AIC as shown in the illustration below because Channel 0 is isolated within the controller Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 78 Communication Connections Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 MicroLogix 1400 Channel 0 to Modem Cable Pinout When connecting MicroLogix 1400 Channel 0 to a modem using an RS 232 cable the maximum that the cable length may be extended is 15 24 m 50 ft DTE Device DCE Device MicroLogix Modem 1400 PanelView Channel 0 etc 8 Pin 25 Pin 9 Pin 7 TXD 2 3 4 RXD 3 2 2 GND lt gt GND 7 5 1 DCD 8 1 8 20 4 5 DCD DSR 6 6 6 CIS lt CTS 5 8 3 RTS gt RTS 4 7 ATTENTION Do not connect pins 1 and 8 This connection will cause damage to the RS 232 485 communication port channel 0 of the MicroLogix 1400 and or the controller itself Constructing Your Own Modem Cable If you construct your own modem cable the maximum cable length is 15 24 m 50 ft with a 25 pin or 9 pin connector
374. rom 0 2 bits are used for one Index As an example a Double Bit Binary Input Object File is shown below This file has 10 elements and 80 Double Bit Binary Input points Index 0 of the Double Bit Binary Input Object is B20 0 0 and B20 0 1 Index 1 is B20 0 2 and B20 0 3 and Index 79 is B20 9 14 and B20 9 15 20 0 520 1 520 2 520 3 20 5 20 6 20 7 820 8 oy ccc of ogm9 c cc n I n n H20 4 0 0 0 o a GOG O DDDO o Oa OOOO Soo ce eae oo _ uu C codd dgduonpnmpcocDiZsoux B20 9 BE HEI B223 0 0 Desc 24 reportes Usage Help Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 294 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 As an example a Double Bit Binary Input Config File is shown below This file has 10 elements B39 0 0 and B39 0 1 can be configured for Class Level 0 1 2 or 3 for DNP3 Index 0 to 7 of the Double Bit Binary Input Object File B39 1 0 and B39 1 1 can be configured for Class Level for DNP3 Index 8 to 15 of the Double Bit Binary Inpu
375. rs are configurable The End Point type can be determined by the parameter End Point Type According to the parameter the MicroLogix 1400 works as different End Point types See the following table for each configuration End Point Type Connection Description Listening End Point A single TCP Server connection Any of the requests are accepted and the responses are transmitted via this connection The unsolicited responses are transmitted via this connection when this connection is available UDP datagram Accepts only broadcast packets when DNP3 destination node is one of OxFFFD OxFFFE and OxFFFF in the request Dual End Point A single Server connection Any of the requests are accepted and the responses are transmitted via this connection The unsolicited responses are transmitted via this connection when this connection is available This connection has higher priority than the Client connection A single TCP Client connection Any of the requests are accepted and the responses are transmitted via this connection The unsolicited responses are transmitted via this connection when this connection is available The MicroLogix 1400 does not request TCP client connection to DNP3 Master until an unsolicited response is generated UDP Datagram Accepts only broadcast packets when DNP3 destination node is one of OxFFFD OxFFFE and OxFFFF in the request Datagram End Point UDP Datagram only Any of the requests are
376. rses Request 30 0x1E FC ABORT FILE No MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 31 0x1F FC ACTIVATE CONFIG No MicroLogix 1400 parses Request 32 0x20 FC AUTHENTICATE REQ No MicroLogix 1400 parses Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 364 Function Codes for MicroLogix 1400 Series Controllers Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Message Function Name MicroLogix Description Type Code 1400 Support Request 33 0x21 FC_AUTHENTICATE_ERR No MicroLogix 1400 parses 34 0x22 to No Reserved 128 0x80 Response 129 0x81 FC_RESPONSE Yes MicroLogix 1400 sends Response 130 0x82 FC_UNSOLICITED_RESPONSE Yes MicroLogix 1400 sends Response 131 0x83 FC_AUTHENTICATE_RESP No MicroLogix 1400 sends 132 0x84 to No Reserved 255 OxFF Implementation Table MicroLogix 1400 supports DNP3 Certification Subset Level 2 The implementation table in this section identifies which object groups and variations function codes and qualifiers the device supports in both requests and responses The Request and Response columns identify all requests and responses that may be sent parsed by a DNP3 Master or must be parsed sent by the MicroLogix 1400 The implementation table lists all functionality required by either DNP3 Master or MicroLogix 1400 as defined within the DNP3 IED Conformance Test Procedures Any functionality beyond the highest subset level supported is indicated by grayed t
377. rted g70v2 File Control Authentication supported g70v3 File Control File command supported g70v4 File Control File command status supported g70v5 File Control File transport supported g70v6 File Control File transport status supported g70v7 File Control File descriptor supported g70v8 File Control File specification string not supported by Series A controllers supported by Series B controllers g91v1 Status of Requested Operation Activate configuration not supported by Series A controllers supported by Series B controllers Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 337 Default Directories and Files The MicroLogix 1400 has default directories and files for file handling in a DNP3 subsystem The default directories and files can be read from the controller using the function code OPEN_FILE 25 Read 1 and CLOSE_FILE 26 Currently supported directories are EXE and DIAG Supported files are listed in this section These directories files cannot be removed and cannot be created using DNP3 requests Supported Files and Directories Root Directory File Level Full name string to access Level Level ES NT o o o EXE EXE processorName IMG EXE processorName IMG DIAG CHO CSF DIAG CHO CSF CH1 ESF DIAG CH1 ESF CH2 CSF DIAG CH2 CSF The directory file names must all be in capital lett
378. rted object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read the object with all variations Binary Input Static Objects g1v0 Binary Input All Variations g1v1 Binary Input Packed format default glv2 Binary Input With flags Binary Input Event Objects g2v0 Binary Input Event All Variations g2v1 Binary Input Event Without time g2v2 Binary Input Event With absolute time g2v3 Binary Input Event With relative time default Related Object File Number Binary Input Object File Number Related Configuration File Number Binary Input Config File Number To generate a Binary Input Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure Binary Input Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file When the Binary Input Object File is configured Index number starts from 0 1 bit is used for 1 Index Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 288 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 As an example a Binary Input Object File is configured as shown below This file has 10 elements and 160 Binary Input points Index 0 of the Binary Input Object is B10 0 0 Index 1 is B10 0 1 and Index 159 is B10 9 15 Data File B10 bin Binary Input Object File ojx IUS RB SU 7 w D in eco
379. ructions and each instruction s status during the scan Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 408 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 sinking A term used to describe current flow between an I O device and controller I O circuit typically a sinking device or circuit provides a path to ground low or negative side of power supply sourcing term used to describe current flow between an I O device and controller I O circuit typically a sourcing device or circuit provides a path to the soutce high or positive side of power supply status The condition of a circuit or system represented as logic 0 OFF or 1 ON terminal point on an I O module that external I O devices such as a push button or pilot light are wired to throughput The time between when an input turns on and the corresponding output tutns on true The status of an instruction that provides a continuous logical path on a ladder rung upload Data is transferred to a programming or storage device from another device watchdog timer timer that monitors a cyclical process and is cleared at the conclusion of each cycle If the watchdog runs past its programmed time period it causes a fault workspace The main storage available for programs and data and allocated for working storage write To copy data to a storage device For example the processor WRITEs the information from the output data file to the outpu
380. ry wires MAYO B twisted pair N 44522 s ES je Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 32 Installing Your Controller Controller Mounting Dimensions 44516 1766 L32BWA 1766 L32AWA 1766 L32BXB 1766 L32BWAA 1766 L32AWAA 1766 L32BXBA Dimension Measurement 90 3 5 180 mm 7 087 in C 87 mm 3 43 in Controller and Exp ansion The controller mounts horizontally with the expansion I O extending to the right of the controller Allow 50 mm 2 in of space on all sides of the 0 Spacing controller system for adequate ventilation Maintain spacing from enclosure walls wireways adjacent equipment and so on as shown below Top 9 2 Side ol Jo i gt in Bottom 44517 Mounting the Controller MicroLogix 1400 controllers are suitable for use in an industrial environment when installed in accordance with these instructions Specifically this equipment is Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Installing Your Controller 33 intended for use in clean dry environments Pollution degree 2 and to circuits not exceeding Over Voltage Category IIO TE
381. s Toggle Functionality Ethernet Network Configuration Using the LCD 137 5 Press the Up or Down key to select the different mode Discrete in this example Press the OK key RU 6 The Key In Mode Change Notification screen is displayed as shown below Hode Change Done 7 Press the ESC key to return to the Advanced Set Menu screen as shown in step 2 The MicroLogix 1400 provides the Communications Toggle Functionality which allows you to change from the user defined communication configuration to the default communications mode and back to the user defined communication configuration on Channel 0 See Using the Communications Toggle Functionality on page 72 for more information on this feature Viewing Ethernet Status The Ethernet configuration screen of the LCD displays the MAC and IP addresses assigned to the controller Follow these steps to view the Ethernet configuration for your controller Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 138 Using the LCD 1 N A Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000000 User Display b dvanced Set Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Set Menu screen
382. s Counter Change Object Frozen 32bits Counter Change Object 16bits Analog Input Static Object 32bits Analog Input Static Object Short Floating Point Analog Input Static Object 16bits Analog Input Change Object 32bits Analog Input Change Object Short Floating Point Analog Input Change Object 16bits Analog Output Static Object 32bits Analog Output Static Object Short Floating Point Analog Output Static Object Small BCD Obiect Cn o co no co d 63 n3 C n3 PO The following table shows the structure of the DNP3 Default Variation Configuration File Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Word Offset Default Variation for the following Objects Group and Standard Alternate Default Default Variation Variations 0 Binary Input Static Object g1vi v2 1 Binary Input Change Object g2v3 vl v2 2 Binary Output Static Object g10v2 none 3 Reserved 4 Double Bit Binary Input Static Object g3v1 v2 5 Double Bit Binary Input Change Object g4v3 vi v2 6 16 bit Counter Static Object g20v6 v2 7 32 bit Counter Static Object g20v5 8 Frozen 16 bit Counter Static Object g21v10 v2 v6 9 Frozen 32 bit Counter Static Object g21v9 v1 vb 10 16 bit Counter Change Object g22v2 none 11 32 bit Counter Ch
383. s and to send the MSG commands Connections can be initiated by either a client program RSLinx application or a processor The client program or processor must first establish a connection to the MicroLogix 1400 to enable the MicroLogix 1400 to receive solicited messages from a client program or another processor In order to send an outgoing message the MicroLogix 1400 must first establish a connection with the destination node at a specified IP address on the Ethernet network A connection is established when a MSG instruction executes and no previous connection exists When a MSG instruction executes the MicroLogix 1400 checks to see whether a connection has been established with the destination node If a connection has not been established the MicroLogix 1400 attempts to establish a connection of the peer type In order to receive messages from another device on Ethernet an incoming connection must be established This incoming connection is made by the sending processor and uses one incoming connection in the receiving processor The MicroLogix 1400 supports a maximum of 32 EtherNet IP connections and 32 Modbus TCP connections allowing a maximum of 32 outgoing and a Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface 383 Duplicate IP address Detection maximum of 32 incoming simultaneous connections with up to 64 other devices or applications The connections are dedicated as follows Number of Co
384. s generated Note that a Data Set event can consume any number of event buffers depending on the Data Set configuration This is only applicable to Data Set events The event for other objects consumes a single event buffer When using Data Set events increase the number of events in the DNP3 Slave configuration Descriptor Element Configuration Each Descriptors element is configured in this here Double click each element to edit it Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 313 Descriptor Element Configuration E xi None Mw B fMicroL odis File 3 Descriptor Code NONE NAME DAEL PTYP Data Type Code NONE VSTR UINT INT FLT OSTR BSTR TIME Max Data Length bytes 0 255 Ancillary Value Any string This can be a binary array or ASCII string up to 16 words Point Addressing under Descriptor Element Configuration Data Set value for each Data Set element is configured by Point Address Type Point Type Point Index File Number File Element File Sub Element Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 314 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 When these values are configured properly according to the supported data files the MicroLogix 1400 responds with a g87v1 object filled with the value in the data file The following table shows the supported data files for the Point
385. served Error Configuration Error X400 010 0 0000 0000 General configuration error no additional information X401 010 0 0000 0001 Invalid input data format selected channel 0 X402 010 0 0000 0010 Invalid input data format selected channel 1 X403 010 0 0000 0011 Invalid output data format selected channel 0 X404 010 0 0000 0100 Invalid output data format selected channel 1 represents Don t Care Extended Error Codes for 1762 IF4 and 1762 0 4 Error Type Hex Module Extended Error Error Description Equivalent Error Code Information Code Binary Binary No Error X000 000 0 0000 0000 No error General Common 200 001 0 0000 0000 General hardware error no additional information Hardware Error X201 001 0 0000 0001 Power up reset state Hardware X300 001 1 0000 0000 Reserved Specific Error Configuration Error X400 010 0 0000 0000 General configuration error no additional information X401 010 0 0000 0001 Invalid range select Channel 0 X402 010 0 0000 0010 Invalid range select Channel 1 X403 010 0 0000 0011 Invalid range select Channel 2 X404 010 0 0000 0100 Invalid range select Channel 3 X405 010 0 0000 0101 Invalid filter select Channel 0 7762 F4 only X406 010 0 0000 0110 Invalid filter select Channel 1 1762 IF4 only X407 010 0 0000 0111 Invalid filter select Channel 2 1762 IF4 only X408 010 0 0000 1000 Invalid filter select Channel 3 1762 I
386. sing unexpected equipment operation If you attempt to insert or modify a rung with MSG PTO and PWM instruction the following error message will be generated by programming software Error Online editing of PTO PWM and MSG are not allowed on ML1400 RUN mode And the rung with MSG PTO and PWM instruction will not be accepted RSLogix 500 Pro 1 x Rung Has Errors Cannot Accept In online edit during PROGRAM mode program online edit there are no restrictions For example a user can insert MSG instruction if related MG file ot MG RI file is already defined in data file Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 168 Editing Types of Online Editing Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 ATTENTION ATTENTION When editing a rung that contains an MCR instruction both the MCR start and MCR end rungs must be edited whether it be test assemble cancel at the same time We recommend that you fully understand the possible results of the edit to the system under control Failure to properly edit a running program could result in unexpected controller operation Physical injury or equipment damage may result If you use Ell or STI interrupts and your application requires a quick interrupt latency the online edit feature is not recommended Online editing feature may increase the interrupt latency response time To ensure minimum interrupt latency place the mode switch in LCD screen
387. sol resp 4 2 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Event With absolute time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 4 3 Double bit Binary Input 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Event With relative time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 10 0 Binary Output Any Variation 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 10 2 Binary Output Output 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop status with flags 06 no range or all 12 1 Binary Command Control 3 select 17 28 index 129 response echo of request relay output block CROB 4 operate 5 direct op 6 dir op no ack 20 0 Counter Any Variation 1 read 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 20 1 Counter 32 bit with flag 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 20 1 Counter 32 bit with flag 7 freeze 06 no range or all 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 2 Counter 16 bit with flag 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 20 2 Counter 16 bit with flag 7 freeze 06 no range or all 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 5 Counter 32 bit without flag 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 372 Micrologi
388. ss Level of Index 1 is 2 B36 1 0 and B36 1 1 Class Level of Index 2 is 3 B36 2 0 and B36 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes 0 Data File B36 bin 16bits Analog Input Config File Offset 15 14 13 12 AX Ep Grow ae B 0 0 il 00000 0001 2 0 000 0 oo D LI 0 000 0 4 0 000 0 15 0000 0 0000 6 0 EE 0 000 0 8 0 9 0 000 0 Hist Binary coms 16 Dec oY B36 m Properties Usage Help For a 32 bit Analog Input Config File Class Level of Index 10 is 1 37 0 0 and B37 0 1 Class Level of Index 11 is 2 B37 1 0 and B37 1 1 Class Level of Index 12 is 3 B37 2 0 and B37 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes are 0 Offset 15 14 13 TS a B37 0 08 DH D 070TL il 000 000000002010 2 0 0 0 oo00 000 00 1 0 4 oo0 0 00 00 0 0 0 5 00000000000 6 0 0 0 000 00 0 0 0 E oo0 00 0 00 00 0 8 oo00 00 0 0 00 0 9 0 0 00 0 0 0 Radi Smat Columns 16 gt DEM xl py Properties Usage Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 303 For Short Floating Point Analog In
389. stem Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface Table of Contents 7 Specifications for Outputs in Non Hazardous Locations only 175 Wotking Voltage cael ii ot Reb A ais pep Ma 178 Expansion I O Specifications does E e eb e eee 179 Digital I O is Luise tacto ee tx s 179 Analog Mod les imei p Nails 188 Appendix B MicroLogix 1400 Replacement 197 Lithium Battery CoA BA sk TI aa oe naw ean 197 Iristallatto a fe pags in 197 Battery adv Re Po de edet ped o es 199 STOAT s nbsp esa toi oe e Ca d et ied 199 M d EAA 199 BS MEDI PER EE 201 Appendix C Understanding the Controller Status 203 Controller Status LED 203 Status Indicators on the 204 I O Status Indicators on the 1 205 Normal Operation com fa ange Rasy a awe we Wem PE TS 205 206 Controller Error Recovery 1 206 Analog Expansion I O Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 208 Module Operation and Channel 208 Powerup Diagnostics ssa carson ee dieser ERES 208 Critical and Non Critical 209 Module Error Definition Table
390. store your entry apply the changes 44612 ESC Previous menu level cancel your entry Using Menus to Choose Values Press To e Go to next menu level e Store your entry OK e Apply the changes e Go to previous menu level ESC e Cancel your entry since the last Ok 44614 e Press repeatedly to go to the main menu e Change menu item e Change value e Change position 44615 Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 108 Using the LCD Selecting Between Menu Items to be 44612 44613 44614 Cursor up or down a Honitor ing Mode Switch The symbol f is used as the cursor Cursor Display There are two different cursor types 000000 10 Status bHonitoring Hode Switch Data File bin BINARY RU Selection cursor the symbol is displayed left to the selected item Move cursor with the up down arrows Full block navigation is shown as a flashing block Change position with left right arrows Change values with up down arrows BE E3 0 0 Radix Binary zj Symbol Calmi pe gt Desc B3 24 Properties Usage Help Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Using the LCD 109 Setting Values ail Offset 15 14 1312111098 7 6 5 43 2 1 0 B3 0 d U Oot 6 0 0 0 G Change value up down arrows B3 1 amp QE OO dy OM 8 2 716 5 3 2
391. t 32 bit 1 read 06 range 129 response 00 01 start stop without flag 30 4 Analog Input 16 bit 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop without flag 30 5 Analog Input 1 read 06 range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop Single prec flt pt with flag 32 0 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all Any Variation 07 08 limited qty 32 1 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 32 bit without time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 2 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 16 bit without time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 3 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 32 bit with time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 4 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index 16 bit with time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 32 5 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 17 28 index Single prec flt pt 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp without time 32 7 Analog Input Event 1 read 06 range or all 129 response 17 28 index Single prec flt pt with time 07 08 limited qty 130 unsol resp 367 Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 368 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protoc
392. t Object File Default Class Level is 0 Any other bits are reserved So in the example below Class Level of Index 0 to 7 is 1 B39 0 0 and B39 0 1 Class Level of Index 8 to 15 is 2 B39 1 0 and B39 1 1 Class Level of Index 16 to 23 is 3 B39 2 0 and B39 2 1 and Class Level of other Indexes 0 Data File B33 bin Double Bit Input Config File oo oq oo o OF cc oF oo OF o o oo oo o co om oo o Il oo of r ol 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 gt nox on Radix Binary Smbbh 5 1 1 1 e Cours 16 2 Desc 229 E Usage Help DNP3 Counter Object The supported object group and variations are listed in this section The MicroLogix 1400 responds with the default group and variation when the DNP3 Master requests to read an object with Any variation Counter Static Objects g20v0 Counter Any Variation g20v1 Counter 32 bit with flag g20v2 Counter 16 bit with flag 920v5 Counter 32 bit without flag default g20v6 Counter 16 bit without flag default Counter Event Objects g22v0 Counter Event Any Variation
393. t Object File Number Short Floating Point Analog Input Object File Number Related Configuration File Number 16 bit Analog Input Config File Number 32 bit Analog Input Config File Number Short Floating Point Analog Input Config File Number To generate an Analog Input Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure Analog Input Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file When only one Analog Input Object File is configured the Index number starts from 0 for the configured object 1 word is used for 1 Index of 16 bit Analog Input Object 1 double word is used for 1 Index of 32 bit Analog Input Object and 1 short float is used for 1 Index of Short Floating Point Analog Input Object If 16 bit Analog Input Object File Number 32 bit Analog Input Object File Number and Short Floating Point Analog Input Object File Number were configured in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file the starting index number of 16 bit Analog Input Object is 0 and the starting index number of 32 bit Analog Input Object starts from the ending index number of 16 bit Analog Input Object For example if 10 elements of 16 bit Analog Input Object were configured 10 elements of 32 bit Analog Input Object and 10 elements of Short Floating Point Analog Input Object were configured the index numbers will be 16 bit Analog Input Object From 0 to 9 32 bit Analog Input Object From 10 to 19
394. t Prototypes Descriptors Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file and also the Maximum Number of Data Set Prototypes Desctiptors Files Each Data Set Prototypes Object file N data file can have up to 10 elements of Data Set Prototypes and each Data Set Descriptors Object file N data file can have up to 10 elements of Data Set Descriptors As an example with Data Set Prototypes files if you configure Data Set Prototypes Object File Numbers to 50 and Maximum Number of Data Set Prototypes Files to 9 N Data files 50 to 58 are reserved to store the structure of the Data Set Prototypes configuration Data Set Prototypes file N50 Data Set Prototypes file N51 Data Set Prototypes file N52 lt Data Set Prototypes file N53 Data Set Prototypes Data Set Prototypes file N54 Element Array N data file ps lt Data Set Prototypes file N58 P oN eee MN AN OM Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 308 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 As an example with Data Set Descriptors files if you configure Data Set Descriptors Object File Number to 60 and Maximum Number of Data Set Descriptors File to 9 Data files 60 to 68 are reserved to store the structure of the Data Set Descriptors configuration lt Data Set Descriptors file N60
395. t dissipation of AS your system for installation in an enclosure For System Loading take the Dissipation value from the appropriate system loading worksheets on pages 397 or 399 Heat Dissipation Catalog Number Heat Dissipation Equation or Constant Calculation Sub Total 1766 L32AWA 15 2 W 0 4 x System Loading 152W 04x W 1766 L32BWA 15 7 W 0 4 x System Loading 157W 04x W 1766 L32BXB 17 0 W 0 3 x System Loading 170W 0 3x__ W W 1762 1 8 2 0 W x number of modules 2 0 W x W 1762 1 4 2 0 W x number of modules 2 0 W x W 1762 IF20F2 2 6 W x number of modules 2 6 W x W Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 400 System Loading and Heat Dissipation Heat Dissipation Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 1762 108 3 7 W x number of modules 3 7 Wx W 1762 1016 5 4 x number of modules 54W x W 1762 1032T 6 8 W x number of modules at 30 0V dc 6 8 W x at 30 0V dc W 5 4 W x number of modules at 26 4V dc 5 4 W x at 26 4V dc W 1762 IR4 1 5 W x number of modules 15Wx W 1762 IT4 1 5 W x number of modules 15Wx W 1762 048 2 9 W x number of modules 29Wx W 1762 0B8 1 6 W x number of modules 1 6 Wx W 1762 0B16 2 9 W x number of modules 29Wx W 1762 0B32T 3 4 W x number of modules 3 4Wx W 1762 0F4 3 8 W x number of modules 38Wx W 1762 0V32T 2 7 W x number of modules 27Wx W 1762 0W8 2 9 W x number of modules 29Wx W 176
396. t modules Numerics 1747 BA battery 29 1762 expansion 1 0 dimensions 36 1762 24AWA wiring diagram 50 1762 1 8 wiring diagram 56 1762 IF20F2 input type selection 63 output type selection 64 terminal block layout 64 wiring 64 1762 IF4 input type selection 65 terminal block layout 66 1762 1016 wiring diagram 57 1762 1032T wiring diagram 58 1762 108 wiring diagram 56 1762 1080W6 wiring diagram 62 1762 0A8 wiring diagram 58 1762 0B16 wiring diagram 59 1762 0B32T wiring diagram 60 1762 0B8 wiring diagram 59 1762 0V32T wiring diagram 60 1762 0W16 wiring diagram 61 1762 0W8 wiring diagram 61 1762 0X61 wiring diagram 62 5 05 processors Ethernet communications 377 A address 401 Advanced Interface Converter See AIC advanced LCD configuration 134 agency certifications 19 AIC applying power to 95 94 connecting 88 definition 401 installing 94 recommended user supplied components 93 safety consideration 94 91 analog cable grounding 55 analog channel wiring guidelines 54 analog expansion 1 0 208 diagnostics 208 module operation vs channel operation 208 power up diagnostics 208 system wiring guidelines 63 troubleshooting 208 analog inputs analog channel wiring guidelines 54 application 401 Index battery 162 processor battery life expectancy 197 baud rate 401 before calling for assistance 212 bit 401 bit file monitoring 112 block diagrams 401 Boolean operators 401 BOOTP configuring SLC 5 05 386 390 using t
397. t status of the controller if a programming device is not present or available Controller Status LED Indicators Controller LED Location Allen Bradley POWER RUN FAULT FORCE MicroLogix t 44607 Controller LED Indicators LED Color Indicates POWER off No input power or power error condition green Power on RUN off Not executing the user program green Executing the user program in run mode green flashing Memory module transfer occurring Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 204 Troubleshooting Your System Controller LED Indicators LED Color Indicates FAULT off No fault detected red flashing Application fault detected red Controller hardware faulted FORCE off No forces installed amber Forces installed Status Indicators on the LCD Status Indicators on the LCD SS SOs SS Status Indicators on the LCD mum I BBOOOOOO0O0000 0100000 RU 6123456789612 4567389 090 0000000090 27 Indicator Color Indicates COMM 0 off Not transmitting via RS 232 485 port Channel 0 empty rectangle on Transmitting via RS 232 485 port Channel 0 solid rectangle COMM 1 off Not transmitting via Ethernet port Channel 1 empty rectangle on Transmitting via Ethernet port Channel 1 solid rectangle COMM 2 off Not transmitting via RS 232 port Channel 2 empty rectangle on Transmitting via RS 232 port Channel 2 solid rectangle DCOMM off Co
398. te or time data Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 162 Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules Memory Module Operation Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 RTC Battery Operation The real time clock uses the same replaceable battery that the controller uses The RTC Function File features a battery low indicator bit RTC 0 BL which shows the status of the replacement battery When the battery is low the indicator bit is set 1 This means that the battery wire connector could be disconnected or if the battery is connected the battery may be ready to fail in the next two weeks In the latter case the replacement battery needs to be replaced with a new one When the battery low indicator bit is clear 0 the battery level is acceptable The Battery Low BAT LO indicator on the LCD display of the controller also shows the status of the replaceable battery When the battery is low the indicator is displayed as a solid rectangle When the battery level is acceptable the indicator is displayed as an empty rectangle J as shown below SESS SHO 000000 RU I BBOOOOOOO0000 LILILILILIE 6123456789612 456789 0 0000000090 2 If RTC battery is low and the controller is powered the RTC operates normally If the controller power is removed and the RTC battery is low RTC data is lost ATTENTION Operating with a low battery indication for more than 2 weeks may result in in
399. ted functions Auto Negotiate When Auto Negotiate is disabled unchecked the Ethernet speed duplex is forced to Auto read write and Port either 10 Mbps Half duplex 10 Mbps Full duplex 100 Mbps Half duplex or 100 Negotiate Setting Mbps Full duplex as selected in the Port Setting field enabled and Port Setting When Auto Negotiate is enabled checked the Port Setting Field allows you to select the 10 100 Mbps range of speed duplex settings that the MicroLogix 1400 will negotiate Full Duplex Half Duplex Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 386 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Configuration Parameters Parameter Description Default Status MSG The amount of time in ms allowed for a MSG instruction to establish a connection with 15 000 ms read write Connection the destination node The MSG Connection Timeout has 250 ms resolution and a range Timeout from 250 to 65 500 MSG Reply The amount of time in ms that the MicroLogix 1400 will wait for a reply to a command 3 000 ms read write Timeout that it has initiated via a MSG instruction The MSG Reply Timeout has 250 ms resolution and a range from 250 65 500 Inactivity The amount of time in minutes that a MSG connection may remain inactive before itis 30 minutes read write Timeout terminated The Inactivity Timeout has a 1 minute resolution and a range from 1 65 500 minutes Contact The Contact string which is specified by
400. tem synchronizes its timer with the time from DNP3 Master and the time in RTC module is synchronized with the time from DNP3 Master Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 336 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Download a User Program via DNP3 Network Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 This table shows RTC Accuracy Configure the NEED_TIME bit according to this table so that a DNP3 Master can send the time synchronization request for more accurate times in the controller RTC Accuracy Ambient Temperature RTC Accuracy 0 C 32 F 13 121 seconds month 25 C 77 F 54 5 seconds month 40 104 F 29 78 seconds month 55 C 131 F 43 150 seconds month f These numbers are maximum worst case values over a 31 day month Using File Control Status of Requested Operation objects a user program can be downloaded uploaded initialized via DNP3 communication Also Serial Channel 0 Status File Ethernet Channel 1 Status File and Serial Channel 2 Status File can be uploaded from the MicroLogix 1400 File Control Status of Requested Operation objects and supported File Control Status of Requested Operation objects are listed in this section Unsolicited Response for File Control Status of Requested Operation objects is not supported All the responses are sent to DNP3 Master with Function Code 129 81h e g70v1 File Control File identifier superseded not suppo
401. ter requests to read the object with all variations Frozen Counter Static Objects g21v0 Frozen Counter All Variations g21v1 Frozen Counter 32 bit with flag e g21v2 Frozen Counter 16 bit with flag g21v5 Frozen Counter 32 bit with flag and time g21v6 Frozen Counter 16 bit with flag and time g21v9 Frozen Counter 32 bit without flag default g21v10 Frozen Counter 16 bit without flag default Frozen Change Event Objects g23v0 Frozen Counter Event All Variations 023 1 Frozen Counter Event 32 bit with flag default g23v2 Frozen Counter Event 16 bit with flag default g23v5 Frozen Counter Event 32 bit with flag and time g23v6 Frozen Counter Event 16 bit with flag and time Related Object File Number 16 bit Counter Object File Number 32 bit Counter Object File Number Related Configuration File Number 16 bit Frozen Counter Config File Number 32 bit Frozen Counter Config File Number To generate a Frozen Counter Object from the DNP3 Subsystem in the controller you should configure Counter Object File Number in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration file The number of elements for Frozen Counter Object is the same as the number of Counter Objects For example if 10 Counter elements were configured 10 Frozen Counter elements will be generated in the MicroLogix 1400 controllers internally You cannot access the Frozen Cou
402. the absolute value of the difference between the present value of an analog input point and the value that was most recently queued as an event for that point exceeds the deadband value that was configured in this file Related Configuration File Numbers 16 bit Analog Input Deadband Config File Number In Series B 32 bit Analog Input Deadband Config File Number In Series B Short Floating Point Analog Input Deadband Config File Number In Series B Word Offet Description Element 0 Deadband for point 0 Element 1 Deadband for point 1 Element 2 Deadband for point 2 Element 3 Deadband for point 3 Element 4 Deadband for point 4 Element 5 Deadband for point 5 For Analog Output type data you can configure the object flag information in the Configuration file The upper byte of the configuration file of these objects is used to configure the object flag Other bits are reserved Related Configuration File Numbers 16 bit Analog Input Deadband Config File Number In Series B 32 bit Analog Input Deadband Config File Number In Series B Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 286 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Short Floating Point Analog Input Deadband Config File Number In Series B Bit Offset 15 14 113 12 f 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Element 0 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1 FO r r r r r r r Element 1 F7 F6
403. the network and the parameters that can be set to the specific requirements of the network The following are major configuration factors that have a significant effect on network performance number of nodes on the network addresses of those nodes baud rate The following sections explain network considerations and describe ways to select parameters for optimum network performance speed See your programming software s user manual for more information Number of Nodes The number of nodes on the network directly affects the data transfer time between nodes Unnecessary nodes such as a second programming terminal that is not being used slow the data transfer rate The maximum number of nodes on the network is 32 Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 240 Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Setting Node Addresses The best network performance occurs when node addresses are assigned in sequential order Initiators such as personal computers should be assigned the lowest numbered addresses to minimize the time required to initialize the network The valid range for the MicroLogix controllers is 1 31 controllers cannot be node 0 The default setting is 1 The node address is stored in the controller Communications Status file CS0 5 0 to CS0 5 7 Setting Controller Baud Rate The best network performance occurs at the highest baud rate which is 19 200
404. tic based on the IEEE 802 3 auto negotiation protocol In most cases using the auto negotiation function results in proper operation between a switch port and MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port With RSLogix500 RSLogix Micro programming software version 8 10 00 or later you can manually set the communication rate and duplex mode of an Ethernet port you have connected to the switch port The settings of the Ethernet port and the switch port must match Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 380 Connecting to Networks via Ethernet Interface Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 When connecting the MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port to a IMPORTANT IMPORTANT 10 100Base T Ethernet switch note the following recommendations e Use the auto negotiation function for both the switch port and the MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port e f you want to force to a specific speed duplex mode you must force both the MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port and the switch port to the same setting Cables Shielded and non shielded twisted pair 10 100Base T cables with RJ45 connectors ate supported The maximum cable length between an MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port and a 10 100Base T port on an Ethernet hub ot switch without repeaters or fiber is 100 m 323 ft However in an industrial application cable length should be kept to a minimum TIP The Ethernet cabling with straight through method is recommended as below Do not make the incorrect connecti
405. tic file number is used to store the diagnostics for the troubleshooting of DNP3 Ethernet subsystem The status of DNP3 TCP and UDP subsystem is stores to this data file The value of this parameter is N file only Valid range is 0 7 9 to 255 Default value is 0 See Diagnostics on page 344 Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 260 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 DNP3 Slave Application Layer Configuration Parameters Channel for Unsolicited Response Only channels already configured for DNP3 protocol appear in the Channel for Unsolicited Response dropdown menu Any and all Unsolicited Responses are transmitted via this selected channel Channel 1 is only supported in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers Enable Unsolicited On Start Up Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 will not send any enabled Unsolicited Responses after a restart until it has recetved a FC_ENABLE_UNSOLICITED 20 command from the DNP3 Master When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 will send any enabled Unsolicited Responses after a restart to the DNP3 Master unconditionally Enable Unsolicited For Classi Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disab
406. tion 1766 RM001 for detailed configuration information For more information on configuring your MicroLogix 1400 controller for Distributed Network Protocol see Channel Configuration for DNP3 Slave on page 245 For more information about Distributed Network Protocol see the Distributed Network Protocol Specifications available from http www dnp org Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 244 Connecting to Networks via RS 232 RS 485 Interface Notes Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Channel Configuration for DNP3 Slave Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 This appendix e describes the MicroLogix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 describes the procedures used to program and troubleshoot DNP3 protocol in the controller gives an overview of the DNP3 implementation in the controller shows application examples of DNP3 applications The default communication protocol for the serial ports Channel 0 and Channel 2 in the MicroLogix 1400 is 1 Full Duplex To communicate with DNP3 protocol the channel must be configured to DNP3 protocol The default communication protocol for the Ethernet Channel 1 in the MicroLogix 1400 is Ethernet IP To communicate with DNP3 over IP protocol in the MicroLogix 1400 Series B controller the channel must be configured to use the DNP3 protocol The MicroLogix 1400 Series A controller supports DNP3 protocol via Channel
407. tion assigned to the controller Follow these steps to edit the Ethernet network configuration for your controller Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 140 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Using the LCD 1 N On the Main Menu screen select Advanced Set by using the Up and Down keys on the LCD keypad as shown below If the menu items shown in the figure below are not displayed on the Main Menu screen you need to scroll down the screen by pressing the Down key 000006 User Display b dvanced Set Press the OK key on the LCD keypad The Advanced Settings Menu screen is displayed as shown below If ENET Cfg is selected press the OK key Otherwise select ENET Cfg using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key 000006 REMOTE KeyIn Hode Cfg Cfg If IP Address is selected press the OK key If not select IP Addtess using the Up and Down keys and then press the OK key 000000 REMOTE ENET Cfg Status PIP Address Using the LCD 141 4 The password screen is displayed Press Up Down Left and Right key s to enter the Master password up to a maximum of 10 digits In this example the current Master password is allocated as 1234 000000 ENET Setup Master Password 5 After entering the Master password press the OK key on the LCD keypad nN displayed
408. top Bits The selections can be 1 1 5 and 2 Default selection is 1 Enable Master Address Validation Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests from any DNP3 Master When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 accepts the requests only from the DNP3 Master which is configured in the Master Node0 to Master Node4 The maximum number of Master Node Addresses for the Master Address Validation is 5 Enable Self Address Valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When this bit is Disabled Unchecked any packets which contain the destination address 65532 FFFCh are ignored When this bit is Enabled Checked any packets which contain the destination address 65532 FFFCh are accepted and processed Master This value is used to validate the Master node address when the Enable Master Address Validation is Enabled Checked send Unsolicited Response when Unsolicited Response functionality is enabled An Unsolicited Response is sent out to the DNP3 Master having this address The valid range is 0 to 65519 Default value is 0 Publication 1766 UMO01F EN P March 2011 254 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Master Node1 Maste
409. troller 69 Notes Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 70 Wiring Your Controller Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Chapter 4 Supported Communication Protocols Communication Connections This chapter describes how to communicate with your control system The method you use and cabling required to connect your controller depends on what type of system you are employing This chapter also describes how the controller establishes communication with the appropriate network Topics include supported communication protocols default communication configurations using communications toggle functionality connecting to RS 232 port connecting to RS 485 network connecting to AIC connecting to DeviceNet connecting to Ethernet The MicroLogix 1400 controllers provide three communication channels an isolated RS 232 485 communication port Channel 0 an Ethernet port Channel 1 and a non isolated RS 232 communication port Channel 2 MicroLogix 1400 controllers support the following communication protocols from the primary RS 232 485 communication channel 0 and the RS 232 communication channel 2 DH 485 Full Duplex DF1 Half Duplex Master and Slave e DF1 Radio Modem Modbus RTU Master and Slave ASCII DNP3 Slave The Ethernet communication channel Channel 1 allows your controller to be connected to a local area network for various devices providing 10 Mbps 100 Mbps
410. trollers 234 modes 404 module error field 210 monitoring user defined target files 111 motor starters bulletin 509 surge suppressors 44 motor starters bulletin 709 surge suppressors 44 negative logic 405 network 405 nominal input current 405 normally closed 405 normally open 405 null modem cable 79 0 object quality flags 318 oerformance considerations 378 offline 405 offset 405 off state leakage current 405 one shot 406 online 406 online editing 167 directions and cautions 167 edit functions in program online editing 169 types 168 operating buttons 107 operating voltage 406 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 output device 406 P performance Ethernet processor 378 planning considerations for a network 257 power considerations input states on power down 24 23 loss of power source 24 other line conditions 24 23 power supply inrush 23 power distribution 23 power source loss of 24 power supply inrush power considerations 23 preparing for upgrade 213 preventing excessive heat 25 processor 406 processor file 406 program file 406 program mode 406 program scan 406 programming 17 programming device 406 protocol 406 publications related 12 purpose of this manual 11 read 407 real time clock 14 battery operation 162 operation 161 removal installation under power 161 writing data 161 related documentation 12 related publications 12 relay 407 relay logic 407 relays surge suppressors for 44 remot
411. ts 232 Read Only UINT 4 2 Maximum analog input 256 3 index 233 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of analog input 0 256 3 points 234 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for double bit 1 binary input events 235 Read Only UINT 4 2 Maximum double bit 256 8 binary input index 236 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of double bit 0 256 8 binary input points 237 Read Only INT 1 1 Support for binary input 1 events 238 Read Only UINT 4 2 Max binary input index 256 16 239 Read Only UINT 4 2 Number of binary input 0 256 16 points 240 Read Only UINT 4 2 Max transmit fragment 2048 27 2048 When this value is size written to the controller the communication configuration file is changed to this value 241 Read Only UINT 4 2 Max receive fragment size 2048 242 Read Only VSTR length of length ofthe Device manufacturer s This variation returns firmware FRN the string string value software version 1 00 value Supported ranges FRN FRN FRN xx yyy where x is 0 99 and 00 999 For example FRN 1 00 FRN 1 05 FRN 12 05 FRN 102 27 or FRN 103 117 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 324 Object Group 0 Variations for Attribute Set 0 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Variation Read Attribute Length in Max Description Value Series A Value Series B Write Data Bytes Length in
412. ustomized Startup screen LINE S MACHINE Your imported Bitmap file format should meet the following criteria image resolution 128 x 64 pixels black white image image size 1088 bytes consisting of image header 62 bytes raw image data size 1024 bytes padding data 2 bytes To load a customized boot logo image to your controller the CBL Customized Boot Logo ASCII File element in the LCD Function File should be configured properly If the CBL element is set to 0 default or if the indexed ASCII file does not exist the embedded default logo will be displayed Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 104 Using the LCD Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 Function Fies nlx HSC PTO PWM STI LCD cso 41 gt E Customized Boot Logo ASCII File 20 SCD Start with Customized Display 1 L TO Data Input Timeout of LCD Instructic 0 LDN LCD Instruction Job Done 1 ERR LCD Display Operation Error Bit 1 ERN LCD Module Operation Error Num 2 TUF Target User Define File Number 7 JOG Jog data update Mode Set 1 L Trimpot Low Value 1 L Trimpot High Value 2 L Trimpot 0 Data TMIN 1 POTI Trimpot 1 Data TMIN 1 WND Instruction Display Window EOK OK key in Customized Display Once a valid bitmap file is imported successfully you shou
413. ut for the connector is shown below Pin Pin Name Tx Rx not used by 10 1 00 10 1 00 Rx not used by 10 1 00 N O amp O oy A wy N 10 1 00 Publication 1766 0 March 2011 End view of RJ 45 Plug 12345678 87654321 Looking into a RJ45 Jack Communication Connections 99 When to use straight through and cross over cable MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port to 10 100Base T Ethernet switch cables utilize a straight through pin out 1 1 2 2 3 3 6 6 Direct point to point 10 100 Base T cables connecting the MicroLogix 1400 Ethernet port directly to another Ethernet port or a computer 10 100Base T port require a cross over pin out 1 3 2 6 3 1 6 2 TIP For more information on using ethernet cables with MicroLogix 1400 see MicroLogix 1400 and PC Connections to the Ethernet Network on page 379 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 100 Communication Connections Notes Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Chapter 5 Using the LCD This chapter describes how to use the LCD and keypad on the MicroLogix 1400 controller Topics include operating principles I O status display mohitoring user defined target files using the mode switc
414. uthentication based on the DNP3 Specification Supplement to Volume 2 Secure Authentication Version 2 00 DNP3 Secure Authentication has been implemented in the DNP3 Application Layer of the MicroLogix 1400 system If you configure any parameters regarding DNP3 Secure Authentication in the DNP3 Slave Application Layer configuration it affects all ports which are configured for DNP3 protocol in the MicroLogix 1400 controller Enable Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers The valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Disabled Unchecked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 disables DNP3 Secure Authentication subsystem When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 enables DNP3 Secure Authentication subsystem Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 265 Enable Aggressive Mode in Secure Authentication This parameter is supported only in MicroLogix 1400 Series B controllers The valid selections are Enabled Checked and Disabled Unchecked Default value is Enabled Checked When the selection is Disabled Unchecked the MicroLogix 1400 disables DNP3 Aggressive Mode in Secure Authentication subsystem When the selection is Enabled Checked the MicroLogix 1400 enables DNP3 Aggressive Mode in Secure Authentication subsystem Critical FCs File Number in Secure Authentication
415. valid RTC data unless power is on continuously The memory module supports the following features User Program User Data Datalog and Recipe Back up User Program Compare Data File Download Protection Memory Module Write Protection lt Removal Insertion Under Power Using Real Time Clock and Memory Modules 163 ATTENTION Electrostatic discharge can damage the Memory Module Do not touch the connector pins or other sensitive areas User Program User Data Datalog and Recipe Back up The memory module provides a simple and flexible program data DataLog and Recipe transport mechanism allowing the user to transfer the program data DataLog and Recipe to the controller without the use of a personal computer and programming software The memory module can store one user program at a time During program transfers to or from the memory module the controller s RUN LED flashes Program Compare The memory module can also provide application security allowing you to specify that if the program stored in the memory module does not match the program in the controller the controller will not enter an executing run or test mode To enable this feature set the S 2 9 bit in the system status file See Status System File in the MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers Instruction Set Reference Manual Publication 1766 001 for more information Data File Download Protection The memory module
416. wering the AICE iste bestie ue cb beso 95 Comnecine to DeviceNet ni ni ne Leen ERO GER ER 96 Cable Selection weit 96 Connecting to 97 Connections e do ade ui tg nt put Atay 98 Chapter 5 Operating Principles sii 102 StartUp SCC CT de DDR bf and ahh 103 Main Menu and Default Screen 105 Buttons cvi i RE OUO US 107 Using Menus to Choose Values 107 Selecting Between Menu 108 Displays emae 108 Setting VALUES E Fa ia iUe 109 T7 Stasi eise aa vst 109 Viewing I O e Red cosa ERR s 110 Monitor User Defined Target 111 Target User Defined File Number TUF 111 Monitonnew Dit Biles 112 Monitoring Integer 117 Monitoring Double Integer 122 Monitor Floating point 128 Monitor System Status Files 128 Using the Mode Switch iioc eR exe ed xm Este x ue ea 129 Controller Modes ES s ETT aee T PEE 130 Changing Mode Switch 130 Using a User Defined LCD 132 User Defined ECD Serer ioia a e po
417. x 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Implementation Table for Series B controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue Group Var Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num dec hex Codes dec hex 20 5 Counter 32 bit without flag 7 freeze 06 no range or all 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 20 6 Counter 16 bit without flag 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop 06 no range or all 20 6 Counter 16 bit without flag 7 freeze 06 no range or all 8 freeze noack 9 freeze clear 10 frz cl noack 21 0 Frozen Counter Any 1 read 00 01 start stop Variation 06 no range or all 21 1 Frozen Counter 32 bit with 1 read 06 no range or all 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 21 2 Frozen Counter 16 bit with 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop flag 06 no range or all 21 5 Frozen Counter 32 bit with 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop flag and time 06 no range or all 21 6 Frozen Counter 16 bit with 1 read 00 01 start stop 129 response 00 01 start stop flag and time 06 no range or all 21 9 Frozen Counter
418. y 1 60 1 Class Objects Class 0 data 1 read 06 no range or all 60 2 Class Objects Class 1 data 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 20 enbl unsol 06 no range or all 21 dab unsol 60 3 Class Objects Class 2 data 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 60 4 Class Objects Class 3 data 1 read 06 no range or all 07 08 limited qty 20 enbl unsol 06 no range or all 21 dab unsol 70 2 File Control authentication 29 authenticate 5B free format 129 response 5B free format file 70 3 File Control file command 25 open file 5B free format Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Implementation Table for Series controllers DNP Object Group amp Variation Request Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 DNP3 Master may issue MicroLogix 1400 must parse Response DNP3 Master must parse MicroLogix 1400 may issue 375 Group Description Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes Num Num dec hex Codes dec hex 70 3 File Control file command 27 delete file 5B free format 70 4 File Control file command 26 close file 5B free format 129 response 5B free format status 70 4 File Control file command 30 abort file 5B free format 129 response 5B free format status 70 5 File Control file transport 1
419. y generated in the tree list of the Data Files Channel Configuration Program Files svso SYS1 df Lap 2 1 28 Data Files BR Cross Reference E 00 OUTPUT 0 n INPUT D 52 STATUS 83 BINARY Dl 74 TIMER D CS COUNTER R6 CONTROL E NT INTEGER D Binary 16bits Analog Input Object File EE hoo Binary Input Contig File EE hlc 150i Analog Input Config File Data Logging D FLOAT Input Object File You need to adjust the number of the elements for each file according to your application In this example the number of the elements is 10 for Binary Input Object File and 10 for 16 bit Analog Input Object File Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 328 Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 Publication 1766 UMO001F EN P March 2011 In the Binary Input Config File the bit 1 bit 0 of B30 0 B30 1 and B30 2 are configured to 0 1 1 0 and 1 1 respectively The event for the index 0 15 of Binary Input Object will be generated as a Class 1 event the event for the index 16 31 as a Class 2 event and the event for the index 32 47 as a Class 3 event if there are any changes for the points B10 0 B10 1 or B10 2 For any other Binary Input points the events will not be generated Data File B30 bin Binary Input Config File Offset 151413121110 9 8 7 6 4321 B30 D
420. y invalid configuration in DNP3 Slave Application Layer Invalid File Number specified 9 BAD DNP3 ADDRESS The error was caused by invalid configuration in DNP3 Slave Application Layer Invalid File Number specified 10 TABLE WRITE PROTECTED The specified DNP3 object data file has been locked to be written 11 TABLE ACCESS DENIED The specified DNP3 object data file has been locked to be read or written 12 TABLE OWNERSHIP ERROR The specified DNP3 object data file has been locked to be read or written If an error code is within 6 to 12 related file number and element number are shown in word 59 and 60 56 CS0 56 CS2 56 Application Layer Error Count 57 CS0 57 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 CS2 57 Function Code that caused the last error Communication Status File Words Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 349 Words Offset File Element File Element Description Description for Description for Channel 0 Channel 2 58 CS0 58 52 58 Last Transmitted IIN in the response 59 50 59 52 59 Data file number of last error request 60 50 60 52 60 Data element number of last error request 61 50 61 52 61 Received Confirm Function Code Counter 62 CS0 62 CS2 62 Received Read Function Code Counter 63 CS0 63 52 63 Received Write Function Code Counter 64 50 64 52 64 Received Etc Function Code Counter 65 50 65 52 65 Transmitt
421. yer Error Count 17 CS0 17 52 17 Link Layer Error Codes 0 ERR_NO_ERROR 1 ERR_NO_RX_BUFFER 2 ERR_TOO_SHORT 3 ERR_TOO_LONG 4 ERR_UART_ERROR 5 ERR_BAD_CRC 6 ERR CTS TIMEOUT 7 ERR CTS DROP MID PKT 8 ERR UNKNOWN CHAR 18 50 18 52 18 Reserved Always 0 19 CS0 19 52 19 Reserved Always 0 20 CS0 20 CS2 20 Reserved Always 0 21 CS0 21 CS2 21 Reserved Always 0 22 CS0 22 52 22 Reserved Always 0 23 CS0 23 CS2 23 Data Link Layer Active Node Table 24 CS0 24 CS2 24 Length 25 CS0 25 CS2 25 Format Code 26 CS0 26 CS2 26 Number of Nodes 27 50 27 52 27 Reserved Always 0 28 CS0 28 CS2 28 Reserved Always 0 29 CS0 29 CS2 29 Reserved Always 0 30 CS0 30 CS2 30 Reserved Always 0 31 CS0 31 CS2 31 Reserved Always 0 32 CS0 32 52 32 Reserved Always 0 33 CS0 33 52 33 Reserved Always 0 34 CS0 34 CS2 34 Reserved Always 0 35 CS0 35 CS2 35 Reserved Always 0 36 CS0 36 CS2 36 Reserved Always 0 37 CS0 37 52 37 Reserved Always 0 38 CS0 38 CS2 38 Reserved Always 0 39 CS0 39 CS2 39 Reserved Always 0 40 CS0 40 CS2 40 Reserved Always 0 41 50 41 52 41 Reserved Always 0 Publication 1766 UM001F EN P March 2011 Communication Status File Words Micrologix 1400 Distributed Network Protocol DNP3 347 Words Offset File Element File Element Description Description for Description for Channel 0 Channel 2 13 50 13 52 13 Undelivered M

MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Controllers

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents